-
1 трансляция
трансляция "один к одному" — one-for-one translation
Авиация и космонавтика. Русско-английский словарь > трансляция
-
2 алгоритм трансляции
трансляция "один к одному" — one-for-one translation
Русско-английский большой базовый словарь > алгоритм трансляции
-
3 трансляция несколько к одному
трансляция "один к одному" — one-for-one translation
Русско-английский большой базовый словарь > трансляция несколько к одному
-
4 трансляция один к одному
1. one-for-one translationпередача "один к одному" — one-for-one transmission
трансляция "один к одному" — one-for-one translation
2. one-to-one translationавтокод "один к одному" — one-to-one autocode
ассемблер "один к одному" — one-to-one assembler
Русско-английский большой базовый словарь > трансляция один к одному
-
5 трансляция
1. ж. тлв. радио broadcast2. ж. телегр. repeater3. ж. вчт. compilation4. ж. wired-radio relay service5. ж. физ. translationтрансляция "один к одному" — one-for-one translation
-
6 система трансляции
Русско-английский большой базовый словарь > система трансляции
-
7 трансляция несколько к одному
Information technology: several-for-one translation (когда каждому элементу входного языка может соответствовать несколько элементов выходного языка)Универсальный русско-английский словарь > трансляция несколько к одному
-
8 être
être [εtʀ]━━━━━━━━━1. linking verb━━━━━━━━━➭ TABLE 61━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Pour les locutions comme être en colère, c'est dommage, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━1. <a. to be• soyez sages ! be good!► être de• serez-vous des nôtres demain ? will you be coming tomorrow?2. <• être fabriqué par... to be made by...━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Les temps composés français ne se traduisent pas toujours par des temps composés anglais: le passé composé français peut se traduire soit par le prétérit, soit par le parfait anglais, selon le contexte.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━• est-il déjà passé ? has he been already?3. <a. to be• où étais-tu ? where were you?b. ( = aller)━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Lorsque avoir été décrit un déplacement, il est rendu le plus souvent par to go ; lorsqu'il exprime le fait de s'être trouvé quelque part, il se traduit par to be.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━• as-tu déjà été à l'étranger ? -- oui j'ai été en Italie l'an dernier have you ever been abroad? -- yes I went to Italy last year4. <a. ► il est + adjectif it is• il est étrange que... it's odd that...• quelle heure est-il ? what time is it?• il est un pays où... there is a country where...• il est des gens qui... there are people who...• il était une fois... once upon a time there was...d. ► c'est, ce sont + nom ou pronom━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► En anglais, to be se met au temps de l'action décrite.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Notez l'emploi possible d'un auxiliaire en anglais pour traduire les propositions tronquées.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━• qui a crié ? -- c'est lui who shouted? -- he did or it was hime. ► c'est + adjectif it is• ça c'est vrai ! that's true!• un hôtel pas cher, c'est difficile à trouver it's not easy to find a cheap hotel• voler, c'est quelque chose que je ne ferai jamais stealing is something I'll never dof. (locutions)► c'est... qui• c'est eux or ce sont eux qui mentaient they are the ones who were lying• c'est toi qui le dis ! that's what you say!• c'est moi qu'on attendait it was me they were waiting for► c'est... que• ne partez pas, c'est à vous que je veux parler don't go, it's you I want to talk to► c'est que (pour expliquer)quand il écrit, c'est qu'il a besoin d'argent when he writes, it's because he needs money• c'est que je le connais bien ! I know him so well!• c'est qu'elle n'a pas d'argent it's because she has no money ; (exclamatif) but she has no money!► ce n'est pas que• ce n'est pas qu'il soit beau ! it's not that he's good-looking!► est-ce que ?• est-ce que c'est vrai ? is it true?• est-ce que vous saviez ? did you know?• est-ce que tu m'entends ? can you hear me?• est-ce que c'est toi qui l'as battu ? was it you who beat him?• quand est-ce que ce sera réparé ? when will it be fixed?• où est-ce que tu l'as mis ? where have you put it?► n'est-ce pas ? → n'est-ce pas5. <a. ( = créature) beingb. ( = individu) person* * *
I ɛtʀverbe intransitif (+ v avoir)1)voilà ce qu'il en est — ( présentation) this is how it is; ( conclusion) that's how it is
qu'en est-il de...? — what's the news on...?
2)je suis à vous tout de suite/dans un instant — I'll be with you right away/in a minute
3)il n'est plus — euph he's no longer with us
fût-il duc/en cristal — even if he were a duke/it were made of crystal
••on ne peut pas être et avoir été — Proverbe you can't stay young forever
••
Dans la plupart des situations exprimant l'existence, l'identité, la localisation, la qualité, être sera traduit par to be: je pense donc je suis = I think therefore I am; le soleil est une étoile = the sun is a star; j'étais chez moi = I was at home; l'eau est froide = the water is coldLes locutions figées contenant être sont traitées sous l'entrée appropriée. Ainsi être en train de/sur le point de/hors de soi etc sont respectivement sous train, point, hors etc; comme si de rien n'était et quoi qu'il en soit sous comme et quoi. De même, les expressions avec si et les questions commençant par que sont traitées sous si et que, à part qu'est-ce à dire?, que l'on trouvera sous dire. Selon le même principe, l'emploi facultatif de étant après considérer comme et présenter comme est traité sous ces verbes; étant donné (que) et étant entendu que sont sous donné et entendu. La plupart des autres emplois de étant se traduisent par being: cela (ou ceci) étant = this being so. En revanche, c'est-à-dire, n'est-ce pas, peut-être et soit sont des entrées à part entière, traitées à leur place dans le dictionnairePar ailleurs, on consultera utilement les notes d'usage répertoriées, notamment pour l'expression de l'heure, la date, les nationalités, les professions, les nombres etcêtre = verbe auxiliaireêtre auxiliaire de la voix passive se traduit par to be. On notera l'emploi des divers temps en anglaisau présent: où sont les épreuves? elles sont révisées par le traducteur = where are the proofs? they are being revised by the translator; votre voiture est réparée = your car has been repaired; les portes sont repeintes chaque année = the doors are repainted every yearau passé: les épreuves ont été révisées en juin = the proofs were revised in June; les épreuves ont été révisées plusieurs fois = the proofs have been revised several times; les épreuves ont été révisées bien avant ma démission = the proofs had been revised long before I resignedêtre se traduit par to have si le temps est également composé en anglais - ce qui est beaucoup moins fréquent qu'en français (voir ci-dessus) - sauf avec naître. Dans certains contextes, on peut avoir: elles sont tombées = they have fallen; ils se sont enfuis = they have escaped; elle s'était vengée = she had taken her revengeLes verbes traduits par une construction passive ou attributive en anglais ( se vendre = to be sold; s'indigner = to be indignant) suivent les mêmes règles au passé: tous les livres se sont vendus = all the books have been sold; elle se serait indignée = she would have been indignantNoter que la forme pronominale à valeur passive est souvent mieux rendue en anglais par une forme intransitive: les livres se sont bien vendus = the books have sold wellêtre = allerLorsqu'il signifie aller, être se traduit par to be en anglais, mais seulement s'il est directement suivi d'un complément de lieu: je n'ai jamais été en Chine = I've never been to China. Suivi d'un infinitif, il se rend par to go to: il a été voir son ami = he's gone to see his friend; j'ai été manger au restaurant = I went to eat in the restaurantDans le sens de s'en aller, on notera les tournures recherchées: ils s'en furent au théâtre = they went to the theatre; ils s'en furent (déçus) = they left (disappointed)est-ce, ou sa variante plus familière c'est, se traduit généralement par is it: est-ce leur fils/voiture? = is it their son/car?; c'est grave? = is it serious?; c'est toi ou ton frère? = is it you or your brother?Quand ce garde sa valeur démonstrative, l'anglais précise la référence: est-ce clair? = is that clear?; qui est-ce? ( en montrant une personne) = who is he/she?; et aussi = who is that?; mais, en parlant de quelqu'un qui vous appelle au téléphone, ou à quelqu'un qui frappe à la porte: = who is it?est-ce n'est généralement pas traduit dans les tournures emphatiques ou permettant d'éviter l'inversion du sujet: est-ce que tu parles russe? = do you speak Russian?; est-ce leur fils, ce garçon? is this boy their son?; qui est-ce qui l'a fait? = who did it?; qui est-ce que tu as rencontré? = who did you meet?; quand/où est-ce que tu manges? = when/where do you eat?; qu'est-ce que c'est? = what is it?, ou, comme vu plus haut, = what is this/that? selon qu'on montre un objet proche ou éloignéNéanmoins, la tournure emphatique est également possible en anglais dans certaines expressions: qu'est-ce que j'entends? = what's this I hear?; est-ce bien ce qu'il a voulu dire? = is that what he really meant?c'est se traduit, selon les contextes, it is ( it's), this is, that is ( that's): c'est facile ( de critiquer) = it's easy; (ce que tu me demandes, ce travail) = that's easy; c'est moi (réponse à ‘qui est-ce?’) = it's me; (réponse à ‘qui le fait?’) = I do; (réponse à ‘qui l'a fait?’) = I did; (pour me désigner sur une photo, ou comme étant le personnage dont il est question) = that's me ( traduit également ça, c'est moi); c'est Mme Fox (qui téléphone, réponse à ‘qui est-ce?’) = it's Mrs Fox; (réponse à ‘qui le fait?’) = Mrs Fox ou Mrs Fox does; (réponse à ‘qui l'a fait?’) = Mrs Fox did; (que je montre, dont vous voulez parler) = that's Mrs Fox; c'est eux, ce sont eux (qui sont là-bas, que je montre) = it's them; ( qui le font) = they do; ( qui l'ont fait) = they did; ( qui arrivent) = here they are; ce sont mes enfants ( que je vous présente) = these are my children; ( qui sont là-bas) = they are my children; c'est cela = that's right; c'est ça! tu crois que je vais faire le travail tout seul? = what's this! do you think I'm going to do the work all by myself?Lorsqu'il reprend un nom, un infinitif ou une proposition qui le précède c'est se traduit seulement par is: une étoile, c'est un réacteur nucléaire = a star is a nuclear reactor; réussir, c'est une question de volonté = to succeed is a question of will; sortir par ce temps, c'est de la folie = going out in this weather is sheer madness; eux, ce sont mes amis = they are my friendsDe même, lorsque c'est que reprend un groupe nominal ou une proposition, il se traduit simplement par is that: le comique, c'est que... = the funny thing is that... On trouvera en général cette tournure sous l'entrée appropriée, comme comique, fort, importer etcLorsque c'est que sert à donner une explication il se rend généralement, et selon le temps, par it is that, it was that, mais aussi, pour insister sur l'explication, par it is/was because: si j'ai fait ça, c'est que je ne pouvais pas faire autrement = if I did that, it was because I couldn't do otherwise. ce n'est pas que se traduit la plupart du temps it is/was not that (la contraction est it's not plutôt que it isn't): ce n'est pas qu'il soit bête, mais... = it's not that he is stupid, but...En corrélation avec un pronom relatif, c'est peut soit garder sa valeur de présentatif (voir plus haut) et se rendre par that's: c'est le journaliste qui m'a interviewé/que nous avons rencontré/dont je te parlais = that's the journalist who interviewed me/(that) we met/I was telling you about; c'est le château où je suis né = that's the castle where I was born; c'est ce qui me fait croire que... = that's what makes me think that...; c'est justement ce que je disais = that's exactly what I was saying; soit constituer une tournure emphatique qui se rend en anglais selon la nuance: c'est de la même femme que nous parlons = we're talking about the same woman; c'était d'en parler devant elle qui me gênait = talking about it in front of her was what made me feel uneasy ou what made me feel uneasy was talking about it in front of her; c'est lui/Paul qui l'a cassé ( je le dénonce) = he/Paul broke it; ( je l'accuse) = he/Paul is the one who broke it; c'est mon frère qui l'a écrit = it was my brother who wrote it ou my brother's the one who wrote it; c'est de ta soeur que je parlais, pas de toi = it was your sister I was talking about, not you; c'est cette voiture qui m'intéresse = this is the car (that) I am interested in; c'est lui le coupable = he is the culprit; ce sont eux les meurtriers = they are the murderersc'est à suivi d'un infinitif se traduit parfois par it is suivi de l'adjectif correspondant si cette même transformation est possible en français ( c'est à désespérer = c'est désespérant = it's hopeless), mais c'est rare, et il est conseillé de se reporter à l'infinitif en question ou à l'un des autres termes obtenus à partir de transformations semblablesc'est à... de faire (ou parfois à faire) se traduira de deux manières: c'est à Pierre/lui de choisir ( c'est son tour) it's Pierre's/his turn to choose; ( c'est sa responsabilité) it's up to Pierre/to him to chooseLa notion de rivalité contenue dans c'est à qui suivi du futur doit être rendue explicite en anglais: c'est à qui proposera le plus de réformes = each is trying to suggest more reforms than the other; c'était à qui des deux aurait le dernier mot = they were each trying to get in the last word; c'était à qui trouverait le plus d'erreurs dans le texte = they were vying with each other to find the most mistakes in the textc'est, équivalent de ça fait dans le compte d'une somme, se rend par it is: c'est 200 francs = it's 200 francs; c'est combien? = how much is it?ce sera avec valeur modale de ce doit être se traduit it must be: ce sera mon professeur de piano = it must be my piano teacherêtre = verbe impersonnelil est facile de critiquer = it is easy to criticize; il serait nécessaire de faire = it would be necessary to do; il est des gens bizarres = there are some strange people; il n'est pas de jour/d'heure sans qu'il se plaigne = not a day/an hour goes by without him complainingOn se référera par ailleurs aux notes d'usage concernant l'heure et la date; voir aussi les entrées temps et foisil est à suivi d'un infinitif se rend différemment, selon les nuances qu'imposent le contexte, par it must be, it has to be, it should be, it can be suivis du participe passé. Pour plus de sûreté, on se reportera à l'infinitif en question, où cette construction est généralement traitéeil est de suivi d'un substantif ou d'un groupe nominal se rend souvent par it is suivi directement d'un adjectif ou d'un substantif précédé d'un déterminant (article, pronom): il est de coutume de faire (ou qu'on fasse) = it is customary ou the custom to do; il est de notre responsabilité de faire = it is our responsibility to do; mais ce n'est pas une règle absolue, et il est préférable de consulter des entrées telles que goût, règle, notoriété etc pour avoir des traductions adéquates. Voir également 1 Voir également 1 ci-dessous pour des exemples supplémentairesCertains cas sont traités sous la rubrique ‘être = verbe impersonnel’; d'autres, expressions figées, le sont sous l'entrée appropriée; voir par exemple poche et frais pour en être de sa poche/pour ses frais. Enfin, quand l'antéc édent de en est exprimé dans la phrase, l'expression est traitée plus bas sous être de: où en étais-je? = where was I?; je ne sais plus où j'en suis = I'm lost; où en es-tu de tes recherches? - j'en suis à mi-chemin/au début = how far have you got in your research? - I'm halfway through/at the beginning; elle a eu plusieurs amants/accidents: elle en est à son quatrième = she has had several lovers/accidents: this is her fourth; j'en suis à me demander si... = I'm beginning to wonder whether...; j'en étais à ne pouvoir distinguer le vrai du faux = I got to the point where I couldn't distinguish between truth and falsehoodSuivie d'un substantif représentant un vêtement, l'expression peut être traduite to be in, mais on consultera l'entrée appropriée pour s'en assurer. Si l'on dit to be in uniform ou éventuellement to be wearing a uniform pour être en uniforme, l'anglais préfère généralement to be wearing a suit à to be in a suit pour être en costume (de même pour robe, tailleur etc). Dans le cas d'un déguisement, on a to be dressed up as: être en pirate = to be dressed up as a piratej'y suis ( je vous comprends) = I'm with you; ( plus général mais un peu familier) = I get it; je n'y suis pas ( je ne comprends pas) = I don't get it; vous y êtes? (vous comprenez?) = are you with me?; (vous êtes prêt(e)?) = are you ready?; 20000 francs? vous n'y êtes pas! = 20,000 francs? you're a long way out!; tu n'y es pas, c'est plus compliqué que ça = you don't realize, it's a lot more complicated than that. Voir aussi les entrées y, adverbe de lieu, et pourêtre + prépositionsLa plupart des cas ( être dans, sur, devant, pour, après, avec etc) sont traités sous la préposition correspondante. Ne sont retenus ici que les cas particuliers de être à et être deLes cas où l'on peut faire l'ellipse de être ou le remplacer par un autre verbe sont traités sous la préposition à; ceux de en être à sous la rubrique ‘en être’, et ceux de c'est à sous la rubrique ‘c'est’Les emplois de être à suivi d'un groupe nominal et signifiant ‘tendre vers’ sont généralement traités sous le substantif approprié, comme temps, hausse, agonie etc dans les expressions le temps est à la pluie, être à la hausse, être à l'agonie. De même, quand être à signifie un état, c'est sous le substantif ou adjectif approprié, comme bout, disposition, quai, vif etc, qu'on trouvera la ou les traductions de l'expression correspondanteSuivi d'un infinitif et signifiant devoir être, être à peut généralement se traduire, en observant les mêmes nuances qu'avec devoir, par must be, have to be ou should be suivi du participe passé du verbe anglais. Il reste conseillé de consulter l'infinitif en question, comme plaindre, prendre etc. On en trouve également un traitement succint sous les rubriques ‘être = verbe impersonnel' et ‘c'est'Au sens de appartenir à, l'anglais utilise to be suivi du cas possessif quand le possesseur est un être animé ou d'un pronom possessif si celui-ci est représent é par un pronom objet. Si le cas possessif n'est pas d'usage, on utilise de préférence to belong to: ce livre est à moi/à mon frère = this book is mine/my brother's; ces dictionnaires sont au service de traduction = these dictionaries belong to the translation department; à qui est ce chien? = who does this dog belong to? ou whose dog is this? Voir 2 ci-dessous pour des exemples supplémentairesQuand elle exprime un état ou une situation, la tournure être de suivie d'un substantif sans déterminant est traduite sous le substantif en question, notamment avis, garde, service etc. De même, certaines expressions où la présence de déterminant est variable, comme dans être de mauvaise foi/d'une incroyable mauvaise foi sont traitées sous l'entrée appropriée, en l'occurrence, foi; voir aussi humeur, massacrante, poil etcLa construction être d'un/d'une suivie d'un adjectif substantivé ou d'un substantif exprimant une qualité ou un défaut peut généralement être rendue par to be so suivi de l'adjectif correspondant en anglais, si le substantif est seul: elle est d'un ridicule/d'une prétention! = she's so ridiculous/so pretentious!; si le substantif est qualifié, l'adjectif devient généralement un adverbe en anglais: il est d'une exquise courtoisie/d'une incompétence rare = he's exquisitely courteous/exceptionally incompetent; mais il n'est pas inutile de vérifier les traductions des adjectifs et substantifs à leur entrée avant de rendre cette constructionAu sens de participer à, faire partie de, la tournure être de se traduit de façon très variable (voir aussi partie): il est des nôtres ( il vient avec nous) = he's with us; (il est de notre clan, agit et pense comme nous) = he's one of us; serez-vous des nôtres? = will you be (coming) with us?; êtes-vous des nôtres? = are you coming with us? (ici, coming est nécessaire, pour éviter l'ambiguïté de are you with us?); les journalistes ne sont pas/ne seront pas du voyage = the journalists aren't coming/won't be coming on the trip; ils ont organisé une expédition mais je n'en étais pas = they organized an expedition but I wasn't part of it; il y avait un congrès mais il n'en était pas = there was a congress but he didn't take partSuivi d'un infinitif et précédé de noms abstraits avec l'article défini ( l'idéal, l'essentiel etc) ou de superlatifs ( le plus simple), être de se traduit généralement par to be suivi de l'infinitif avec to: le plus simple serait de tout recommencer = the simplest thing to do would be to start all over again
II ɛtʀnom masculin1) ( organisme vivant) beingun être sans défense — a defenceless [BrE] creature
2) ( personne) personun être cher or aimé — a loved one
3) ( nature intime) being4) Philosophie
••
Dans la plupart des situations exprimant l'existence, l'identité, la localisation, la qualité, être sera traduit par to be: je pense donc je suis = I think therefore I am; le soleil est une étoile = the sun is a star; j'étais chez moi = I was at home; l'eau est froide = the water is coldLes locutions figées contenant être sont traitées sous l'entrée appropriée. Ainsi être en train de/sur le point de/hors de soi etc sont respectivement sous train, point, hors etc; comme si de rien n'était et quoi qu'il en soit sous comme et quoi. De même, les expressions avec si et les questions commençant par que sont traitées sous si et que, à part qu'est-ce à dire?, que l'on trouvera sous dire. Selon le même principe, l'emploi facultatif de étant après considérer comme et présenter comme est traité sous ces verbes; étant donné (que) et étant entendu que sont sous donné et entendu. La plupart des autres emplois de étant se traduisent par being: cela (ou ceci) étant = this being so. En revanche, c'est-à-dire, n'est-ce pas, peut-être et soit sont des entrées à part entière, traitées à leur place dans le dictionnairePar ailleurs, on consultera utilement les notes d'usage répertoriées, notamment pour l'expression de l'heure, la date, les nationalités, les professions, les nombres etcêtre = verbe auxiliaireêtre auxiliaire de la voix passive se traduit par to be. On notera l'emploi des divers temps en anglaisau présent: où sont les épreuves? elles sont révisées par le traducteur = where are the proofs? they are being revised by the translator; votre voiture est réparée = your car has been repaired; les portes sont repeintes chaque année = the doors are repainted every yearau passé: les épreuves ont été révisées en juin = the proofs were revised in June; les épreuves ont été révisées plusieurs fois = the proofs have been revised several times; les épreuves ont été révisées bien avant ma démission = the proofs had been revised long before I resignedêtre se traduit par to have si le temps est également composé en anglais - ce qui est beaucoup moins fréquent qu'en français (voir ci-dessus) - sauf avec naître. Dans certains contextes, on peut avoir: elles sont tombées = they have fallen; ils se sont enfuis = they have escaped; elle s'était vengée = she had taken her revengeLes verbes traduits par une construction passive ou attributive en anglais ( se vendre = to be sold; s'indigner = to be indignant) suivent les mêmes règles au passé: tous les livres se sont vendus = all the books have been sold; elle se serait indignée = she would have been indignantNoter que la forme pronominale à valeur passive est souvent mieux rendue en anglais par une forme intransitive: les livres se sont bien vendus = the books have sold wellêtre = allerLorsqu'il signifie aller, être se traduit par to be en anglais, mais seulement s'il est directement suivi d'un complément de lieu: je n'ai jamais été en Chine = I've never been to China. Suivi d'un infinitif, il se rend par to go to: il a été voir son ami = he's gone to see his friend; j'ai été manger au restaurant = I went to eat in the restaurantDans le sens de s'en aller, on notera les tournures recherchées: ils s'en furent au théâtre = they went to the theatre; ils s'en furent (déçus) = they left (disappointed)est-ce, ou sa variante plus familière c'est, se traduit généralement par is it: est-ce leur fils/voiture? = is it their son/car?; c'est grave? = is it serious?; c'est toi ou ton frère? = is it you or your brother?Quand ce garde sa valeur démonstrative, l'anglais précise la référence: est-ce clair? = is that clear?; qui est-ce? ( en montrant une personne) = who is he/she?; et aussi = who is that?; mais, en parlant de quelqu'un qui vous appelle au téléphone, ou à quelqu'un qui frappe à la porte: = who is it?est-ce n'est généralement pas traduit dans les tournures emphatiques ou permettant d'éviter l'inversion du sujet: est-ce que tu parles russe? = do you speak Russian?; est-ce leur fils, ce garçon? is this boy their son?; qui est-ce qui l'a fait? = who did it?; qui est-ce que tu as rencontré? = who did you meet?; quand/où est-ce que tu manges? = when/where do you eat?; qu'est-ce que c'est? = what is it?, ou, comme vu plus haut, = what is this/that? selon qu'on montre un objet proche ou éloignéNéanmoins, la tournure emphatique est également possible en anglais dans certaines expressions: qu'est-ce que j'entends? = what's this I hear?; est-ce bien ce qu'il a voulu dire? = is that what he really meant?c'est se traduit, selon les contextes, it is ( it's), this is, that is ( that's): c'est facile ( de critiquer) = it's easy; (ce que tu me demandes, ce travail) = that's easy; c'est moi (réponse à ‘qui est-ce?’) = it's me; (réponse à ‘qui le fait?’) = I do; (réponse à ‘qui l'a fait?’) = I did; (pour me désigner sur une photo, ou comme étant le personnage dont il est question) = that's me ( traduit également ça, c'est moi); c'est Mme Fox (qui téléphone, réponse à ‘qui est-ce?’) = it's Mrs Fox; (réponse à ‘qui le fait?’) = Mrs Fox ou Mrs Fox does; (réponse à ‘qui l'a fait?’) = Mrs Fox did; (que je montre, dont vous voulez parler) = that's Mrs Fox; c'est eux, ce sont eux (qui sont là-bas, que je montre) = it's them; ( qui le font) = they do; ( qui l'ont fait) = they did; ( qui arrivent) = here they are; ce sont mes enfants ( que je vous présente) = these are my children; ( qui sont là-bas) = they are my children; c'est cela = that's right; c'est ça! tu crois que je vais faire le travail tout seul? = what's this! do you think I'm going to do the work all by myself?Lorsqu'il reprend un nom, un infinitif ou une proposition qui le précède c'est se traduit seulement par is: une étoile, c'est un réacteur nucléaire = a star is a nuclear reactor; réussir, c'est une question de volonté = to succeed is a question of will; sortir par ce temps, c'est de la folie = going out in this weather is sheer madness; eux, ce sont mes amis = they are my friendsDe même, lorsque c'est que reprend un groupe nominal ou une proposition, il se traduit simplement par is that: le comique, c'est que... = the funny thing is that... On trouvera en général cette tournure sous l'entrée appropriée, comme comique, fort, importer etcLorsque c'est que sert à donner une explication il se rend généralement, et selon le temps, par it is that, it was that, mais aussi, pour insister sur l'explication, par it is/was because: si j'ai fait ça, c'est que je ne pouvais pas faire autrement = if I did that, it was because I couldn't do otherwise. ce n'est pas que se traduit la plupart du temps it is/was not that (la contraction est it's not plutôt que it isn't): ce n'est pas qu'il soit bête, mais... = it's not that he is stupid, but...En corrélation avec un pronom relatif, c'est peut soit garder sa valeur de présentatif (voir plus haut) et se rendre par that's: c'est le journaliste qui m'a interviewé/que nous avons rencontré/dont je te parlais = that's the journalist who interviewed me/(that) we met/I was telling you about; c'est le château où je suis né = that's the castle where I was born; c'est ce qui me fait croire que... = that's what makes me think that...; c'est justement ce que je disais = that's exactly what I was saying; soit constituer une tournure emphatique qui se rend en anglais selon la nuance: c'est de la même femme que nous parlons = we're talking about the same woman; c'était d'en parler devant elle qui me gênait = talking about it in front of her was what made me feel uneasy ou what made me feel uneasy was talking about it in front of her; c'est lui/Paul qui l'a cassé ( je le dénonce) = he/Paul broke it; ( je l'accuse) = he/Paul is the one who broke it; c'est mon frère qui l'a écrit = it was my brother who wrote it ou my brother's the one who wrote it; c'est de ta soeur que je parlais, pas de toi = it was your sister I was talking about, not you; c'est cette voiture qui m'intéresse = this is the car (that) I am interested in; c'est lui le coupable = he is the culprit; ce sont eux les meurtriers = they are the murderersc'est à suivi d'un infinitif se traduit parfois par it is suivi de l'adjectif correspondant si cette même transformation est possible en français ( c'est à désespérer = c'est désespérant = it's hopeless), mais c'est rare, et il est conseillé de se reporter à l'infinitif en question ou à l'un des autres termes obtenus à partir de transformations semblablesc'est à... de faire (ou parfois à faire) se traduira de deux manières: c'est à Pierre/lui de choisir ( c'est son tour) it's Pierre's/his turn to choose; ( c'est sa responsabilité) it's up to Pierre/to him to chooseLa notion de rivalité contenue dans c'est à qui suivi du futur doit être rendue explicite en anglais: c'est à qui proposera le plus de réformes = each is trying to suggest more reforms than the other; c'était à qui des deux aurait le dernier mot = they were each trying to get in the last word; c'était à qui trouverait le plus d'erreurs dans le texte = they were vying with each other to find the most mistakes in the textc'est, équivalent de ça fait dans le compte d'une somme, se rend par it is: c'est 200 francs = it's 200 francs; c'est combien? = how much is it?ce sera avec valeur modale de ce doit être se traduit it must be: ce sera mon professeur de piano = it must be my piano teacherêtre = verbe impersonnelil est facile de critiquer = it is easy to criticize; il serait nécessaire de faire = it would be necessary to do; il est des gens bizarres = there are some strange people; il n'est pas de jour/d'heure sans qu'il se plaigne = not a day/an hour goes by without him complainingOn se référera par ailleurs aux notes d'usage concernant l'heure et la date; voir aussi les entrées temps et foisil est à suivi d'un infinitif se rend différemment, selon les nuances qu'imposent le contexte, par it must be, it has to be, it should be, it can be suivis du participe passé. Pour plus de sûreté, on se reportera à l'infinitif en question, où cette construction est généralement traitéeil est de suivi d'un substantif ou d'un groupe nominal se rend souvent par it is suivi directement d'un adjectif ou d'un substantif précédé d'un déterminant (article, pronom): il est de coutume de faire (ou qu'on fasse) = it is customary ou the custom to do; il est de notre responsabilité de faire = it is our responsibility to do; mais ce n'est pas une règle absolue, et il est préférable de consulter des entrées telles que goût, règle, notoriété etc pour avoir des traductions adéquates. Voir également 1 Voir également 1 ci-dessous pour des exemples supplémentairesCertains cas sont traités sous la rubrique ‘être = verbe impersonnel’; d'autres, expressions figées, le sont sous l'entrée appropriée; voir par exemple poche et frais pour en être de sa poche/pour ses frais. Enfin, quand l'antéc édent de en est exprimé dans la phrase, l'expression est traitée plus bas sous être de: où en étais-je? = where was I?; je ne sais plus où j'en suis = I'm lost; où en es-tu de tes recherches? - j'en suis à mi-chemin/au début = how far have you got in your research? - I'm halfway through/at the beginning; elle a eu plusieurs amants/accidents: elle en est à son quatrième = she has had several lovers/accidents: this is her fourth; j'en suis à me demander si... = I'm beginning to wonder whether...; j'en étais à ne pouvoir distinguer le vrai du faux = I got to the point where I couldn't distinguish between truth and falsehoodSuivie d'un substantif représentant un vêtement, l'expression peut être traduite to be in, mais on consultera l'entrée appropriée pour s'en assurer. Si l'on dit to be in uniform ou éventuellement to be wearing a uniform pour être en uniforme, l'anglais préfère généralement to be wearing a suit à to be in a suit pour être en costume (de même pour robe, tailleur etc). Dans le cas d'un déguisement, on a to be dressed up as: être en pirate = to be dressed up as a piratej'y suis ( je vous comprends) = I'm with you; ( plus général mais un peu familier) = I get it; je n'y suis pas ( je ne comprends pas) = I don't get it; vous y êtes? (vous comprenez?) = are you with me?; (vous êtes prêt(e)?) = are you ready?; 20000 francs? vous n'y êtes pas! = 20,000 francs? you're a long way out!; tu n'y es pas, c'est plus compliqué que ça = you don't realize, it's a lot more complicated than that. Voir aussi les entrées y, adverbe de lieu, et pourêtre + prépositionsLa plupart des cas ( être dans, sur, devant, pour, après, avec etc) sont traités sous la préposition correspondante. Ne sont retenus ici que les cas particuliers de être à et être deLes cas où l'on peut faire l'ellipse de être ou le remplacer par un autre verbe sont traités sous la préposition à; ceux de en être à sous la rubrique ‘en être’, et ceux de c'est à sous la rubrique ‘c'est’Les emplois de être à suivi d'un groupe nominal et signifiant ‘tendre vers’ sont généralement traités sous le substantif approprié, comme temps, hausse, agonie etc dans les expressions le temps est à la pluie, être à la hausse, être à l'agonie. De même, quand être à signifie un état, c'est sous le substantif ou adjectif approprié, comme bout, disposition, quai, vif etc, qu'on trouvera la ou les traductions de l'expression correspondanteSuivi d'un infinitif et signifiant devoir être, être à peut généralement se traduire, en observant les mêmes nuances qu'avec devoir, par must be, have to be ou should be suivi du participe passé du verbe anglais. Il reste conseillé de consulter l'infinitif en question, comme plaindre, prendre etc. On en trouve également un traitement succint sous les rubriques ‘être = verbe impersonnel' et ‘c'est'Au sens de appartenir à, l'anglais utilise to be suivi du cas possessif quand le possesseur est un être animé ou d'un pronom possessif si celui-ci est représent é par un pronom objet. Si le cas possessif n'est pas d'usage, on utilise de préférence to belong to: ce livre est à moi/à mon frère = this book is mine/my brother's; ces dictionnaires sont au service de traduction = these dictionaries belong to the translation department; à qui est ce chien? = who does this dog belong to? ou whose dog is this? Voir 2 ci-dessous pour des exemples supplémentairesQuand elle exprime un état ou une situation, la tournure être de suivie d'un substantif sans déterminant est traduite sous le substantif en question, notamment avis, garde, service etc. De même, certaines expressions où la présence de déterminant est variable, comme dans être de mauvaise foi/d'une incroyable mauvaise foi sont traitées sous l'entrée appropriée, en l'occurrence, foi; voir aussi humeur, massacrante, poil etcLa construction être d'un/d'une suivie d'un adjectif substantivé ou d'un substantif exprimant une qualité ou un défaut peut généralement être rendue par to be so suivi de l'adjectif correspondant en anglais, si le substantif est seul: elle est d'un ridicule/d'une prétention! = she's so ridiculous/so pretentious!; si le substantif est qualifié, l'adjectif devient généralement un adverbe en anglais: il est d'une exquise courtoisie/d'une incompétence rare = he's exquisitely courteous/exceptionally incompetent; mais il n'est pas inutile de vérifier les traductions des adjectifs et substantifs à leur entrée avant de rendre cette constructionAu sens de participer à, faire partie de, la tournure être de se traduit de façon très variable (voir aussi partie): il est des nôtres ( il vient avec nous) = he's with us; (il est de notre clan, agit et pense comme nous) = he's one of us; serez-vous des nôtres? = will you be (coming) with us?; êtes-vous des nôtres? = are you coming with us? (ici, coming est nécessaire, pour éviter l'ambiguïté de are you with us?); les journalistes ne sont pas/ne seront pas du voyage = the journalists aren't coming/won't be coming on the trip; ils ont organisé une expédition mais je n'en étais pas = they organized an expedition but I wasn't part of it; il y avait un congrès mais il n'en était pas = there was a congress but he didn't take partSuivi d'un infinitif et précédé de noms abstraits avec l'article défini ( l'idéal, l'essentiel etc) ou de superlatifs ( le plus simple), être de se traduit généralement par to be suivi de l'infinitif avec to: le plus simple serait de tout recommencer = the simplest thing to do would be to start all over again* * *ɛtʀ1. nm2. vb (avec attribut)1) (état, description) to beIl est instituteur. — He's a teacher.
Vous êtes grand. — You're tall.
Vous êtes fatigué. — You're tired.
Je suis heureux. — I'm happy.
être à qn — to be sb's, to belong to sb
Ce livre est à Paul. — This book is Paul's., This book belongs to Paul.
C'est à moi. — It's mine.
C'est à eux. — It's theirs.
C'est à lui de le faire. — It's up to him to do it.
3) (origine)Il est de Paris. — He is from Paris.
Il est des nôtres. — He is one of us.
4) (obligation, but)être à (+ infinitif) C'est à réparer. — It needs repairing.
C'est à essayer. — You should try it.
Il est à espérer que... — It is to be hoped that...
3. vi1) (= se trouver) to beJe ne serai pas ici demain. — I won't be here tomorrow.
2) (date)Nous sommes le 10 janvier. — It's the 10th of January., Today is the 10th of January.
3) (= faire partie) to beêtre de ceux qui... — to be one of those who...
Il voulait en être. — He wanted to be part of it.
4) (= exister) to beêtre ou ne pas être... — to be or not to be...
en être à qch (= avoir atteint) — to have got to sth, to have got as far as sth, (= être réduit à) to be reduced to sth
Nous en étions au dessert. — We had got to the dessert., We had got as far as dessert.
Il en est à faire des ménages pour vivre. — He's been reduced to doing cleaning jobs to earn a living.
4. vb aux1) (dans verbes composés) to haveIl est parti. — He has left., He has gone.
Il n'est pas encore arrivé. — He hasn't arrived yet.
2) (forme passive) to beIl a été promu. — He has been promoted.
5. vb impersil est... — it is...
Il est impossible de le faire. — It's impossible to do it.
Il est 10 heures. — It's 10 o'clock.
See:* * *I.être ⇒ Note d'usage verb table: être vi1 il n'est pas jusqu'à l'Antarctique qui ne soit pollué even the Antarctic is polluted; il en est de Pierre comme de Paul it is the same with Pierre as with Paul; voilà ce qu'il en est ( présentation) this is how it is; ( conclusion) that's how it is; il n'en est rien this isn't at all the case; il en sera toujours ainsi it will always be so; il en a été de même it was the same; qu'en est-il de…? what's the news on…?;2 je suis à vous tout de suite/dans un instant I'll be with you right away/in a minute; je suis à vous I'm all yours; être à ce qu'on fait to have one's mind on what one is doing; elle est toujours à se plaindre she's always complaining;3 il n'est plus euph he's no longer with us; ce temps n'est plus those days are gone; ces traditions ne sont plus these traditions are things of the past; fût-il duc/en cristal even if he were a duke/it were made of crystal, even were he a duke/were it made of crystal; n'était leur grand âge were it not for their advanced age, if it were not for their advanced age; ne serait-ce qu'en faisant if only by doing; ne fût-ce que pour la soulager/qu'un instant if only to relieve her/for a moment; fût-ce pour des raisons humanitaires if only on humanitarian grounds.on ne peut pas être et avoir été Prov you can't stay young forever.II.être nm1 ( organisme vivant) being; être humain/vivant/surnaturel human/living/supernatural being; les êtres animés et inanimés animate and inanimate things; les êtres et les choses living things and objects; un être sans défense a defencelessGB creature; ces plantes sont des êtres inférieurs these plants are inferior life-forms;2 ( personne) person; un être d'exception an exceptional person; un être faible et timoré a weak and timorous person; les êtres qui doutent people who doubt; l'amitié entre deux êtres friendship between two people; un être cher or aimé a loved one; ce sont des êtres simples they're simple beings ou souls; son mari est un être sensible her husband is a sensitive soul;3 ( nature intime) being; de tout son être [détester, souhaiter] with one's whole being; au fond de son être, elle savait que in the core of her being, she knew that; blessé au plus profond de son être hurt to the core; les êtres contradictoires qui vous habitent the conflicting selves within you;I[ɛtr] nom masculin2. RELIGIONl'être éternel ou infini ou suprême the Supreme Being3. [personne] personII[ɛtr] verbe intransitifA.[EXPRIME L'EXISTENCE, LA RÉALITÉ]B.[RELIE L'ATTRIBUT, LE COMPLÉMENT AU SUJET]1. [suivi d'un attribut] to beje ne te le prêterai pas! — comment ou comme tu es! (familier) I won't lend it to you! — you see what you're like!Bruno/ce rôle est tout pour moi Bruno/this part means everything to me2. [suivi d'une préposition]j'y suis, j'y reste here I am and here I staya. [à la maison] I'm not at home for anyoneb. [au bureau] I won't see anybodyje suis à vous [je vous écoute] I'm all yourstout le monde est à la page 15/au chapitre 9? is everybody at page 15/chapter 9?vous êtes (bien) au 01.40.06.24.08 this is 01 40 06 24 08être de [provenir de] to be from, to come fromBruno est de sa famille Bruno is a member of her family ou is a relative of hersêtre de [participer à]: je suis de mariage le mois prochain I've got (to go to) a wedding next monthj'en suis au moment où il découvre le trésor I've got to the part ou the bit where he discovers the treasureoù en étais-je? [après une interruption dans une conversation] where was I ?tu en es encore à lui chercher des excuses! — oh non, je n'en suis plus là! you're still trying to find excuses for him! — oh no, I'm past that!ne plus savoir où l'on en est: je ne sais plus du tout où j'en suis dans tous ces calculs I don't know where I am any more with all these calculationsj'ai besoin de faire le point, je ne sais plus où j'en suis I've got to take stock, I've completely lost track of everythingy être [comprendre]: tu te souviens bien de Marie, une petite brune! — ah, oui, j'y suis maintenant! but you must remember Marie, a brunette! — oh yes, I'm with you now!mais non, vous n'y êtes pas du tout! you don't understand!3. [dans l'expression du temps] to benous sommes le 8/jeudi today is the 8th/ThursdayC.[SUBSTITUT DE ALLER, PARTIR] to go————————[ɛtr] verbe impersonnel1. [exister]il était une fois un prince... once (upon a time) there was a prince...2. [pour exprimer l'heure]3. (soutenu & locution)on a dit que vous vouliez démissionner — il n'en est rien it was rumoured you wanted to resign — that's not trueil n'est que de: il n'est que de lire les journaux pour s'en rendre compte you only have to read the newspapers to be aware of it————————[ɛtr] verbe auxiliaire1. [sert à former les temps composés]je suis/j'étais descendu I came/had come down2. [sert à former le passif]3. [sert à exprimer une obligation]cela étant locution adverbiale[dans ces circonstances] things being what they are[cela dit] having said that -
9 machen
I v/t1. (tun) do; was machst du? what are you doing?; beruflich: what do you do (for a living)?; so was macht man nicht that isn’t done, you just don’t do that; da kann man nichts machen there’s nothing you can do (about it), it’s (just) one of those things; er macht es nicht unter 500 Euro umg. he won’t do it for less than 500 euros; was macht die Familie? how’s the family (getting on [Am. along]) ?; mach’s gut! umg. see you; (alles Gute) all the best; gut gemacht! well done!, good show!; das lässt sich schon machen that can be arranged, that’s no problem; mit mir könnt ihr’s ja machen! umg., iro. the things I put up with; sie wird es nicht mehr lange machen umg. (wird bald sterben) she’s not long for this world; die Festplatte wird es wohl nicht mehr lange machen umg. (wird bald defekt sein) the hard disk is on its last legs ( oder has just about had it)2. (herstellen, schaffen) make; (Essen) make, prepare; (Bett) make; ein Foto machen take a photograph; das Zimmer machen do ( oder tidy up, Am. clean up) the room; Hausaufgaben machen do one’s homework; eine Prüfung machen take ( erfolgreich: pass) an exam; einen Spaziergang machen go for a walk; einen Fehler machen make a mistake; einen Kurs machen (besuchen) do ( oder take) a course; eine angenehme / unangenehme Erfahrung machen have a pleasant / an unpleasant experience; jemanden zum General machen make s.o. a general; zu oder für etw. ( nicht) gemacht sein (not) be cut out for s.th.; er ist nicht zur Arbeit gemacht iro. work doesn’t agree with him hum.; jemanden traurig / glücklich etc. machen make s.o. sad / happy etc.; den Schiedsrichter machen umg. be ( oder act as) umpire ( oder referee); das macht das Wetter it’s the weather that causes it; das macht Durst it makes you thirsty; der Wagen macht 160 km / h umg. the car does 100 mph; Ferien, Hoffnung, Krach, Licht etc.3. (ergeben) beim Rechnen: be, come to, amount to; 4 mal 5 macht 20 four times five is twenty, four fives are twenty; was macht das? Rechnung etc.: how much does that come to?, what’s the damage? umg.; das macht dreißig Euro that’s ( oder that’ll be) thirty euros; was macht das zusammen? how much does that come to all together?4. (ausmachen): was macht das schon? what does it matter?, what difference does it make?; umg. so what?; das macht nichts it doesn’t matter, never mind; es macht mir nichts I don’t mind; sie macht sich nichts / nicht viel aus Geld she doesn’t care / doesn’t care much about money, money doesn’t mean anything / doesn’t mean much to her, she’s not bothered / not really bothered about money umg.; er macht sich nicht viel aus Kuchen / Alkohol etc. he doesn’t particularly like cake / alcohol etc., he’s not particularly keen on (Am. not wild about) cake / alcohol etc.; mach dir nichts draus! don’t worry about it, don’t take it to heart5. umg. (veranstalten, organisieren) have, give; ich mache am Samstag ein Fest I’m having a party on Saturday; nächste Woche macht sie einen Vortrag über Kafka next week she’s going to give a lecture on Kafka6. Sl. euph.: es machen (Sex haben) have it off (Am. get it on) ( mit with); es jemandem machen give it to s.o.II v/refl1. sich ( gut) machen Person: be coming along (well oder fine), be getting on (Am. along) (fine); sich gut machen Sache: (gut aussehen) look good ( bei jemandem on s.o.); (gern gesehen werden) make a good impression; sich schlecht machen not look good, make a bad impression; er macht sich gut als... he makes a good...; wie macht sich Vincent als Chef? what sort of a boss is Vincent?; er macht sich gut als Chef he makes a good boss; wie macht sich der Kleine? how’s the little one doing ( oder getting on [Am. along]) ?; die Vase macht sich sehr gut in der Ecke the vase looks very nice in the corner; das macht sich schon wieder umg. it’ll sort itself out2. sich an etw. machen get down to (work on) s.th.; ich mache mich morgen an die Übersetzung auch I’ll make a start on the translation tomorrow; WegIII v/i1. umg.: macht, dass ihr bald zurück seid! be sure to be back ( oder you get back) soon!; mach, dass du wegkommst! get out of here!; mach schon! (beeile dich!) hurry up!, get a move on! umg.2. umg.: lass ihn nur machen (lass ihm seinen Willen) let him if he wants to, let him have his way; (red ihm nichts ein) just let him do it ( oder get on with it); (verlass dich auf ihn) leave it to him; lass mich nur machen (red mir nichts ein) let me do it my way; (verlass dich auf mich) just leave it to me; lass mich mal machen (lass mich versuchen) let me have a try3. umg.: machen in (+ Dat) WIRTS. deal in, sell; in Politik machen umg. be in politics; er macht in Schriftstellerei umg. he dabbles in writing4. umg.: auf etw. machen umg. (etw. spielen) act ( oder play) s.th., pretend to be s.th.; auf Künstler machen umg. act ( oder play) the artist, do one’s artist bit umg.; auf unschuldig / doof machen umg. act ( oder play) the innocent / the fool; sie macht neuerdings auf jung her latest fad is to act all girlish5. Schokolade macht dick chocolate makes you fat; Querstreifen machen dick horizontal stripes make you look fat6. umg. euph. (die Notdurft verrichten): ( klein) machen wee; ( groß) machen shit; sich (Dat) vor Angst in die Hosen machen wet o.s. (Am. wet one’s pants) from fear; der Kleine macht immer noch in die Windeln the child still dirties his nappy (Am. diaper); der Hund hat auf den Teppich gemacht the dog made a mess on the carpet7. (hat oder ist) Dial. (sich begeben) go; wir haben oder sind 1966 in den Westen gemacht (sind aus der DDR in die BRD geflüchtet) in 1966 we made it to West Germany; gemacht* * *to create; to be; to do; to make; to fix* * *mạ|chen ['maxn]1. TRANSITIVES VERB1) = tun to dowas machst du heute Abend? — what are you doing this evening?
was machen wir mit dem restlichen Brot? — what shall we do with the rest of the bread?
die Hausarbeit/den Garten machen — to do the housework/the garden
er machte sich (dat) Zucker in den Kaffee (inf) — he put sugar in his coffee
ich muss noch so viel machen — I still have so much to do
gut, wird gemacht — right, will do (inf)
gut, mache ich — right, will do (inf) or I'll do that
wie mans macht, ists verkehrt — whatever you do is wrong
er macht, was er will — he does what he likes
soll ich ihn nach seinem Gehalt fragen? – so etwas macht man nicht! — shall I ask how much he earns? – you don't ask that (question)!
das lässt sich machen/nicht machen — that can/can't be done
das ist zu/nicht zu machen — that can/can't be done
ich mache es wohl am besten so, dass ich etwas früher komme — I would do best to come a bit earlier
es ist schon gut gemacht, wie sie die Rolle der Ophelia mit echtem Leben erfüllt — it's wonderful how she brings the role of Ophelia to life
damit/mit ihr kann man etwas machen — you could do something with it/her
was machst du denn hier? — what ( on earth) are you doing here?
was macht dein Bruder ( beruflich)? — what does your brother do (for a living)?
machs gut! — all the best!
er wirds nicht mehr lange machen (inf) — he won't last long
selber machen (sl) — to bring oneself off (inf)
mit mir kann mans ja machen! (inf) — the things I put up with! (inf)
2) = anfertigen, zubereiten to makeBier wird aus Gerste gemacht — beer is made from barley
sich/jdm etw machen lassen — to have sth made for oneself/sb
jdm einen Drink machen (Cocktail) — to make or mix sb a drink
3) = verursachen, bewirken Schwierigkeiten, Arbeit to make (jdm for sb); Mühe, Schmerzen to cause (jdm for sb)jdm Angst/Sorgen/Freude machen — to make sb afraid/worried/happy
jdm Hoffnung/Mut/Kopfschmerzen machen — to give sb hope/courage/a headache
das macht Appetit — that gives you an appetite
jdn lachen/weinen/etw vergessen machen — to make sb laugh/cry/forget sth
machen, dass etw geschieht — to make sth happen
mach, dass er gesund wird! — make him better!
das machen die vielen Zigaretten, dass du hustest — it's all those cigarettes that make you cough
4) = hervorbringen Laut, Geräusch to makemäh/miau machen — to baa/miaow
brumm machen — to go "brumm"
5) = bilden Kreuzzeichen, Kreis to make6)machen + SubstantivSiehe auch unter dem Eintrag für das jeweilige Substantiv.
einen Ausflug machen — to go on an outingBilder machen — to take photos
auf jdn/etw Jagd machen — to hunt sb/sth
einen Kopfsprung machen — to take a header (Brit), to dive (headfirst)
mach mir mal einen (guten) Preis! — make me an offer!
eine Prüfung machen — to do (esp Brit) or take an exam
ein Spiel machen — to play a game
See:= haltmachen7) machen + AdjektivSiehe auch unter dem Eintrag für das jeweilige Adjektiv.to makejdn nervös/unglücklich machen — to make sb nervous/unhappy
etw größer/kleiner machen — to make sth bigger/smaller
etw sauber/schmutzig machen — to get sth clean/dirty
jdn wieder sehend machen — to make sb see again
machs dir doch bequem/gemütlich — make yourself comfortable/at home
8) = ergeben inf to make; Summe, Preis to bedas macht ( zusammen) 23 — that makes 23 altogether
fünf mal vier macht or machen zwanzig — five fours are twenty, five times four is twenty
was macht die Rechnung? — how much is the bill?, what does the bill come to?
100 cm machen einen Meter — 100 cm make a metre (Brit) or meter (US)
was or wie viel macht das ( alles zusammen)? — how much is that altogether?
9) = spielen inf THEAT to play; Dolmetscher, Schiedsrichter etc to be10)= Notdurft verrichten inf
einen Haufen or sein Geschäft machen (euph:) (Hund) — to do its business (euph)See:11) = ordnen, reparieren, säubern to dodas Auto machen lassen — to have the car seen to or done
ich muss noch die Betten machen —
mach den Fleck aus der Bluse, ehe du sie wäschst — get the stain out of the blouse before you wash it
12)andere Wendungen◆ machen + aus
aus dem Haus könnte man schon etwas machen — you could really make something of that houseeine große Sache aus etw machen — to make a big thing of sth
jdn zum Star/Helden machen — to turn sb into a star/hero
jdn zum Wortführer/Sklaven/zu seiner Frau machen — to make sb spokesman/a slave/one's wife
jdm etw zur Hölle/Qual machen — to make sth hell/a misery for sb
der Regen/die Kälte macht mir nichts — I don't mind the rain/cold
die Kälte macht dem Motor nichts — the cold doesn't hurt the engine
es macht mir nichts, durch den Regen zu gehen — I don't mind walking in the rain
viel aus jdm/etw machen — to like sb/sth
wenig aus jdm/etw machen — not to be very keen on (esp Brit) or thrilled with (esp US) sb/sth
einen schönen Abend/ein paar gemütliche Stunden machen — to have a nice evening/a few pleasant hours
sich (dat) Sorgen machen — to worry
jdn zum Freund/Feind machen — to make sb one's friend/enemy
etw zur Aufgabe/zum Grundsatz/Motto machen — to make sth one's job/a principle/one's watchword
2. INTRANSITIVES VERB1)= tun
lass mich mal machen — let me do it2)machen + Adjektiv
das macht müde/gesund/schlank — that makes you tired/healthy/slimdas Kleid macht alt/schlank — that dress makes you look old/slim
3) = sich beeilen inf to get a move on (inf), to hurry upmach schon!, mach schnell or schneller! — get a move on! (inf), hurry up!
ich mach ja schon! — I'm being as quick as I can!
sie machten, dass sie nach Hause kamen — they hurried home
4) = Notdurft verrichten inf to go to the toilet (esp Brit) or bathroom (esp US) or restroom (US); (Hund etc) to do its business (euph); (in die Hosen machen (lit, fig) — to wet oneself
groß/klein machen (baby-talk) — to do a poo/wee (baby-talk)
5) = reisen dial to goüber die ( grüne) Grenze machen — to go over the border
6)Redewendungen◆ machen auf etw (
acc ) (inf) jetzt macht sie auf große Dame — she's playing the grand lady nowsie macht auf verständnisvoll/gebildet — she's doing her understanding/cultured bit (inf)
jetzt macht sie auf beleidigt — now she's acting the injured innocent (Brit), now she's acting insulted (esp US)
er macht auf Schau — he's out for effect (inf)◆ machen in etw (dat) (inf, beruflich) to be in sth
er macht in Nächstenliebe/Großzügigkeit — he puts on a show of compassion/generosity
3. REFLEXIVES VERB1) ◆ sich machen= sich entwickeln to come on2) = aussehen to look3)machen — to get down to sthsich über das Essen machen (inf) — to get stuck in (inf)
sich zum Fürsprecher/Anwalt machen — to make oneself spokesman/advocate
sich bei jdm beliebt/verhasst machen (inf) — to make oneself popular with/hated by sb
See:* * *1) have2) (to perform an activity concerning something: to do the washing; to do the garden / the windows.) do3) go4) (to create, form or produce: God made the Earth; She makes all her own clothes; He made it out of paper; to make a muddle/mess of the job; to make lunch/coffee; We made an arrangement/agreement/deal/bargain.) make5) (to cause to be: I made it clear; You've made me very unhappy.) make6) (to gain or earn: He makes $100 a week; to make a profit.) make7) (used with many nouns to give a similar meaning to that of the verb from which the noun is formed: He made several attempts (= attempted several times); They made a left turn (= turned left); He made (= offered) a suggestion/proposal; Have you any comments to make?) make8) (used when asking angrily what someone is doing: What does he think he's playing at (=doing)?) play at9) (to cause to become: His remarks rendered me speechless.) render10) (to cause to go into a certain, usually bad, state: The news sent them into a panic.) send11) (to do or perform some action: I think I'll take a walk; Will you take a look?; to take a bath) take12) (to make a note, record etc: He took a photograph of the castle; The nurse took the patient's temperature.) take* * *ma·chen[ˈmaxn̩]1. (anstelle eines genaueren Verbs)▪ etw \machen to do sthhast du die Kartoffeln/Türen/das Badezimmer gemacht? have you done the potatoes/doors/bathroom?2. (fertigen)▪ etw \machen to make sthFotos [von jdm/etw] \machen to take photos [of sb/sth]Gedichte \machen to write poemsjdm/sich etw \machen lassen to have sth made for sb/[for one]aus diesem Haus \machen wir ein Atelier we're turning this house into a studioder Saft ist aus Birnen gemacht the juice is made out of pears3. (geben)eine Empfehlung \machen to put in sep a recommendationeinen Vorschlag \machen to make [or sep put in] a suggestion4. (zubereiten)▪ [jdm] etw \machen to make [sb] sth, to make sth [for sb]einen Drink \machen to make a drinkdas Essen \machen to prepare/cook foodein Essen \machen to make [or cook] a mealdas Frühstück \machen to make [or get] breakfastKaffee \machen to make coffee5. (aufräumen)das Bett \machen to make the bedsein Zimmer \machen to tidy up sep one's room6. (veranstalten)▪ etw \machen to organize stheine Party \machen to give [or have] [or throw] a party▪ etw \machen:dieser Film macht tränende Augen this film puts the tears in your eyes [or fam is a real tear jerker]jdm Angst \machen to frighten sbjdm Arbeit \machen to give sb work to doein dummes Gesicht \machen (fam) to make [or pull] a silly facejdm Durst/Hunger \machen to make sb thirsty/hungryeinen Eindruck \machen to make an impressionFeuer \machen to light a firejdm eine Freude \machen to make sb happyjdm Hoffnung/Mut/Kopfschmerzen \machen to give sb hope/courage/a headacheLärm \machen to make a noiseLicht \machen to switch on sep the lightMühe \machen to be a lot of trouble [or effort]keine Mühe \machen to be no troubledas macht überhaupt keine Mühe that's no trouble at allMusik \machen to play some musiceinen Schmollmund \machen to poutjdm Sorgen \machen to make sb worried, to give sb cause for concern▪ das macht etw that's because of sthdas macht das häufige Trinken that comes from drinking oftendas macht die frische Luft, dass wir so hungrig sind it's the fresh air that makes us so hungry8. (durchführen)▪ etw \machen to do stheine Arbeit/seine Hausaufgaben \machen to do a job [or task]/one's homeworkeine Beobachtung \machen to observe sb/stheine Bestellung \machen to place [or sep put in] an ordereinen Besuch \machen to [pay sb a] visiteine Dummheit \machen to do something stupidwie man's macht, macht man's falsch [o verkehrt] you [just] can't wineinen Fehler \machen to make a mistakeden Haushalt \machen to keep housedas ist zu \machen that's possibledas lässt sich \machen that might be possibleeine Mitteilung \machen to make an announcementda ist nichts zu \machen nothing can be done, that's not possiblenichts zu \machen! nothing doing! famjd kann [da] nichts \machen sb can't do anythingeine Reise \machen to go on a journeyeine Sause mit jdm \machen (sl) to go on a pub crawl esp BRIT [or AM esp to go bar-hopping] with sb fameinen Spaziergang \machen to go for a walkein Spiel \machen to play a gameSport \machen to do sporteine Verbeugung \machen to make [or take] a bow, to bowwie machst du/wie \machen Sie das nur? how [on earth] do you do it?9. (absolvieren)▪ etw \machen to do sthdas Abitur \machen ≈to do [one's] A levels BRITeinen Kurs \machen to take a courseeine Ausbildung \machen to do an apprenticeshipeine Elektrikerausbildung \machen to train to be an electricianjdn/etw berühmt/reich/schön \machen to make sb/sth famous/rich/beautifulmach es dir bequem! make yourself comfortable [or at home]!dieser Hut macht mich viel jünger this hat makes me [look] much younger▪ etw aus jdm \machen to make sb sthetwas aus sich/jdm \machen to make something of oneself/sbmein Vater hat mich zu seinem Nachfolger gemacht my father has made [or named] me his successorjdn zu seinem Verbündeten \machen to make sb one's ally11. (erzielen)▪ etw \machen:wir \machen jetzt dreimal so viel Umsatz we have now tripled our turnoverein Geschäft \machen to make a dealeinen Gewinn/Verlust \machen to make a profit/lossMillionen \machen to make millionsPunkte/Tore \machen to score points/goalsein Vermögen \machen to make a fortune12. (tun)▪ etw \machen to do sthwas möchten Sie gern \machen? what would you like to do?lass uns etwas \machen! let's do something!genau so werden wir es \machen that's how we'll do itmusst du viel \machen? do you have a lot to do?was macht sie damit? what's she doing with it?was willst du mit diesem Zeug \machen? what are you going to do with this stuff?was soll ich nur \machen? what am I to do?ich weiß nicht, was ich noch \machen soll I don't know what else to doich weiß nicht, wie man es macht I don't know how to do itwas machst du da? what are you doing?; (misstrauisch) what on earth are you doing there?, what are you up to?was hat sie wieder gemacht, dass alle so ärgerlich sind? what's she been up to [or fam gone and done] this time to make everyone so angry?was macht denn deine Frau? how's your wife?und was \machen Sie so? and what are you doing nowadays?was macht die Arbeit/Gesundheit? how's work/your health?, how are you work-wise/health-wise? famwas soll ich da groß \machen? what do you expect me to do?was macht deine Brille in der Mikrowelle? what are your glasses doing in the microwave?dagegen kann man nichts \machen there's nothing you can do about itgut gemacht! well done!mit mir kann man es ja \machen (fam) the things I put up withso etwas macht man nicht that's [or it's] bad mannersda kann man nichts \machen nothing can be done\machen, was man will to do as one pleases [or wants13. (bilden)▪ etw \machen:die Straße macht eine scharfe Kurve the road bends sharplysie macht eine gute Figur she cuts a good figure▪ jdn \machen to make sb▪ jdn/etw \machen to do [or play] sb/sthwer macht hier den Boss? who's the boss here?▪ jdn/etw \machen to do sb/sth▪ etw [für jdn] \machen to act as sth [for sb]das macht zehn Euro that's [or that'll be] ten euros [please]was macht das [zusammen]? what does that come to [in total]?drei mal drei macht neun three times three is [or makes] nineder Hund macht „wau, wau“ the dog goes “woof woof” usu childspeakmacht nichts! no matter [or problem]!das macht [doch] nichts! never mind!, no harm done!macht das was? does it matter?was macht das schon? what does it matter?jdm/etw etwas/nichts \machen to harm/not harm sb/sth24. (geschaffen)▪ [jdm] etw \machen to mend [or fix] [or repair] sth for sb▪ etw \machen lassen to get [or have] sth mended [or fixed] [or repaired26.es macht jdn glücklich/traurig/wütend it makes sb happy/sad/angryes macht jdn verrückt it drives sb mad [or fam crazy]es macht mich verrückt, dass ich so viel Werbung sehe it drives me crazy to see so many advertisements2. (schaden)es macht etwas/nichts/viel it matters/doesn't matter/matters a lotes macht jdm etwas/nichts/viel sb minds/doesn't mind/minds a lotes macht mir nichts, wenn du hierbleibst I don't mind you [or form your] staying herees macht „piep“, wenn du einen Fehler machst it goes “peep” [or it peeps] when you make a mistake; s.a. langIII. INTRANSITIVES VERB1. (bewirken)mach ich! [as] good as done!▪ \machen, dass etw geschieht to ensure [or see to it] that sth happenswie hast du gemacht, dass die Kinder so artig sind? how did you get the children to be so well behaved?mach, dass du wegkommst! get out of here!2. (gewähren)mach nur/ruhig! go ahead!jdn [mal/nur] \machen lassen (fam) to leave sb to itLiebe macht blind love makes you blind4. (aussehen lassen)Streifen \machen dick stripes make you look fatauf cool/in Großzügigkeit \machen to act cool/generous [or the cool/generous guy]auf vornehm \machen to give oneself [or to put on] airssie macht immer auf vornehme Dame she always acts the elegant ladyins Bett \machen Kind to wet the bedich mache jetzt in Wolle/Versicherungen I'm in wool/insurance [or the wool/insurance businessmach/\machen Sie [schon]! get a move on! fammach schneller! hurry up!ich mach sowieso nicht mehr lang I'm not long for this world anywayaufs Land/in die Stadt \machen to go to the country/into townIV. REFLEXIVES VERB1. (beginnen)das Wetter macht sich wieder there will soon be good weatherdas Baby macht sich gut the baby is doing fine fam3. (passen)das Bild macht sich gut an der Wand/im Flur the picture looks good on the wall/in the hall4. (leisten)die neue Sekretärin macht sich gut the new secretary is doing well5. (gewinnen)sich dat etwas/nichts/viel/wenig aus jdm/etw \machen to care/not care at all/care a lot/not care much for sb/sth; (sich nicht ärgern) to get a little upset/not get upset at all/get really upset/not get upset much about sthmach dir/\machen Sie sich nichts d[a]raus! don't worry about it!, don't it get you down!8. (gestalten)wir \machen uns einen schönen Tag let's have an enjoyable daymach dir ein paar schöne Tage enjoy yourself for a few days9. (erledigen)V. AUXILIARVERBder Wein wird dich das vergessen \machen the wine will help you [to] forget* * *1.transitives Verb1) (herstellen) makesich (Dat.) etwas machen lassen — have something made
Geld/ein Vermögen/einen Gewinn machen — make money/a fortune/a profit
dafür ist er einfach nicht gemacht — (fig.) he's just not cut out for it
etwas aus jemandem machen — make somebody into something; (verwandeln) turn somebody into something
jemanden zum Präsidenten usw. machen — make somebody president etc.
2)jemandem einen Kostenvoranschlag machen — let somebody have or give somebody an estimate
jemandem einen guten Preis machen — (ugs.) name a good price
3) (zubereiten) get, prepare < meal>jemandem/sich [einen] Kaffee machen — make [some] coffee for somebody/oneself
jemandem einen Cocktail machen — get or mix somebody a cocktail
jemandem Arbeit machen — cause or make [extra] work for somebody
jemandem Sorgen machen — cause somebody anxiety; worry somebody
jemandem Mut/Hoffnung machen — give somebody courage/hope
das macht Durst/Hunger od. Appetit — this makes one thirsty/hungry; this gives one a thirst/an appetite
das macht das Wetter — that's [because of] the weather
mach, dass du nach Hause kommst! — (ugs.) off home with you!
ich muss machen, dass ich zum Bahnhof komme — (ugs.) I must see that I get to the station
ein Foto od. eine Aufnahme machen — take a photograph
einen Spaziergang machen — go for or take a walk
eine Reise machen — go on a journey or trip
einen Besuch [bei jemandem] machen — pay [somebody] a visit
wie man's macht, macht man's falsch od. verkehrt — (ugs.) [however you do it,] there's always something wrong
er macht es nicht unter 100 Euro — he won't do it for under or less than 100 euros
6)jemanden glücklich/eifersüchtig usw. machen — make somebody happy/jealous etc.
etwas größer/länger/kürzer machen — make something bigger/longer/shorter
mach es dir gemütlich od. bequem! — make yourself comfortable or at home
7) (tun) domach ich, wird gemacht! — (ugs.) will do!
was machen Sie [beruflich]? — what do you do [for a living]?
so etwas macht man nicht — that [just] isn't done
mit mir könnt ihr es ja machen — (ugs.) you can get away with it with me
8)was macht...? — (wie ist es um... bestellt?) how is...?
was macht die Arbeit? — how is the job [getting on]?; how are things at work?
was od. wieviel macht das [alles zusammen]? — how much does that come to?
das macht 12 Euro — that is or costs 12 euros; (Endsumme) that comes to 12 euros
10) (schaden)macht das was? — does it matter?; do you mind?
macht nichts! — (ugs.) never mind!; it doesn't matter
11) (teilnehmen an)einen Kursus od. Lehrgang machen — take a course
13)machs gut! — (ugs.) look after yourself!; (auf Wiedersehen) so long!
sich (Dat.) die Haare/Fingernägel machen — do one's hair/nails
15) (ugs. verhüll.): (seine Notdurft verrichten)2.groß/klein machen — do big jobs/small jobs (child language)
reflexives Verb1) mit Adjsich hübsch machen — smarten [oneself] up
sich schmutzig machen — get [oneself] dirty
2) (beginnen)sich an etwas (Akk.) machen — get down to something
3) (ugs.): (sich entwickeln) do well; get on4) (passen)das macht sich gut hier — this fits in well; this looks good here
5)mach dir nichts daraus! — (ugs.) don't let it bother you
sich (Dat.) nichts/wenig aus jemandem/etwas machen — (ugs.) not care at all/much for somebody/something
6)wir wollen uns (Dat.) einen schönen Abend machen — we want to have an enjoyable evening
7)sich (Dat.) Feinde machen — make enemies
sich (Dat.) jemanden zum Freund/Feind machen — make a friend/an enemy of somebody
8)3.wenn es sich [irgendwie] machen lässt — if it can [somehow] be done; if it is [at all] possible
intransitives Verb1) (ugs.): (sich beeilen)mach schon! — get a move on! (coll.); look snappy! (coll.)
2)das macht müde — it makes you tired; it is tiring
das macht hungrig/durstig — it makes you hungry/thirsty
3) (tun)lass mich nur machen — (ugs.) leave it to me
4) (ugs. verhüll.) <child, pet> perform (coll.)ins Bett/in die Hose machen — wet one's bed/pants
5) (ugs.)auf naiv usw. machen — pretend to be naïve
auf feine Dame usw. machen — act the fine lady
6) (landsch. ugs.): (sich begeben) go* * *A. v/t1. (tun) do;was machst du? what are you doing?; beruflich: what do you do (for a living)?;so was macht man nicht that isn’t done, you just don’t do that;da kann man nichts machen there’s nothing you can do (about it), it’s (just) one of those things;er macht es nicht unter 500 Euro umg he won’t do it for less than 500 euros;was macht die Familie? how’s the family (getting on [US along]) ?;gut gemacht! well done!, good show!;das lässt sich schon machen that can be arranged, that’s no problem;mit mir könnt ihr’s ja machen! umg, iron the things I put up with;sie wird es nicht mehr lange machen umg (wird bald sterben) she’s not long for this world;die Festplatte wird es wohl nicht mehr lange machen umg (wird bald defekt sein) the hard disk is on its last legs ( oder has just about had it)ein Foto machen take a photograph;Hausaufgaben machen do one’s homework;einen Spaziergang machen go for a walk;einen Fehler machen make a mistake;eine angenehme/unangenehme Erfahrung machen have a pleasant/an unpleasant experience;jemanden zum General machen make sb a general;zu oderfür etwas (nicht) gemacht sein (not) be cut out for sth;jemanden traurig/glücklich etcmachen make sb sad/happy etc;das macht das Wetter it’s the weather that causes it;das macht Durst it makes you thirsty;3. (ergeben) beim Rechnen: be, come to, amount to;4 mal 5 macht 20 four times five is twenty, four fives are twenty;was macht das? Rechnung etc: how much does that come to?, what’s the damage? umg;das macht dreißig Euro that’s ( oder that’ll be) thirty euros;was macht das zusammen? how much does that come to all together?4. (ausmachen):was macht das schon? what does it matter?, what difference does it make?; umg so what?;das macht nichts it doesn’t matter, never mind;es macht mir nichts I don’t mind;sie macht sich nichts/nicht viel aus Geld she doesn’t care/doesn’t care much about money, money doesn’t mean anything/doesn’t mean much to her, she’s not bothered/not really bothered about money umg;er macht sich nicht viel aus Kuchen/Alkohol etc he doesn’t particularly like cake/alcohol etc, he’s not particularly keen on (US not wild about) cake/alcohol etc;mach dir nichts draus! don’t worry about it, don’t take it to heart5. umg (veranstalten, organisieren) have, give;ich mache am Samstag ein Fest I’m having a party on Saturday;nächste Woche macht sie einen Vortrag über Kafka next week she’s going to give a lecture on Kafka6. sl euph:mit with);es jemandem machen give it to sbB. v/r1.sich gut machen Sache: (gut aussehen) look good (bei jemandem on sb); (gern gesehen werden) make a good impression;sich schlecht machen not look good, make a bad impression;er macht sich gut als … he makes a good …;wie macht sich Vincent als Chef? what sort of a boss is Vincent?;er macht sich gut als Chef he makes a good boss;die Vase macht sich sehr gut in der Ecke the vase looks very nice in the corner;das macht sich schon wieder umg it’ll sort itself out2.sich an etwas machen get down to (work on) sth;C. v/i1. umg:macht, dass ihr bald zurück seid! be sure to be back ( oder you get back) soon!;mach, dass du wegkommst! get out of here!;2. umg:lass ihn nur machen (lass ihm seinen Willen) let him if he wants to, let him have his way; (red ihm nichts ein) just let him do it ( oder get on with it); (verlass dich auf ihn) leave it to him;lass mich nur machen (red mir nichts ein) let me do it my way; (verlass dich auf mich) just leave it to me;lass mich mal machen (lass mich versuchen) let me have a try3. umg:in Politik machen umg be in politics;er macht in Schriftstellerei umg he dabbles in writing4. umg:sie macht neuerdings auf jung her latest fad is to act all girlish5.Schokolade macht dick chocolate makes you fat;Querstreifen machen dick horizontal stripes make you look fat6. umg euph (die Notdurft verrichten):(klein) machen wee;(groß) machen shit;sich (dat)vor Angst in die Hosen machen wet o.s. (US wet one’s pants) from fear;der Kleine macht immer noch in die Windeln the child still dirties his nappy (US diaper);der Hund hat auf den Teppich gemacht the dog made a mess on the carpet7. (hat oder ist) dial (sich begeben) go;sind 1987 in den Westen gemacht (sind aus der DDR in die BRD geflüchtet) in 1987 we made it to West Germany; → gemacht* * *1.transitives Verb1) (herstellen) makesich (Dat.) etwas machen lassen — have something made
Geld/ein Vermögen/einen Gewinn machen — make money/a fortune/a profit
dafür ist er einfach nicht gemacht — (fig.) he's just not cut out for it
etwas aus jemandem machen — make somebody into something; (verwandeln) turn somebody into something
jemanden zum Präsidenten usw. machen — make somebody president etc.
2)jemandem einen Kostenvoranschlag machen — let somebody have or give somebody an estimate
jemandem einen guten Preis machen — (ugs.) name a good price
3) (zubereiten) get, prepare < meal>jemandem/sich [einen] Kaffee machen — make [some] coffee for somebody/oneself
jemandem einen Cocktail machen — get or mix somebody a cocktail
jemandem Arbeit machen — cause or make [extra] work for somebody
jemandem Sorgen machen — cause somebody anxiety; worry somebody
jemandem Mut/Hoffnung machen — give somebody courage/hope
das macht Durst/Hunger od. Appetit — this makes one thirsty/hungry; this gives one a thirst/an appetite
das macht das Wetter — that's [because of] the weather
mach, dass du nach Hause kommst! — (ugs.) off home with you!
ich muss machen, dass ich zum Bahnhof komme — (ugs.) I must see that I get to the station
5) (ausführen) do <job, repair, etc.>ein Foto od. eine Aufnahme machen — take a photograph
einen Spaziergang machen — go for or take a walk
eine Reise machen — go on a journey or trip
einen Besuch [bei jemandem] machen — pay [somebody] a visit
wie man's macht, macht man's falsch od. verkehrt — (ugs.) [however you do it,] there's always something wrong
er macht es nicht unter 100 Euro — he won't do it for under or less than 100 euros
6)jemanden glücklich/eifersüchtig usw. machen — make somebody happy/jealous etc.
etwas größer/länger/kürzer machen — make something bigger/longer/shorter
mach es dir gemütlich od. bequem! — make yourself comfortable or at home
7) (tun) domach ich, wird gemacht! — (ugs.) will do!
was machen Sie [beruflich]? — what do you do [for a living]?
so etwas macht man nicht — that [just] isn't done
mit mir könnt ihr es ja machen — (ugs.) you can get away with it with me
8)was macht...? — (wie ist es um... bestellt?) how is...?
was macht die Arbeit? — how is the job [getting on]?; how are things at work?
was od. wieviel macht das [alles zusammen]? — how much does that come to?
das macht 12 Euro — that is or costs 12 euros; (Endsumme) that comes to 12 euros
10) (schaden)macht das was? — does it matter?; do you mind?
macht nichts! — (ugs.) never mind!; it doesn't matter
11) (teilnehmen an)einen Kursus od. Lehrgang machen — take a course
13)machs gut! — (ugs.) look after yourself!; (auf Wiedersehen) so long!
14) (ugs.): (ordnen, sauber machen, renovieren); do <room, stairs, washing, etc.>sich (Dat.) die Haare/Fingernägel machen — do one's hair/nails
15) (ugs. verhüll.): (seine Notdurft verrichten)2.groß/klein machen — do big jobs/small jobs (child language)
reflexives Verb1) mit Adjsich hübsch machen — smarten [oneself] up
sich schmutzig machen — get [oneself] dirty
2) (beginnen)sich an etwas (Akk.) machen — get down to something
3) (ugs.): (sich entwickeln) do well; get on4) (passen)das macht sich gut hier — this fits in well; this looks good here
5)mach dir nichts daraus! — (ugs.) don't let it bother you
sich (Dat.) nichts/wenig aus jemandem/etwas machen — (ugs.) not care at all/much for somebody/something
6)wir wollen uns (Dat.) einen schönen Abend machen — we want to have an enjoyable evening
7)sich (Dat.) Feinde machen — make enemies
sich (Dat.) jemanden zum Freund/Feind machen — make a friend/an enemy of somebody
8)3.wenn es sich [irgendwie] machen lässt — if it can [somehow] be done; if it is [at all] possible
intransitives Verb1) (ugs.): (sich beeilen)mach schon! — get a move on! (coll.); look snappy! (coll.)
2)das macht müde — it makes you tired; it is tiring
das macht hungrig/durstig — it makes you hungry/thirsty
3) (tun)lass mich nur machen — (ugs.) leave it to me
4) (ugs. verhüll.) <child, pet> perform (coll.)ins Bett/in die Hose machen — wet one's bed/pants
5) (ugs.)auf naiv usw. machen — pretend to be naïve
auf feine Dame usw. machen — act the fine lady
6) (landsch. ugs.): (sich begeben) go* * *v.to make v.(§ p.,p.p.: made)to perform v. -
10 AT
I) prep.A. with dative.I. Of motion;1) towards, against;Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;2) close atup to;Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;3) to, at;koma at landi, to come to land;ganga at dómi, to go into court;ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;5) denoting hostility;renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;6) around;vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;7) denoting business, engagement;ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.II. Of position, &c.;1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;at kirkju, at church;at dómi, in court;at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;2) denoting participation in;vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;vera at vígi, to be an accessory in man-slaying;3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;4) with proper names of places (farms);konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;at Marðar, at Mara’s home;at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).III. Of time;1) at, in;at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;at páskum, at Easter;at kveldi, at eventide;at þinglausnum, at the close of the Assembly;at fjöru, at the ebb;at flœðum, at the floodtide;2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;at ári komanda, next year;at vári, er kemr, next spring;generally with ‘komanda’ understood;at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;at honum önduðum, after his death;4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.IV. fig. and in various uses;1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;verða at ormi, to become a snake;2) for, as;gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;3) by;taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;4) as regards as to;auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);aðili at sök = aðili sakar;7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;at landslögum, by the law of the land;at vánum, as was to be expected;at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;10) in adverbial phrases;gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;at fullu, fully;at vísu, surely;at frjálsu, freely;at eilífu, for ever and ever;at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;eiga féránsdóm at e-n, to hold a court of execution upon a person;at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;2) in an objective sense;hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;hón grét at meir, she wept the more;þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.conj., that;1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);4) since, because, as (= því at);5) connected with þó, því, svá;þó at (with subj.), though, although;því at, because, for;svá at, so that;6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;áðr at (= á. en), before;7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.V)negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.odda at, Yggs at, battle.* * *1.and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.WITH DAT.A. LOC.I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.B. TEMP.I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.C. METAPH. and in various cases:I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.V. denoting the source of a thing:1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.IX. following many words:1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.WITH ACC.TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.2.and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.I. it is used either,1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.3.and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.II. it is used,1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.III. used in connection with conjunctions,1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.IV. as a relat. conj.:1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.4.and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.5.n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.6.the negative verbal suffix, v. -a. -
11 Á
* * *a negative suffix to verbs, not;era útmakligt, at it is not unmeet that.* * *1.á, prep., often used elliptically, or even adverbially, [Goth. ana; Engl. on; Germ. an. In the Scandinavian idioms the liquid n is absorbed. In English the same has been supposed to happen in adverbial phrases, e. g. ‘along, away, abroad, afoot, again, agate, ahead, aloft, alone, askew, aside, astray, awry,’ etc. It is indeed true that the Ormulum in its northern dialect freq. uses o, even in common phrases, such as ‘o boke, o land, o life, o slæpe, o strande, o write, o naht, o loft,’ etc., v. the glossary; and we may compare on foot and afoot, on sleep (Engl. Vers. of Bible) and asleep; A. S. a-butan and on-butan (about); agen and ongean (again, against); on bæc, aback; on life, alive; on middan, amid. But it is more than likely that in the expressions quoted above, as well as in numberless others, as well in old as in modern English, the English a- as well as the o- of the Ormulum and the modern Scottish and north of England o- are in reality remains of this very á pronounced au or ow, which was brought by the Scandinavian settlers into the north of England. In the struggle for supremacy between the English dialects after the Conquest, the Scandinavian form á or a won the day in many cases to the exclusion of the Anglo-Saxon on. Some of these adverbs have representatives only in the Scandinavian tongues, not in Anglo-Saxon; see below, with dat. B. II, C. VII; with acc. C. I. and VI. The prep. á denotes the surface or outside; í and ór the inside; at, til, and frá, nearness measured to or from an object: á thus answers to the Gr. επί; the Lat. in includes á and i together.]With dat. and acc.: in the first case with the notion of remaining on a place, answering to Lat. in with abl.; in the last with the notion of motion to the place, = Lat. in with acc.WITH DAT.A. Loc.I. generally on, upon; á gólfi, on the floor, Nj. 2; á hendi, on the hand (of a ring), 48, 225; á palli, 50; á steini, 108; á vegg, 115; á sjá ok á landi, on sea and land. In some instances the distinction between d and i is loose and wavering, but in most cases common sense and usage decide; thus ‘á bók’ merely denotes the letters, the penmanship, ‘í’ the contents of a book; mod. usage, however, prefers ‘í,’ lesa í bók, but stafr á bók. Old writers on the other hand; á bókum Enskum, in English books, Landn. 24, but í Aldafars bók, 23 (in the book De Mensurâ Temporum, by Bede), cp. Grág. i. 76, where á is a false reading instead of at; á bréfi, the contents of a letter: of clothing or arms, mítr á höfði, sverð á hlið, mitre on head, sword on side, Fms. i. 266, viii. 404; hafa lykil á sér, on one’s person, 655 xxvii. 22; möttull á tyglum, a mantle hanging on (i. e. fastened by) laces, Fms. vii. 201: á þingi means to be present at a meeting; í þingi, to abide within a jurisdiction; á himni, á jörðu, on (Engl. in) heaven and earth, e. g. in the Lord’s Prayer, but í helviti, in hell; á Gimli, Edda (of a heavenly abode); á báti, á skipi denote crew and cargo, ‘í’ the timber or materials of which a ship is built, Eg. 385; vera í stafni á skipi, 177: á skógi, to be abroad in a wood (of a hunter, robber, deer); but to be situated (a house), at work (to fell timber), í skógi, 573, Fs. 5, Fms. iii. 122, viii. 31, xi. 1, Glúm. 330, Landn. 173; á mörkinni, Fms. i. 8, but í mörk, of a farm; á firðinum means lying in a firth, of ships or islands (on the surface of the water), þær eyjar liggja á Breiðafirði, Ld. 36; but í firði, living in a district named Firth; á landi, Nj. 98, Fms. xi. 386.II. á is commonly used in connection with the pr. names or countries terminating in ‘land,’ Engl. in, á Englandi, Írlandi, Skotlandi, Bretlandi, Saxlandi, Vindlandi, Vínlandi, Grænalandi, Íslandi, Hálogalandi, Rogalandi, Jótlandi, Frakklandi, Hjaltlandi, Jamtalandi, Hvítramannalandi, Norðrlöndum, etc., vide Landn. and the index to Fms. xii. In old writers í is here very rare, in modern authors more frequent; taste and the context in many instances decide. An Icelander would now say, speaking of the queen or king, ‘á Englandi,’ ruling over, but to live ‘í Englandi,’ or ‘á Englandi;’ the rule in the last case not being quite fixed.2. in connection with other names of countries: á Mæri, Vörs, Ögðum, Fjölum, all districts of Norway, v. Landn.; á Mýrum (in Icel.), á Finnmörk, Landn., á Fjóni (a Danish island); but í Danmörk, Svíþjóð (á Svíþjóðu is poët., Gs. 13).3. before Icel. farms denoting open and elevated slopes and spaces (not too high, because then ‘at’ must be used), such as ‘staðr, völlr, ból, hjalli, bakki, heimr, eyri,’ etc.; á Veggjum, Landn. 69; á Hólmlátri, id.: those ending in ‘-staðr,’ á Geirmundarstöðum, Þórisstöðum, Jarðlangsstöðum…, Landn.: ‘-völlr,’ á Möðruvöllum: á Fitjum (the farm) í Storð (the island), í Fenhring (the island) á Aski (the farm), Landn., Eg.: ‘-nes’ sometimes takes á, sometimes í (in mod. usage always ‘í’), á Nesi, Eb. 14, or í Krossnesi, 30; in the last case the notion of island, νησος, prevails: so also, ‘fjörðr,’ as, þeir börðust á Vigrafirði (of a fight o n the ice), Landn. 101, but orusta í Hafrsfirði, 122: with ‘-bær,’ á is used in the sense of a farm or estate, hón sa á e-m bæ mikit hús ok fagrt, Edda 22; ‘í bæ’ means within doors, of the buildings: with ‘Bær’ as pr. name Landn. uses ‘í,’ 71, 160, 257, 309, 332.4. denoting on or just above; of the sun, when the time is fixed by regarding the sun in connection with points in the horizon, a standing phrase in Icel.; sól á gjáhamri, when the sun is on the crag of the Rift, Grág. i. 26, cp. Glúm. 387; so, brú á á, a bridge on a river, Fms. viii. 179, Hrafn. 20; taka hús á e-m, to surprise one, to take the house over his head, Fms. i. 11.III. á is sometimes used in old writers where we should now expect an acc., esp. in the phrase, leggja sverði (or the like) á e-m, or á e-m miðjum, to stab, Eg. 216, Gísl. 106, Band. 14; þá stakk Starkaðr sprotanum á konungi, then Starkad stabbed the king with the wand, Fas. iii. 34; bíta á kampi (vör), to bite the lips, as a token of pain or emotion, Nj. 209, 68; taka á e-u, to touch a thing, lay hold of it, v. taka; fá á e-u, id. (poët.); leggja hendr á (better at) síðum, in wrestling, Fms. x. 331; koma á úvart á e-m, to come on one unawares, ix. 407 (rare).B. TEMP. of a particular point or period of time, at, on, in:I. gener. denoting during, in the course of; á nótt, degi, nætrþeli …, Bs. i. 139; or spec. adding a pron. or an adject., á næsta sumri, the next summer; á því ári, þingi, misseri, hausti, vári, sumri …, during, in that year …, Bs. i. 679, etc.; á þrem sumrum, in the course of three summers, Grág. i. 218; á þrem várum, Fms. ii. 114; á hálfs mánaðar fresti, within half a month’s delay, Nj. 99; á tvítugs, sextugs … aldri, á barns, gamals aldri, etc., at the age of …, v. aldr: á dögum e-s, in the days of, in his reign or time, Landn. 24, Hrafn. 3, Fms. ix. 229.II. used of a fixed recurrent period or season; á várum, sumrum, haustum, vetrum, á kveldum, every spring, summer …, in the evenings, Eg. 711, Fms. i. 23, 25, vi. 394, Landn. 292: with the numeral adverbs, cp. Lat. ter in anno, um sinn á mánuði, ári, once a month, once a year, where the Engl. a is not the article but the preposition, Grág. i. 89.III. of duration; á degi, during a whole day, Fms. v. 48; á sjau nóttum, Bárð. 166; á því meli, during that time, in the meantime, Grág. i. 259.IV. connected with the seasons (á vetri, sumri, vári, hausti), ‘á’ denotes the next preceding season, the last winter, summer, autumn, Eb. 40, 238, Ld. 206: in such instances ‘á’ denotes the past, ‘at’ the future, ‘í’ the present; thus í vetri in old writers means this winter; á vetri, last winter; at vetri, next winter, Eb. 68 (in a verse), etc.C. In various other relations, more or less metaphorically, on, upon, in, to, with, towards, against:I. denoting object, in respect of, against, almost periphrastically; dvelja á náðum e-s, under one’s protection, Fms. i. 74; hafa metnað á e-u, to be proud of, to take pride in a thing, 127.2. denoting a personal relation, in; bæta e-t á e-m, to make amends, i. e. to one personally; misgöra e-t á e-m, to inflict wrong on one; hafa elsku (hatr) á e-m, to bear love ( hatred) to one, Fms. ix. 242; hefna sín á e-m, to take revenge on one’s person, on anyone; rjúfa sætt á e-m, to break truce on the person of any one, to offend against his person, Nj. 103; hafa sár á sér, 101; sjá á e-m, to read on or in one’s face; sér hann á hverjum manni hvárt til þín er vel eðr illa, 106; var þat brátt auðséð á hennar högum, at …, it could soon be seen in all her doings, that …, Ld. 22.3. also generally to shew signs of a thing; sýna fáleika á sér, to shew marks of displeasure, Nj. 14, Fs. 14; taka vel, illa, lítt, á e-u, to take a thing well, ill, or indifferently, id.; finna á sér, to feel in oneself; fann lítt á honum, hvárt …, it could hardly be seen in his face, whether …, Eb. 42; líkindi eru á, it is likely, Ld. 172; göra kost á e-u, to give a choice, chance of it, 178; eiga vald á e-u, to have power over …, Nj. 10.II. denoting encumbrance, duty, liability; er fimtardómsmál á þeim, to be subject to …, Nj. 231; the phrase, hafa e-t á hendi, or vera á hendi e-m, on one’s hands, of work or duty to be done; eindagi á fé, term, pay day, Grág. i. 140; ómagi (skylda, afvinna) á fé, of a burden or encumbrance, D. I. and Grág. in several passages.III. with a personal pronoun, sér, mér, honum …, denoting personal appearance, temper, character, look, or the like; vera þungr, léttr … á sér, to be heavy or light, either bodily or mentally; þungr á sér, corpulent, Sturl. i. 112; kátr ok léttr á sér, of a gay and light temper, Fms. x. 152; þat bragð hafði hann á sér, he looked as if, … the expression of his face was as though …, Ld., cp. the mod. phrase, hafa á sér svip, bragð, æði, sið, of one’s manner or personal appearance, to bear oneself as, or the like; skjótr (seinn) á fæti, speedy ( slow) of foot, Nj. 258.IV. as a periphrasis of the possessive pronoun connected with the limbs or parts of the body. In common Icel. such phrases as my hands, eyes, head … are hardly ever used, but höfuð, eyru, hár, nef, munnr, hendr, fætr … á mér; so ‘í’ is used of the internal parts, e. g. hjarta, bein … í mér; the eyes are regarded as inside the body, augun í honum: also without the possessive pronoun, or as a periphrasis for a genitive, brjóstið á e-m, one’s breast, Nj. 95, Edda 15; súrnar í augum, it smarts in my eyes, my eyes smart, Nj. 202; kviðinn á sér, its belly, 655 xxx. 5, Fms. vi. 350; hendr á henni, her hands, Gísl. (in a verse); í vörunum á honum, on his lips, Band. 14; ristin á honum, his step, Fms. viii. 141; harðr í tungu, sharp of tongue, Hallfred (Fs. 114); kalt (heitt) á fingrum, höndum, fótum …, cold ( warm) in the fingers, hands, feet …, i. e. with cold fingers, etc.; cp. also the phrase, verða vísa (orð) á munni, of extemporising verses or speeches, freq. in the Sagas; fastr á fótum, fast by the leg, of a bondsman, Nj. 27: of the whole body, díla fundu þeir á honum, 209. The pers. pron. is used only in solemn style (poetry, hymns, the Bible), and perhaps only when influenced by foreign languages, e. g. mitt hjarta hví svo hryggist þú, as a translation of ‘warumb betrübst du dich mein Herz?’ the famous hymn by Hans Sachs; instead of the popular hjartað í mér, Sl. 43, 44: hjartað mitt is only used as a term of endearment, as by a husband to his wife, parents to their child, or the like, in a metaphorical sense; the heart proper is ‘í mér,’ not ‘mitt.’2. of other things, and as a periphrasis of a genitive, of a part belonging to the whole, e. g. dyrr á husi = húsdyrr, at the house-doors; turn á kirkju = kirkju turn; stafn, skutr, segl, árar … á skipi, the stem, stern, sail … of a ship, Fms. ix. 135; blöð á lauk, á tré …, leaves of a leek, of a tree …, Fas. i. 469; egg á sverði = sverðs egg; stafr á bók; kjölr á bók, and in endless other instances.V. denoting instrumentality, by, on, or a-, by means of; afla fjár á hólmgöngum, to make money a-duelling, by means of duels, Eg. 498; á verkum sínum, to subsist on one’s own work, Njarð. 366: as a law term, sekjast á e-ju, to be convicted upon …, Grág. i. 123; sekst maðr þar á sínu eigini ( a man is guilty in re sua), ef hann tekr af þeim manni er heimild ( possessio) hefir til, ii. 191; falla á verkum sínum, to be killed flagranti delicto, v. above; fella e-n á bragði, by a sleight in wrestling; komast undan á flótta, to escape by flight, Eg. 11; á hlaupi, by one’s feet, by speed, Hkr. ii. 168; lifa á e-u, to feed on; bergja á e-u, to taste of a thing; svala sér á e-u, to quench the thirst on.VI. with subst. numerals; á þriðja tigi manna, up to thirty, i. e. from about twenty to thirty, Ld. 194; á öðru hundraði skipa, from one to two hundred sail strong, Fms. x. 126; á níunda tigi, between eighty and ninety years of age, Eg. 764, v. above: used as prep., á hendi, on one’s hand, i. e. bound to do it, v. hönd.VII. in more or less adverbial phrases it may often be translated in Engl. by a participle and a- prefixed; á lopti, aloft; á floti, afloat; á lífi, alive; á verðgangi, a-begging; á brautu, away; á baki, a-back, behind, past; á milli, a-tween; á laun, alone, secretly; á launungu, id.; á móti, against; á enda, at an end, gone; á huldu, hidden; fara á hæli, to go a-heel, i. e. backwards, Fms. vii. 70;—but in many cases these phrases are transl. by the Engl. partic. with a, which is then perh. a mere prefix, not a prep., á flugi, a-flying in the air, Nj. 79; vera á gangi, a-going; á ferli, to be about; á leiki, a-playing, Fms. i. 78; á sundi, a-swimming, ii. 27; á verði, a-watching, x. 201; á hrakningi, a-wandering; á reiki, a-wavering; á skjálfi, a-shivering; á-hleri, a-listening; á tali, a-talking, Ísl. ii. 200; á hlaupi, a-running, Hkr. ii. 268; á verki, a-working; á veiðum, a-hunting; á fiski, a-fishing; á beit, grazing: and as a law term it even means in flagranti, N. G. L. i. 348.VIII. used absolutely without a case in reference to the air or the weather, where ‘á’ is almost redundant; þoka var á mikil, a thick fog came on, Nj. 267; niðamyrkr var á, pitch darkness came on, Eg. 210; allhvast á norðan, a very strong breeze from the north, Fms. ix. 20; þá var á norðrænt, a north wind came on, 42, Ld. 56; hvaðan sem á er, from whatever point the wind is; var á hríð veðrs, a snow storm came on, Nj. 282; görði á regn, rain came on, Fms. vi. 394, xi. 35, Ld. 156.WITH ACC.A. Loc.I. denoting simple direction towards, esp. connected with verbs of motion, going, or the like; hann gékk á bergsnös, Eg. 389; á hamar, Fas. ii. 517.2. in phrases denoting direction; liggja á útborða, lying on the outside of the ship, Eg. 354; á annat borð skipinu, Fms. vii. 260; á bæði borð, on both sides of the ship, Nj. 124, Ld. 56; á tvær hliðar, on both sides, Fms. v. 73. Ísl. ii. 159; á hlið, sidewards; út á hlið, Nj. 262, Edda 44; á aðra hönd henni, Nj. 50, Ld. 46; höggva á tvær hendr, to hew or strike right and left, Ísl. ii. 368, Fas. i. 384, Fms. viii. 363, x. 383.3. upp á, upon; hann tók augu Þjaza ok kastaði upp á himin, Edda 47: with verbs denoting to look, see, horfa, sjá, líta, etc.; hann rak skygnur á land, he cast glances towards the land, Ld. 154.II. denoting direction with or without the idea of arriving:1. with verbs denoting to aim at; of a blow or thrust, stefna á fótinn, Nj. 84; spjótið stefnir á hann miðjan, 205: of the wind, gékk veðrit á vestr, the wind veered to west, Fms. ix. 28; sigla á haf, to stand out to sea, Hkr. i. 146, Fms. i. 39: with ‘út’ added, Eg. 390, Fms. x. 349.2. conveying the notion of arriving, or the intervening space being traversed; spjótið kom á miðjan skjöldinn, Eg. 379, Nj. 96, 97; langt upp á land, far up inland, Hkr. i. 146: to reach, taka ofan á belti, of the long locks of a woman, to reach down to the belt, Nj. 2; ofan á bringu, 48; á þa ofan, 91.III. without reference to the space traversed, connected with verbs denoting to go, turn, come, ride, sail, throw, or the like, motion of every kind; hann kastar honum á völlinn, he flings him down, Nj. 91; hlaupa á skip sitt, to leap on board his ship, 43; á hest, to mount quickly, Edda 75; á lend hestinum, Nj. 91; hann gengr á sáðland sitt, he walks on to his fields, 82: on, upon, komast á fætr, to get upon one’s legs, 92; ganga á land, to go a-shore, Fms. i. 40; ganga á þing, vii. 242, Grág. (often); á skóg, á merkr ok skóga, into a wood, Fb. i. 134, 257, Fms. xi. 118, Eg. 577, Nj. 130; fara á Finnmörk, to go travelling in Finmark, Fms. i. 8; koma, fara á bæ, to arrive at the farm-house; koma á veginn, Eg. 578; stíga á bát, skip, to go on board, 158; hann gékk upp á borg, he went up to the burg (castle), 717; en er þeir komu á loptriðið, 236; hrinda skipum á vatn, to float the ships down into the water, Fms. i. 58; reka austr á haf, to drift eastwards on the sea, x. 145; ríða ofan á, to ride down or over, Nj. 82.IV. in some cases the acc. is used where the dat. would be used, esp. with verbs denoting to see or hear, in such phrases as, þeir sá boða mikinn inn á fjörðinn, they saw great breakers away up in the bight of the firth, the acc. being due perhaps to a motion or direction of the eye or ear towards the object, Nj. 124; sá þeir fólkit á land, they saw the people in the direction of land, Fas. ii. 517: in phrases denoting to be placed, to sit, to be seated, the seat or bench is freq. in the acc. where the dat. would now be used; konungr var þar á land upp, the king was then up the country, the spectator or narrator is conceived as looking from the shore or sea-side, Nj. 46; sitja á miðjan bekk, to be seated on the middle bench, 50; skyldi konungs sæti vera á þann bekk … annat öndvegi var á hinn úæðra pall; hann setti konungs hásæti á miðjan þverpall, Fms. vi. 439, 440, cp. Fagrsk. l. c., Sturl. iii. 182; eru víða fjallbygðir upp á mörkina, in the mark or forest, Eg. 58; var þar mörk mikil á land upp, 229; mannsafnaðr er á land upp (viewed from the sea), Ld. 76; stóll var settr á mótið, Fas. i. 58; beiða fars á skip, to beg a passage, Grág. i. 90.V. denoting parts of the body; bíta e-n á barka, to bite one in the throat, Ísl. ii. 447; skera á háls, to cut the throat of any one, Nj. 156; brjóta e-n á háls, to break any one’s neck; brjóta e-n á bak, to break any one’s back, Fms. vii. 119; kalinn á kné, frozen to the knees with cold, Hm. 3.VI. denoting round; láta reipi á háls hesti, round his horse’s neck, 623. 33; leggja söðul á hest, Nj. 83; and ellipt., leggja á, to saddle; breiða feld á hofuð sér, to wrap a cloak over his head, 164; reyta á sik mosa, to gather moss to cover oneself with, 267; spenna hring á hönd, á fingr, Eg. 300.VII. denoting a burden; stela mat á tvá hesta, hey á fimtán hesta, i. e. a two, a fifteen horse load, Nj. 74: metaph., kjósa feigð á menn, to choose death upon them, i. e. doom them to death, Edda 22.B. TEMP.I. of a period of time, at, to; á morgun, to-morrow (í morgun now means the past morning, the morning of to-day), Ísl. ii. 333.II. if connected with the word day, ‘á’ is now used before a fixed or marked day, a day of the week, a feast day, or the like; á Laugardag, á Sunnudag …, on Saturday, Sunday, the Old Engl. a-Sunday, a-Monday, etc.; á Jóladaginn, Páskadaginn, on Yule and Easter-day; but in old writers more often used ellipt. Sunnudaginn, Jóladaginn …, by dropping the prep. ‘á,’ Fms. viii. 397, Grág. i. 18.III. connected with ‘dagr’ with the definite article suffixed, ‘á’ denotes a fixed, recurring period or season, in; á daginn, during the day-time, every day in turn, Grett. 91 A.IV. connected with ‘evening, morning, the seasons,’ with the article; á kveldit, every evening, Ld. 14; á sumarit, every summer, Vd. 128, where the new Ed. Fs. 51 reads sumrum; á haust, every autumn, Eg. 741 (perh. a misprint instead of á haustin or á haustum); á vetrinn, in the winter time, 710; á várit, every spring, Gþl. 347; the sing., however, is very rare in such cases, the old as well as mod. usage prefers the plur.; á nætrnar, by night, Nj. 210; á várin, Eg. 710; á sumrin, haustin, á morgnana, in the morning (á morgin, sing., means to-morrow); á kveldin, in the evening, only ‘dagr’ is used in sing., v. above (á daginn, not á dagana); but elliptically and by dropping the article, Icelanders say, kveld og morgna, nótt og dag, vetr sumar vor og haust, in the same sense as those above mentioned.V. denoting duration, the article is dropped in the negative phrase, aldri á sinn dag, never during one’s life; aldri á mína daga, never in my life, Bjarn. 8, where a possess. pron. is put between noun and prep., but this phrase is very rare. Such phrases as, á þann dag, that day, and á þenna dag, Stj. 12, 655 xxx. 2. 20, are unclassical.VI. á dag without article can only be used in a distributive sense, e. g. tvisvar á dag, twice a-day; this use is at present freq. in Icel., yet instances from old writers are not on record.VII. denoting a movement onward in time, such as, liðið á nótt, dag, kveld, morgun, sumar, vetr, vár, haust (or nóttina, daginn …), jól, páska, föstu, or the like, far on in the night, day …, Edda 33; er á leið vetrinn, when the winter was well on, as the winter wore on, Nj. 126; cp. áliðinn: also in the phrase, hniginn á inn efra aldr, well stricken in years, Ld. 68.C. Metaph. and in various relations:I. somewhat metaphorically, denoting an act only (not the place); fara á fund, á vit e-s, to call for one, Eg. 140; koma á ræðu við e-n, to come to a parley with, to speak, 173; ganga á tal, Nj. 103; skora á hólm, to challenge to a duel on an island; koma á grið, to enter into a service, to be domiciled, Grág. i. 151; fara á veiðar, to go a-hunting, Fms. i. 8.β. generally denoting on, upon, in, to; bjóða vöxtu á féit, to offer interest on the money, Grág. i. 198; ganga á berhögg, to come to blows, v. berhögg; fá á e-n, to make an impression upon one, Nj. 79; ganga á vápn e-s, to throw oneself on an enemy’s weapon, meet him face to face, Rd. 310; ganga á lagið, to press on up the spear-shaft after it has passed through one so as to get near one’s foe, i. e. to avail oneself of the last chance; bera fé á e-n, to bribe, Nj. 62; bera öl á e-n, to make drunk, Fas. i. 13; snúinn á e-t, inclined to, Fms. x. 142; sammælast á e-t, to agree upon, Nj. 86; sættast, verða sáttr á e-t, in the same sense, to come to an agreement, settlement, or atonement, 78, Edda 15, Eb. 288, Ld. 50, Fms. i. 279; ganga á mála, to serve for pay as a soldier, Nj. 121; ganga á vald e-s, to put oneself in his power, 267; ganga á sætt, to break an agreement; vega á veittar trygðir, to break truce, Grág. ii. 169.II. denoting in regard to, in respect to:1. of colour, complexion, the hue of the hair, or the like; hvítr, jarpr, dökkr … á hár, having white, brown, or dark … hair, Ísl. ii. 190, Nj. 39; svartr á brún ok brá, dark of brow and eyebrow; dökkr á hörund, id., etc.2. denoting skill, dexterity; hagr á tré, a good carpenter; hagr á járn, málm, smíðar …, an expert worker in iron, metals …, Eg. 4; fimr á boga, good at the bow: also used of mastership in science or arts, meistari á hörpuslátt, a master in striking the harp, Fas. iii. 220; fræðimaðr á kvæði, knowing many poems by heart, Fms. vi. 391; fræðimaðr á landnámssögur ok forna fræði, a learned scholar in histories and antiquities (of Are Frode), Ísl. ii. 189; mikill á íþrótt, skilful in an art, Edda (pref.) 148; but dat. in the phrase, kunna (vel) á skíðum, to be a cunning skater, Fms. i. 9, vii. 120.3. denoting dimensions; á hæð, lengd, breidd, dýpt …, in the heighth, length, breadth, depth …, Eg. 277; á hvern veg, on each side, Edda 41 (square miles); á annan veg, on the one side, Grág. i. 89.β. the phrase, á sik, in regard to oneself, vel (illa) á sik kominn, of a fine ( ugly) appearance, Ld. 100, Fas. iii. 74.III. denoting instrumentality; bjargast á sínar hendr, to live on the work of one’s own hands, (á sínar spýtur is a mod. phrase in the same sense); (vega) á skálir, pundara, to weigh in scales, Grág. ii. 370; at hann hefði tvá pundara, ok hefði á hinn meira keypt en á hinn minna selt, of a man using two scales, a big one for buying and a little one for selling, Sturl. i. 91; á sinn kostnað, at one’s own expense; nefna e-n á nafn, by name, Grág. i. 17, etc. The Icel. also say, spinna á rokk, snældu, to spin on or with a rock or distaff; mala á kvern, to grind in a ‘querne,’ where Edda 73 uses dat.; esp. of musical instruments, syngja, leika á hljóðfæri, hörpu, gígju …; in the old usage, leika hörpu …, Stj. 458.IV. denoting the manner or way of doing:1. á þessa lund, in this wise, Grág. ii. 22; á marga vega, á alla, ymsa vega, in many, all, respects, Fms. i. 114; á sitt hóf, in its turn, respectively, Ld. 136, where the context shews that the expression answers to the Lat. mutatis mutandis; á Þýðersku, after German fashion, Sks. 288.2. esp. of language; mæla, rita á e-a tungu, to speak, write in a tongue; á Írsku, in Irish, Ld. 76; Norrænu, in Norse, Eb. 330, Vm. 35; a Danska tungu, in Danish, i. e. Scandinavian, Norse, or Icelandic, Grág. i. 18; á Vára tungu, i. e. in Icelandic, 181; rita á Norræna tungu, to write in Norse, Hkr. (pref.), Bs. i. 59:—at present, dat. is sometimes used.3. in some phrases the acc. is used instead of the dat.; hann sýndi á sik mikit gaman, Fms. x. 329; hann lét ekki á sik finna, he shewed no sign of motion, Nj. 111; skaltú önga fáleika á þik gera (Cod. Kalf.), 14.V. used in a distributive sense; skal mörk kaupa gæzlu á kú, eðr oxa fim vetra gamlan, a mark for every cow, Grág. i. 147; alin á hvert hross, 442; á mann, per man (now freq.): cp. also á dag above, lit. B.VI. connected with nouns,1. prepositional; á hendr (with dat.), against; á hæla, at heel, close behind; á bak, at back, i. e. past, after; á vit (with gen.), towards.2. adverbially; á braut, away, abroad; á víxl, in turns; á mis, amiss; á víð ok dreif, a-wide and a-drift, i. e. dispersedly.3. used almost redundantly before the following prep.; á eptir, after, behind; á undan, in front of; á meðal, á milli, among; á mót, against; á við, about, alike; á frá (cp. Swed. ifrån), from (rare); á fyrir = fyrir, Haustl. 1; á hjá, beside (rare); á fram, a-head, forwards; á samt, together; ávalt = of allt, always: following a prep., upp á, upon; niðr á, down upon; ofan á, eptir á, post eventum, (temp.) á eptir is loc., id., etc.VII. connected with many transitive verbs, answering to the Lat. ad- or in-, in composition, in many cases periphrastically for an objective case. The prep. generally follows after the verb, instead of being prefixed to it as in Lat., and answers to the Engl. on, to; heita kalla, hrópa á, to call on; heyra, hlusta, hlyða á, to hearken to, listen to; hyggja, hugsa á, to think on; minna á, to remind; sjá, líta, horfa, stara, mæna, glápa, koma auga … á, to look on; girnast á, to wish for; trúa á, to believe on; skora á, to call on any one to come out, challenge; kæra á, to accuse; heilsa á, to greet; herja, ganga, ríða, hlaupa, ráða … á, to fall on, attack, cp. ágangr, áreið, áhlaup; ljúga á, to tell lies of, to slander; telja á, to carp at; ausa, tala, hella, kasta, verpa … á, to pour, throw on; ríða, bera, dreifa á, to sprinkle on; vanta, skorta á, to fall short of; ala á, to plead, beg; leggja á, to throw a spell on, lay a saddle on; hætta á, to venture on; gizka á, to guess at; kveða á, to fix on, etc.: in a reciprocal sense, haldast á, of mutual strife; sendast á, to exchange presents; skrifast á, to correspond (mod.); kallast á, to shout mutually; standast á, to coincide, so as to be just opposite one another, etc.2.f. [Lat. aqua; Goth. ahva; Hel. aha; A. S. eâ; O. H. G. aha, owa; cp. Germ. ach and aue; Fr. eau, eaux; Engl. Ax-, Ex-, etc., in names of places; Swed.-Dan. å; the Scandinavians absorb the hu, so that only a single vowel or diphthong remains of the whole word]:—a river. The old form in nom. dat. acc. sing. is , v. the introduction to A, page 1, Bs. i. 333 sq., where ́n, ́ (acc.), and ́na; so also Greg. 677; the old fragm. of Grág. ii. 222, 223, new Ed. In the Kb. of the Edda the old form occurs twice, viz. page 75, ́na (acc.), (but two lines below, ána), í ́nni (dat.) The old form also repeatedly occurs in the Kb. and Sb. of the Grág., e. g. ii. 266, 267: gen. sing. ár; nom. pl. ár, gen. á contracted, dat. ám, obsolete form ́m; Edda 43, Eg. 80, 99, 133, 185: proverbs, at ósi skal á stemma, answering to the Lat. principiis obsta, Edda 60; hér kemr á til sæfar, here the river runs into the sea, metaph. = this is the very end, seems to have been a favourite ending of old poems; it is recorded in the Húsdrápa and the Norðsetadrápa, v. Edda 96, Skálda 198; cp. the common saying, oil vötn renna til sævar, ‘all waters run into the sea.’ Rivers with glacier water are in Icel. called Hvítá, White river, or Jökulsá: Hitá, Hot river, from a hot spring, opp. to Kaldá, v. Landn.: others take a name from the fish in them, as Laxá, Lax or Salmon river (freq.); Örriða á, etc.: a tributary river is þverá, etc.: ár in the Njála often means the great rivers Ölfusá and Þjórsá in the south of Iceland. Áin helga, a river in Sweden, Hkr. ii: á is also suffixed to the names of foreign rivers, Tempsá = Thames; Dóná, Danube (Germ. Don-au), (mod.), etc. Vide Edda (Gl.) 116, 117, containing the names of over a hundred North-English and Scottish rivers.COMPDS: áráll, árbakki, árbrot, ardjúp, árfarvegr, árfors, árgljúfr, árhlutr, ármegin, árminni, ármót, áróss, árreki, árstraumr, árströnd, árvað, árvegr, árvöxtr. -
12 ἐν
ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.2] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.② marker of a state or condition, inⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.④ marker of close association within a limit, inⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls2 ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls2 ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl2). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG2 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, whenⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW. -
13 aller
aller [ale]━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━➭ TABLE 9━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━1. <• où vas-tu ? where are you going?• vas-y ! go on!• allons-y ! let's go!━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► aller se traduit souvent par un verbe plus spécifique en anglais.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► aller + préposition• je vais sur or vers Lille (en direction de) I'm going towards Lille ; (but du voyage) I'm going to Lille━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Lorsque être allé à/en signifie avoir visité, il se traduit par to have been to.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━• étiez-vous déjà allés en Sicile ? had you been to Sicily before?• plus ça va, plus les gens s'inquiètent people are getting more and more worried• plus ça va, plus je me dis que j'ai eu tort the more I think about it, the more I realize how wrong I was► aller en + participe présentd. (état, santé) comment allez-vous ? how are you?• comment ça va ? -- ça va how are you doing? -- fine• comment vont les affaires ? -- elles vont bien how's business? -- finee. ( = convenir) ça ira comme ça ? is it all right like that?• aller bien ensemble [couleurs, styles] to go well together• ils vont bien ensemble [personnes] they make a nice couple• cette robe te va très bien (couleur, style) that dress really suits you ; (taille) that dress fits you perfectlyf. (exclamations) allons !• allez ! go on!• allez la France ! come on France!• allons, allons, il ne faut pas pleurer come on, don't cry• ce n'est pas grave, allez ! come on, it's not so bad!• va donc, eh crétin ! you stupid idiot! (inf)• allez-y, c'est votre tour go on, it's your turn• allez-y, vous ne risquez rien go on, you've nothing to lose• non mais vas-y, insulte-moi ! (inf) go on, insult me!► allons bon !• allons bon ! qu'est-ce qui t'est encore arrivé ? now what's happened?• allons bon, j'ai oublié mon sac ! oh dear, I've left my bag behind!► ça va ! (inf) ( = assez) that's enough! ; ( = d'accord) OK, OK! (inf)• tes remarques désobligeantes, ça va comme ça ! I've had just about enough of your nasty comments!• ça fait dix fois que je te le dis -- ça va, je vais le faire ! I've told you ten times -- look, I'll do it, OK? (inf)► va pour (inf)va pour 30 € ! OK, 30 euros then!• j'aimerais aller à Tokyo -- alors va pour Tokyo ! I'd like to go to Tokyo -- Tokyo it is then!2. <• ça y va le whisky chez eux ! they certainly get through a lot of whisky!• ça y allait les insultes ! you should have heard the abuse!3. <► aller + infinitifa. (futur)━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Lorsque aller + infinitif sert à exprimer le futur, il se traduit par will + infinitif ; will est souvent abrégé en 'll.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► La forme du futur to be going to s'utilise pour mettre qn en garde.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━b. (intention) il est allé se renseigner he's gone to get some information ; (a obtenu les informations) he went and got some informationc. (locutions) n'allez pas vous imaginer que... don't you go imagining that...• allez savoir ! (inf) who knows?• va lui expliquer ça, toi ! you try explaining that to him!4. <a. ( = partir) to go• bon, je m'en vais right, I'm going• va-t'en ! go away!5. <b. ( = trajet) outward journey• l'aller et retour Paris-New York coûte 2 500 € Paris-New York is 2,500 euros return (Brit) or round-trip (US)• j'ai fait plusieurs allers et retours entre chez moi et la pharmacie I made several trips to the chemist's• le dossier a fait plusieurs allers et retours entre nos services the file has been shuttled between departments* * *
I
1. aleverbe auxiliaire1) ( marque le futur)ça va aller mal — (colloq) there'll be trouble
3) ( marque le mouvement)aller atterrir (colloq) sur mon bureau — to end up on my desk
4) ( marque l'inclination)5) ( marque l'évolution)
2.
verbe intransitif1) (se porter, se dérouler, fonctionner)comment vas-tu, comment ça va? — how are you?
bois ça, ça ira mieux — drink this, you'll feel better
ça ne va pas très fort — ( ma santé) I'm not feeling very well; ( la vie) things aren't too good; ( le moral) I'm feeling a bit low
ne pas aller sans peine or mal — not to be easy
ça va de soi or sans dire — it goes without saying
ça va tout seul — ( c'est facile) it's a doddle (colloq) GB, it's easy as pie
on fait aller — (colloq) struggling on (colloq)
ça peut aller — (colloq)
ça ira — (colloq) could be worse (colloq)
ça va pas, non (colloq) or la tête? — (colloq) are you mad (colloq) GB ou crazy? (colloq)
2) ( se déplacer) to goaller et venir — ( dans une pièce) to pace up and down; ( d'un lieu à l'autre) to run in and out
où vas-tu? — where are you going?, where are you off (colloq) to?
aller en Pologne/au marché — to go to Poland/to the market
aller sur or vers Paris — to head for Paris
j'y vais — ( je m'en occupe) I'll get it; ( je pars) (colloq) I'm going, I'm off (colloq)
où va-t-il? — where is he off to? (colloq)
où va-t-on? — (colloq)
où allons-nous? — (colloq) fig what are things coming to?, what's the world coming to?
aller au pain — (colloq) to go and get the bread
aller aux courses (colloq) or commissions — (colloq) to go shopping
4) ( s'étendre dans l'espace)5) ( convenir)ma robe, ça va? — is my dress all right?
ça va, ça peut aller — (colloq) ( en quantité) that'll do; ( en qualité) it'll do
une soupe, ça (te) va? — how about some soup?
va pour une soupe — (colloq) soup is okay (colloq)
si le contrat ne te va pas, ne le signe pas — don't sign the contract if you're not happy with it
si ça va pour toi, ça va pour moi — (colloq) if it's okay by you, it's okay by me (colloq)
ça te va bien de faire la morale — (colloq) iron you're hardly the person to preach
6) (être de la bonne taille, de la bonne forme)7) (flatter, mettre en valeur)je trouve que ta sœur et son petit ami vont très bien ensemble — I think your sister and her boyfriend are ideally suited
8) ( se ranger) to go9) ( faculté)10) ( dans une évaluation)la voiture peut aller jusqu'à 200 km/h — the car can do up to 200 kph
certains modèles peuvent aller jusqu'à 1000 francs — some models can cost up to 1,000 francs
11) ( en arriver à)12) ( dans le temps)13) (agir, raisonner)vas-y doucement, le tissu est fragile — careful, the fabric is delicate
vas-y, demande-leur! — ( incitation) go on, ask them!
vas-y, dis-le! — ( provocation) come on, out with it!
allons, allez! — (pour encourager, inciter) come on!
si tu vas par là, rien n'est entièrement vrai — if you take that line, nothing is entirely true
14) ( contribuer)15) (colloq) ( se succéder)16) ( servir)17) ( enfreindre)aller contre la loi — [personne] to break the law; [acte] to be against the law
3.
s'en aller verbe pronominal1) (partir, se rendre)il faut que je m'en aille — I must go ou leave
2) ( disparaître)avec le temps, tout s'en va — everything fades with time
4) (avoir l'intention de, essayer)
4.
verbe impersonnel1) ( être en jeu)2) ( se passer)3) Mathématique
II alenom masculin1) ( trajet)j'ai pris le bus à l'aller — ( en allant là) I took the bus there; ( en venant ici) I took the bus here
il n'arrête pas de faire des allers et retours entre chez lui et son bureau — he keeps running to and fro from his house to the office
billet aller — gén single ticket GB, one-way ticket US; ( d'avion) one-way ticket
billet aller (et) retour — return ticket GB, round trip (ticket) US
2) ( ticket)aller (simple) — single (ticket) GB, one-way ticket ( pour to)
••
Lorsque aller fait partie d'une expression figée comme aller dans le sens de, aller de pair avec etc, l'expression est traitée sous l'entrée sens, pair etcOn notera les différentes traductions de aller verbe de mouvement indiquant: un déplacement unique dans le temps: je vais au théâtre ce soir = I'm going to the theatre [BrE] this evening; ou une habitude: je vais au théâtre tous les lundis = I go to the theatre [BrE] every Mondayaller + infinitifla traduction dépend du temps: je vais apprendre l'italien = I'm going to learn Italian; il est allé voir l'exposition = he went to see the exhibition; j'allais me marier quand la guerre a éclaté = I was going to get married when the war broke out; va voir = go and see; va leur parler = go and speak to them; j'irai voir l'exposition demain = I'll go and see the exhibition tomorrow; je vais souvent m'asseoir au bord de la rivière = I often go and sit by the river; il ne va jamais voir une exposition = he never goes to see exhibitionsOn notera que pour les activités sportives on peut avoir: aller nager/faire du vélo = to go swimming/cycling ou to go for a swim/on a bike rideOn trouvera ci-dessous des exemples et des exceptions illustrant aller dans ses différentes fonctions verbales* * *ale1. nm1) (= trajet) outward journeyL'aller nous a pris trois heures. — The journey there took us three hours., The outward journey took us three hours.
2) (= billet) single Grande-Bretagne ticket, one-way ticketJe voudrais un aller pour Angers. — I'd like a single to Angers.
2. vi1) (déplacement) to goJe suis allé à Londres. — I went to London.
Elle ira le voir. — She'll go and see him.
La boulangerie? Je dois justement y aller. — The baker's? That's just where I need to go.
2) (= convenir)aller à qn [couleur, style] — to suit sb, [forme, pointure] to fit sb, [dispositions, date] to suit sb
cela me va [couleur, vêtement] — it suits me, (pointure, taille) it fits me, [projet, dispositions] it suits me, that's OK by me
Cette robe te va bien. — That dress suits you.
aller avec qch [couleurs, style] — to go with sth
3) (= se sentir)"Comment allez-vous? " - - "Je vais bien." — "How are you?" - - "I'm fine."
Il va bien. — He's fine.
Il va mal. — He's not well.
4) (= marcher, se passer)comment ça va? — how are you?, how are things?
"ça va?" - - "oui ça va!" — "how are things?" - - "fine!"
allez! (encouragement) — go on!, (avec impatience) come on!
Allez! Dépêche-toi! — Come on, hurry up!
allez, au revoir — OK then, bye-bye
y aller; allons-y! — let's go!
Je dois y aller. — I've got to go.
Tu y vas un peu fort. — You're going a bit too far., You're going a bit far.
Nous sommes allés jusqu'à Angers. — We went as far as Angers.
J'irais jusqu'à dire qu'il est trop tard. — I would go so far as to say that it's too late.
se laisser aller — to let o.s. go
ça va de soi; ça va sans dire — that goes without saying
ça va comme ça (= c'est suffisant) — that's fine, (impatience) that's enough
3. vb auxJe vais le faire. — I'm going to do it.
Je vais me fâcher. — I'm going to get angry.
Je vais écrire à mes cousins. — I'm going to write to my cousins.
* * *I.aller ⇒ Note d'usage verb table: allerA v aux1 ( marque le futur) je vais partir I'm leaving; je vais rentrer chez moi/me coucher I'm going home/to bed; j'allais partir I was just leaving; j'allais partir quand il est arrivé I was about to leave when he arrived; l'homme qui allait inventer la bombe atomique the man who was to invent the atomic bomb; il allait le regretter he was to regret it; il va le regretter he'll regret it; elle va avoir un an she'll soon be one; il va faire nuit it'll soon be dark; ça va aller mal○ there'll be trouble; tu vas me laisser tranquille? will you please leave me alone!;2 ( marque le futur programmé) je vais leur dire ce que je pense I'm going to tell them what I think; elle va peindre sa cuisine en bleu she's going to paint her kitchen blue; j'allais te le dire I was just going to tell you;3 ( marque le mouvement) aller rouler de l'autre côté de la rue to go rolling across the street; aller valser○ à l'autre bout de la pièce to go flying across the room; aller atterrir○ en plein champ/sur mon bureau to end up in the middle of a field/on my desk;4 (marque l'inclination, l'initiative) qu'est-ce que tu vas imaginer là? what a ridiculous idea!; va savoir! who knows?; va or allez (donc) savoir ce qui s'est passé who knows what happened?; qu'es-tu allé te mettre en tête? where did you pick up that idea?; qui irait le soupçonner? who would suspect him?; vous n'iriez pas leur dire ça? you're not going to go and say that, are you?; pourquoi es-tu allé faire ça? why did you have to go and do that?; n'allez pas croire une chose pareille! ( pour réfuter) don't you believe it!; ( pour tempérer l'enthousiasme) don't get carried away!; allez y comprendre quelque chose! just try and work that out!;5 ( marque l'évolution) la situation va (en) se compliquant the situation is getting more and more complicated; aller (en) s'améliorant/s'aggravant to be improving/getting worse; la tristesse ira (en) s'atténuant the grief will diminish.B vi1 (se porter, se dérouler, fonctionner) comment vas-tu, comment ça va? how are you?; ça va (bien) I'm fine; les enfants vont bien? are the children all right?; et ta femme/ton épaule, comment ça va? how's your wife/your shoulder?; comment va la santé? how are you keeping?; ça va la vie○? how's life○?; ça va les amours○? how's the love life going?; aller beaucoup mieux to be much better; bois ça, ça ira mieux drink this, you'll feel better; tout va bien pour toi? is everything going all right?; si tout va bien if everything goes all right; vous êtes sûr que ça va? are you sure you're all right?; les affaires vont bien/mal business is good/bad; ça va l'école? how are things at school?; ça ne va pas très fort or bien ( ma santé) I'm not feeling very well; ( la vie) things aren't too good; ( le moral) I'm feeling a bit low; ça pourrait aller mieux, ça va plus ou moins ( réponse) so-so; ça va mal entre eux things aren't too good between them; qu'est-ce qui ne va pas? what's the matter?; la voiture a quelque chose qui ne va pas there's something wrong with the car; tout va pour le mieux everything's fine; tout est allé si vite! it all happened so quickly!; ne pas aller sans peine or mal not to be easy; ne pas aller sans hésitations to take some thinking about; ça va de soi or sans dire it goes without saying; ça devrait aller de soi it should be obvious; ainsi vont les choses that's the way it goes; ainsi va le monde that's the way of the world; ainsi allait la France this was the state of affairs in France; l'amour ne va jamais de soi love is never straightforward; ça va tout seul ( c'est facile) it's a doddle○ GB, it's as easy as pie; ça ne va pas tout seul it's not that easy, it's no picnic○; les choses vont très vite things are moving fast; on fait aller○ struggling on○; ça peut aller○, ça ira○ could be worse○; ça va pas, non○ or la tête○? are you mad○ GB ou crazy○?; ça va pas, non, de crier or gesticuler comme ça○? what's the matter with you, carrying on like that○?; ⇒ pis;2 ( se déplacer) to go; tu vas trop vite you're going too fast; allez tout droit go straight ahead; aller et venir ( dans une pièce) to pace up and down; ( d'un lieu à l'autre) to run in and out; la liberté d'aller et venir the freedom to come and go at will; je préfère aller à pied/en avion I'd rather walk/fly; les nouvelles vont vite news travels fast; aller d'un pas rapide to walk quickly; je sais aller à bicyclette/cheval I can ride a bike/horse; où vas-tu? where are you going?, where are you off○ to?; je vais en Pologne I'm going to Poland; aller au marché/en ville to go to the market/into town; aller chez le médecin/dentiste to go to the doctor's/dentist's; va dans ta chambre go to your room; je suis allé de Bruxelles à Anvers I went from Brussels to Antwerp; je suis allé jusqu'en Chine/au marché ( et pas plus loin) I went as far as China/the market; ( et c'était loin) I went all the way to China/the market; je préfère ne pas y aller I'd rather not go; allons-y! let's go!; je l'ai rencontré en allant au marché I met him on the way to the market; aller vers le nord to head north; j'y vais ( je m'en occupe) I'll get it; ( je pars)○ I'm going, I'm off○; où va-t-il encore? where is he off to now○?; aller sur or vers Paris to head for Paris; où va-t-on○?, où allons-nous○? fig what are things coming to?, what's the world coming to?; va donc, eh, abruti○! get lost○, you idiot!; ⇒ cruche;3 (pour se livrer à une activité, chercher un produit) aller à l'école/au travail to go to school/to work; aller à la chasse/pêche to go hunting/fishing; allez-vous à la piscine? do you go to the swimming pool?; il est allé au golf/tennis he's gone to play golf/tennis; aller aux champignons/framboises to go mushroom-/raspberry-picking; aller au pain○ to go and get the bread; dans quelle boulangerie allez-vous? which bakery do you go to?; aller aux courses○ or commissions○ to go shopping; aller au ravitaillement to go and stock up; aller aux nouvelles or informations to go and see if there's any news;4 ( s'étendre dans l'espace) la route va au village the road leads to the village; la rue va de la gare à l'église the street goes from the station to the church;5 ( convenir) ma robe/la traduction, ça va? is my dress/the translation all right?; ça va, ça ira○, ça peut aller○ ( en quantité) that'll do; ( en qualité) it'll do; ça va comme ça it's all right as it is; ça ne va pas du tout that's no good at all; ça ne va pas du tout, tu dois mettre une cravate you can't go like that, you have to wear a tie; la traduction n'allait pas the translation was no good; lundi ça (te) va? would Monday suit you ou be okay○?; une soupe, ça (te) va? how about some soup?; va pour une soupe○ soup is okay○; ça irait si on se voyait demain? would it it be all right if we met tomorrow?; ça va si je porte un jean? can I wear jeans?; si le contrat ne te va pas, ne le signe pas don't sign the contract if you're not happy with it; si ça va pour toi, ça va pour moi○ or ça me va○ if it's okay by you, it's okay by me○; ça n'irait pas du tout ( inacceptable) that would never do; ma scie ne va pas pour le métal my saw is no good for metal; ça te va bien de faire la morale/parler comme ça○ iron you're hardly the person to preach/make that sort of remark;6 (être de la bonne taille, de la bonne forme) aller à qn to fit sb; tes chaussures sont trop grandes, elles ne me vont pas your shoes are too big, they don't fit me; cette vis/clé ne va pas this screw/key doesn't fit;7 (flatter, mettre en valeur) aller à qn to suit sb; le rouge ne me va pas or me va mal red doesn't suit me; sa robe lui allait (très) bien her dress really suited her; le rôle t'irait parfaitement the part would suit you perfectly; ta cravate ne va pas avec ta chemise your tie doesn't go with your shirt; les tapis vont bien ensemble the rugs go together well; les meubles vont bien ensemble the furniture all matches; je trouve que ta sœur et son petit ami vont très bien ensemble I think your sister and her boyfriend are ideally suited;8 ( se ranger) to go; les assiettes vont dans le placard the plates go in the cupboard; la chaise pliante va derrière la porte de la cuisine the folding chair goes behind the kitchen door;9 ( faculté) pouvoir aller dans l'eau to be waterproof; le plat ne va pas au four the dish is not ovenproof;10 ( dans une évaluation) la voiture peut aller jusqu'à 200 km/h the car can do up to 200 km/h; certains modèles peuvent aller jusqu'à 1 000 euros some models can cost up to 1,000 euros; une peine allant jusqu'à cinq ans de prison a sentence of up to five years in prison;11 ( en arriver à) aller jusqu'au président to take it right up to the president; aller jusqu'à mentir/tuer to go as far as to lie/kill; leur amour est allé jusqu'à la folie their love bordered on madness;12 ( dans le temps) aller jusqu'en 1914 to go up to 1914; pendant la période qui va du 8 février au 13 mars between 8 February and 13 March; la période qui va de 1918 à 1939 the period between 1918 and 1939; l'offre va jusqu'à jeudi the offer lasts until Thursday; le contrat allait jusqu'en 1997 the contract ran until 1997; va-t-on vers une nouvelle guerre? are we heading for another war?; aller sur ses 17 ans to be going on 17;13 (agir, raisonner) vas-y doucement or gentiment, le tissu est fragile careful, the fabric is delicate; ils n'y sont pas allés doucement avec les meubles○ they were rather rough with the furniture; tu vas trop vite you're going too fast; vas-y, demande-leur! ( incitation) go on, ask them!; vas-y, dis-le! ( provocation) come on, out with it!; allons, allez! (pour encourager, inciter) come on!; j'y vais○ ( je vais agir) here we go!; si tu vas par là or comme ça, rien n'est entièrement vrai if you take that line, nothing is entirely true;14 ( contribuer) y aller de sa petite larme to shed a little tear; y aller de sa petite chanson to do one's party piece; y aller de ses économies to dip into one's savings; y aller de sa personne to pitch in; y aller de 100 euros Jeux to put in 100 euros;15 ○( se succéder) ça y va la vodka avec lui he certainly gets through the vodka; ça y allait les coups the fur was flying○;16 ( servir) où est allé l'argent? where has the money gone?; l'argent ira à la réparation de l'église the money will go toward(s) repairing the church; l'argent est allé dans leurs poches they pocketed the money;17 ( enfreindre) aller contre la loi [personne] to break the law; [acte] to be against the law; je ne peux pas aller contre ce qu'il a décidé I can't go against his decision.C s'en aller vpr1 (partir, se rendre) il faut que je m'en aille I must go ou leave; je m'en vais en Italie cet été I'm going to Italy this summer; je m'en vais du Japon l'année prochaine I'll be leaving Japan next year; va-t'en! go away!; s'en aller faire les courses/en vacances/au travail to go off to do the shopping/on vacation/to work; ils s'en allaient chantant† they went off singing;2 ( disparaître) les nuages vont s'en aller the clouds will clear away; la tache ne s'en va pas the stain won't come out; avec le temps, tout s'en va everything fades with time; les années s'en vont the years go by;4 (avoir l'intention de, essayer) je m'en vais leur dire ce que je pense I'm going to tell them what I think; ne t'en va pas imaginer une chose pareille ( pour réfuter) don't you believe it!; ( pour tempérer l'enthousiasme) don't get carried away!; va-t'en savoir ce qu'il a voulu dire! who knows what he meant?D v impers1 ( être en jeu) il y va de ma réputation my reputation is at stake; il y va de ta santé your health is at stake, you're putting your health at risk;2 ( se passer) il en va souvent ainsi that's often what happens; tout le monde doit aider et il en va de même pour toi everyone must help, and that goes for you too; il en ira de même pour eux the same goes for them; il en va autrement en Corée things are different in Korea; il en ira de lui comme de ses prédécesseurs he'll go the same way as his predecessors;3 Math 40 divisé par 12 il y va 3 fois et il reste 4 12 into 40 goes 3 times with 4 left over.II.aller nm1 ( trajet) j'ai fait une escale à l'aller I made a stopover on the way out; j'ai pris le bus à l'aller ( en allant là) I took the bus there; ( en venant ici) I took the bus here; l'aller a pris trois heures the journey there took three hours; il n'arrête pas de faire des allers et retours entre chez lui et son bureau he keeps running to and fro from his house to the office; je suis pressé, je ne fais que l'aller et le retour○ I'm in a hurry, I've just popped in○; billet aller gén single ticket GB, one-way ticket US; ( d'avion) one-way ticket; billet aller (et) retour return ticket GB, round trip (ticket) US;2 ( ticket) aller (simple) single (ticket); deux allers (pour) Lille two singles to Lille; aller (et) retour return ticket;I[ale] nom masculin1. [voyage] outward journeyfaire des allers et retours [personne, document] to go back and forth, to shuttle back and forthne faire qu'un ou que l'aller et retour: je vais à la banque mais je ne fais qu'un aller et retour I'm going to the bank, but I'll be right back2. [billet]3. (familier)aller et retour [gifle] slapII[ale] verbe auxiliaire1. (suivi de l'infinitif) [exprime le futur proche] to be going ou about totu vas tomber! you're going to fall!, you'll fall!attendez-le, il va arriver wait for him, he'll be here any minute nowj'allais justement te téléphoner I was just going to phone you, I was on the point of phoning you[pour donner un ordre]tu vas faire ce que je te dis, oui ou non? will you do as I say or won't you?2. (suivi de l'infinitif) [en intensif] to gone va pas croire/penser que... don't go and believe/think that...tu ne vas pas me faire croire que tu ne savais rien! you can't fool me into thinking that you didn't know anything!allez expliquer ça à un enfant de 5 ans! try and explain ou try explaining that to a 5-year-old!3. [exprime la continuité] (suivi du gérondif)a. [tension] to be risingb. [nombre] to be rising ou increasing————————[ale] verbe intransitifA.[EXPRIME LE MOUVEMENT]1. [se déplacer] to goa. hurry up!b. [à un enfant] run along (now)!vous alliez à plus de 90 km/h [en voiture] you were driving at ou doing more than 90 km/ha. [de long en large] to pace up and downb. [entre deux destinations] to come and go, to go to and fro2. [se rendre - personne]aller à la mer/à la montagne to go to the seaside/mountainsa. [bâtiment] to go to the universityb. [institution] to go to university ou collegealler à la chasse/pêche to go hunting/fishingj'irai en avion/voiture I'll fly/drive, I'll go by plane/cartu n'iras plus chez eux, tu m'entends? you will not visit them again, do you hear me?aller en haut/bas to go up/down3. (suivi de l'infinitif) [pour se livrer à une activité]va te faire voir (très familier) ou te faire foutre! (vulgaire) get lost! ou (UK) stuffed! (très familier), go to hell!4. [mener - véhicule, chemin] to go7. [être remis]l'argent collecté ira à une œuvre the collection will go ou be given to a charityB.[S'ÉTENDRE]1. [dans l'espace]aller de... à...: leur propriété va de la rivière à la côte their land stretches from the river to the coasta. [vers le haut] to go ou to reach up tob. [vers le bas] to go ou to reach down toc. [en largeur, en longueur] to go to, to stretch as far as2. [dans le temps]aller de... à... to go from... to...aller jusqu'à [bail, contrat] to run till3. [dans une série]aller de... à... to go ou to range from... to...C.[PROGRESSER]1. [se dérouler]aller vite/lentement to go fast/slowplus ça va...: plus ça va, moins je comprends la politique the more I see of politics, the less I understand itplus ça va, plus je l'aime I love her more each day2. [personne]aller jusqu'à: j'irai jusqu'à 1.000 euros pour le fauteuil I'll pay ou go up to 1,000 euros for the armchairj'irais même jusqu'à dire que... I would even go so far as to say that...aller sur ou vers [approcher de]: il va sur ou vers la cinquantaine he's getting on for ou going on 50elle va sur ses cinq ans she's nearly ou almost five, she'll be five soonaller à la faillite/l'échec to be heading for bankruptcy/failureoù va-t-on ou allons-nous s'il faut se barricader chez soi? what's the world coming to if people have to lock themselves in nowadays?D.[ÊTRE DANS TELLE OU TELLE SITUATION]1. [en parlant de l'état de santé]bonjour, comment ça va? — ça va hello, how are you? — all rightça va? [après un choc] are you all right?2. [se passer]les choses vont ou ça va mal things aren't too good ou aren't going too wellcomment ça va dans ton nouveau service? how are you getting on ou how are things in the new department?quelque chose ne va pas? is there anything wrong ou the matter?ça ne va pas tout seul ou sans problème it's not an ou it's no easy jobE.[EXPRIME L'ADÉQUATION]1. [être seyant]a. [taille d'un vêtement] to fit somebodyb. [style d'un vêtement] to suit somebodyle bleu lui va blue suits her, she looks good in bluecela te va à ravir ou à merveille that looks wonderful on you, you look wonderful in that2. [être en harmonie]j'ai acheté un chapeau pour aller avec ma veste I bought a hat to go with ou to match my jacketa. [couleurs, styles] to go well together, to matchb. [éléments d'une paire] to belong togetherils vont bien ensemble, ces deux-là! those two make quite a pair!je trouve qu'ils vont très mal ensemble I think (that) they're an ill-matched couple ou they make a very odd pair3. [convenir]tu veux de l'aide? — non, ça ira! do you want a hand? — no, I'll manage ou it's OK!tu ne rajoutes pas de crème? — ça ira comme ça don't you want to add some cream? — that'll do (as it is) ou it's fine like thisça ira pour aujourd'hui that'll be all for today, let's call it a dayaller à quelqu'un: on dînera après le spectacle — ça me va we'll go for dinner after the show — that's all right ou fine by me ou that suits me (fine)F.[LOCUTIONS]allez, un petit effort come on, put some effort into itallez, je m'en vais! right, I'm going now!zut, j'ai cassé un verre! — et allez (donc), le troisième en un mois! damn! I've broken a glass! — well done, that's the third in a month!allez-y! go on!, off you go!allons bon, j'ai perdu ma clef maintenant! oh no, now I've lost my key!allons bon, voilà qu'il recommence à pleurer! here we go, he's crying again!c'est mieux comme ça, va! it's better that way, you know!je t'aurai prévenu! — ça va, ça va! don't say I didn't warn you! — OK, OK!ça va comme ça hein, j'en ai assez de tes jérémiades! just shut up will you, I'm fed up with your moaning!y aller (familier) : une fois que tu es sur le plongeoir, il faut y aller! once you're on the diving board, you've got to jump!quand faut y aller, faut y aller when you've got to go, you've got to gocomme tu y vas (familier) /vous y allez (familier) : j'en veux 30 euros — comme tu y vas! I want 30 euros for it — isn't that a bit much?ça y va: (familier) ça y va, les billets de 10 euros! 10 euro notes are going as if there was no tomorrow!y aller de: aux réunions de famille, il y va toujours d'une ou de sa chansonnette every time there's a family gathering, he sings a little songil ou cela ou ça va de soi (que) it goes without saying (that)il ou cela ou ça va sans dire (que) it goes without saying (that)il en va de... comme de...: il en va de la littérature comme de la peinture it's the same with literature as with paintingil en va autrement: il en irait autrement si ta mère était encore là things would be very different if your mother was still heretout le monde est égoïste, si tu vas par là! everybody's selfish, if you look at it like that!————————s'en aller verbe pronominal intransitif1. [partir - personne] to go2. [se défaire, se détacher] to come undone4. [disparaître - tache] to come off, to go (away) ; [ - son] to fade away ; [ - forces] to fail ; [ - jeunesse] to pass ; [ - lumière, soleil, couleur] to fade (away) ; [ - peinture, vernis] to come offça s'en ira au lavage/avec du savon it'll come off in the wash/with soap5. (suivi de l'infinitif) [en intensif] -
14 CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE
■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. The Oxford Book of Portuguese Verse: XIIth Century-XXth Century. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1925, 1952 (2nd edition, B. Vi-digal, ed.).■. Portuguese Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922, 1970 (2nd edition, B. Vidigal, ed.).■ Bleiberg, German, Maureen Ihrie, and Janet Pérez, eds. Dictionary of the Literature of the Iberian Peninsula, 2 vols. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1993.■ Castro, Francisco Lyon de, ed. História da literatura portuguesa, 7 vols. Lisbon: Alfa, 2001-02.■ Cidade, Hernani. Lições de Cultura e Literatura Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.■ Cook, Manuela. Portuguese: A Complete Course for Beginners. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1996. Figueiredo, Fidelino. História literária de Portugal. Coimbra, 1944. Gentile, Georges Le. La Littérature Portugaise. Rev. ed. Paris, 1951. Kunoff, Hugo. Portuguese Literature from Its Origins to 1990: A Bibliography Based on the Collections at Indiana University. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1994.■ Longland, Jean. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry. A Bilingual Selection. Irvington-on-Hudson: Harvey House, 1966. Prado Coelho, Jacinto do. Dicionário das Literaturas Portuguesas, Galega e Brasileira, 3rd ed. Oporto, 1978. Rossi, Giuseppe C. Storia della letteratura portoghesa. Florence, 1953.■ Santos, João Camilo dos. "Portuguese Contemporary Literature." In Antônio Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 218-42. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.■ Saraiva, Antônio José. História da cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-60.■. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990 ed.■, and Oscar Lopes. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Oporto and Coimbra, 1992 ed.■ Seguier, Jaime de, ed. Dicionário Prático Ilustrado. Oporto: Lello, 1961 and later eds.■ Simões, João Gaspar. História da poesia portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1955-56 and later eds.■. História da poesia portuguesa do século XX. Lisbon, 1959 and later eds.■ Stern, Irwin, ed.-in-chief. Dictionary of Brazilian Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1988.■ TRAVEL AND TOURIST GUIDES ON PORTUGAL■ Ballard, Sam, and Jane Ballard. Pousadas of Portugal: Unique Lodgings in State-owned Castles, Palaces, Mansions and Hotels. Boston: Harvard Common, 1986.■ Bridge, Ann, and Susan Lowndes Marques. The Selective Traveller in Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1968.■ Ellingham, Mark, et al. Portugal: The Rough Guide. London: Rough Guides, 2008 ed.■ Hogg, Anthony. Travellers' Portugal. London: Solo Mio, 1983.■ Kite, Cynthia, and Ralph Kite. Portuguese Country Inns & Pousadas. New York: Warner Books; Karen Brown's Country Inn Series, 1988.■ Lowndes, Susan, ed. Fodor's Portugal 1991. New York: Fodor's, 1990.■ Proença Raúl, and Sant'anna Dionísio, eds. Guía De Portugal. I. Generalidades. Lisboa E, Arredores. Lisbon: Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1924; 1983.■ Robertson, Ian. Portugal: Blue Guide. London: Benn; New York: Norton, 2000 and later eds.■ Stoop, Anne de. Living in Portugal. Paris and New York: Flammarion, 1995. Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Minho and North Portugal: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1968.■. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.■. Algarve: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1973.■ HISTORY OF PORTUGAL Ancient and Medieval (2000 BCE-1415 CE)■ Alarção, Jorge de. Roman Portugal. Volume I: Introduction. Warminster, U.K., 1988.■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História de Portugal. Vol. I. Coimbra, 1922. Arnaut, Salvador Dias. A Crise Nacional dos fins do século XVI. Vol. 1. Coimbra, 1960.■ Baião, Antônio, Hernani Cidade, and Manuel Múrias, eds. História de Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40. Caetano, Marcello. Lições de História do Direito Português. Coimbra, 1962. Cortesão, Jaime. Os Factores Democráticos no Formação de Portugal. Lisbon, 1960.■ David, Pierre. Etudes Historiques sur la Galice et le Portugal du VI au XII siécle. Paris, 1947.■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999. Diffie, Bailey W. Prelude to Empire: Portugal Overseas before Henry the Navigator. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1960. Dutra, Francis A. "Portugal: To 1279." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 35-48. New York: Scribners, 1987.■. "Portugal: 1279-1481." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 48-56. New York: Scribners, 1987. Gama Barros, Henrique de. História de Administração Pública em Portugal nos séculos XII à XV, 11 vols. Lisbon, 1945-51. Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. A Economia dos Descobrimentos Henriquinos. Lisbon, 1962.■ Gonzaga de Azevedo, Luís. História de Portugal, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1939-44.■ Herculano, Alexandre. História de Portugal, 8 vols., 9th ed. Lisbon, 1940.■ Kennedy, Hugh. Muslim Spain and Portugal: A Political History of al-Anda-lus. London: Longman, 1996.■ Lencastre e Tavora, Luía Gonzaga. O Estudo da Sigilografia Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.■ Livermore, H. V. The Origins of Spain and Portugal. London: Allen & Unwin, 1971.■ Lopes, David. "Os Árabes nas obras de Alexandre Herculano." Boletim da Segunda Classe. Lisbon: Academia Real das Sciéncias, III (1909-10). MacKendrick, Paul. The Iberian Stones Speak. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1969.■ Martinez, Pedro Soares. História Diplomática De Portugal [chapter I, 114315]. Lisbon, 1986.■ Mattoso, José, ed. A Nobreza Medieval Portuguesa: A Família e o Poder. Lisbon: Estampa, 1981.■. Religião e cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1982.■. Identificaçao de um país ( ensaio sobre as orígens de Portugal), 2 vols. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.■. Novos Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1988.■. Historia de Portugal. Vol. 2: A Monarquia Feudal ( 1096-1480). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. Hansa e Portugal na Idade Média. Lisbon, 1959.■. Introduçao à História da Agricultura em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.■. Daily Life in Portugal in the Middle Ages. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1971.■. Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1980.■. "Introduçao à História da Cidade Medieval Portuguesa." Bracara Augusta XXV, 92-93 (January-December 1981): 367-87.■. Guía do Estudante de História Medieval Portuguesa, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1985.■. Portugal Na Crise Dos Séculos XIV e XV-Vol. IV of Serrão and Oliveira Marques, Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.■ Peres, Damião de, ed. História de Portugal. Vols. I, II. Barcelos, 1928-29.■ Rau, Virginia. Subsídios para o estudo das Feiras Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1943.■. Sesma'rias Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1946.■ Ribeiro, Orlando. "Portugal, formação de." Dicionário da História de Portugal. Vol. III, 432-51. Lisbon, 1966.■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.■ Russell, P. E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955.■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1968.■ Silva, Armando Coelho Ferreira. A Cultura Castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Pacos de Ferreira, 1986.■ Varagnac, André. O Homem antes da Escrita ( Pre-história). Lisbon, 1963.■ Azevedo, J. Lúcio de. História de António de Vieira, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1918-20.■. Épocas de Portugal Económico. Lisbon, 1929.■ Borges de Macedo, Jorge. Problemas de História de Indústria Portuguesa no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1963.■. "Pombal." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. III, 415-23. Lisbon, 1968.■ Bovill, Edward W. The Battle of the Alcazar: An Account of the Defeat of Dom Sebastian at El-Ksar el-Kebir. London, 1952.■ Boxer, C. R. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg, South Africa: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.■. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.■. João de Barros: Portuguese Humanist and Historian of Asia. New Delhi, India: Xavier Centre, 1981.■ Cheke, Marcus. Dictator of Portugal: A Life of the Marquis of Pombal, 16991782. London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1938.■ Cunha, Luís da. Testamento Político. Lisbon, 1820.■ Davidson, Lillias C. Catherine of Bragança. London: John Murray, 1908.■ Dutra, Francis A. "Membership in the Order of Christ in the Seventeenth Century." The Americas 27 (1970): 3-25.■ Eberlein, H. D., and R. W. Ramsdell. The Practical Book of Italian, Spanish and Portuguese Furniture. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1927.■ Ericeira, Luís de Meneses [Count of]. História de Portugal Restaurado, 4 vols. Oporto, 1945.■ Fisher, H. E. S. "Anglo-Portuguese Trade, 1700-70." Economic History Review XVI, 2 (1963): 219-33.■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal: 1691-1708. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.■ Hanson, Carl A. Economy and Society in Baroque Portugal, 1668-1703. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1981.■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. New York: AMS Press, 1968 reprint.■ Kendrick, T. D. The Lisbon Earthquake. London: Methuen, 1956.■ Livermore, H. V. "The Privileges of an Englishman in the Kingdom and Dominions of Portugal." Atlante 11 (1954): 57-77.■ Macauley, Neil. Dom Pedro: The Struggle for Liberty in Brazil and Portugal, 1798-1834. Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1986.■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.■. They Went to Portugal, Too. London: Carcanet, 1990.■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. Prix et Monnaies au Portugal. Paris, 1955.■. "Portugal and Her Empire." In New Cambridge Modern History. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1961): 509-10.■. A Economia dos descobrimentos henri-quinos. Lisbon, 1962.■. Estructura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.■ Mauro, Frédéric. Le Portugal et l'Atlantique au XVII siécle ( 1570-1670). Paris: SEVPEN, 1960.■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Pombal and the Nationalization of the Luso-Brazilian Economy." Hispanic American Historical Review XLVIII (November 1968): 608-31.■. Conflicts and Conspiracies: Brazil and Portugal, 1750-1808. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1973.■ Norris, A. H., and R. W. Bremner. The Lines of Torres Vedras. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal, 1980.■ Oliveira, Antônio de. A Vida Económica e Social de Coimbra de 1537 à 1640, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1971-72.■ Prestage, Edgar. The Royal Power and the Cortes in Portugal. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1927.■. Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.■. "The Mode of Government in Portugal during the Restoration [1640-68] Period." In Edgar Prestage, ed., Melange d'Etudes Portugaises Offerts a M. Georges Le Gentil, 265-70. Lisbon, 1949.■ Rabassa, Gregory. "Padre Antônio Vieira: Portugal's Amazing Polymath." Camões Centre Quarterly 2, 3-4 (Autumn and Winter 1990): 27-32. Rau, Virginia. D. Catarina de Bragança: Rainha de Inglaterra. Lisbon, 1944. Ricard, Robert. "Prophecy and Messianism in the Works of Antônio Vieira." The Americas 37 (1960): 357-88.■ Roche, T. W. E. Philippa: Dona Filipa of Portugal. London: Phillimore, 1971.■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.■ Rooney, Peter T. "Hapsburg Fiscal Policies in Portugal, 1580-1640." Journal of European Economic History 23, 3 (1994): 545-62.■ Roth, Cecil. "The Religion of the Marranos." Jewish Quarterly Review 22 (1931): 1-33.■. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.■ Saraiva, Antônio José. Inquisição e Cristãos-Novos. Oporto, 1969.■. A Inquisição Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969 and later eds.■ Schneider, Susan. O Marquês De Pombal E O Vinho Do Porto: Dependência e subdesenvolvimento em Portugal no século XVIII. Lisbon, 1980.■ Shaw, L. M. E. Trade, Inquisition and the English Nation in Portugal, 16401690. London: Carcancet, 1989.■ Shillington, V. M., and A. B. W. Chapman. The Commercial Relations of England and Portugal. London: Routledge, 1907.■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.■ Smith, John Athelstone [Conde de Carnota]. Marquis of Pombal, 2nd ed. London, 1872.■ Thomas, Gerturde Z. Richer Than Spices. New York: Knopf, 1965. Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon. Lisbon, 1940.■ Baptista, Jacinto. O Cinco de Outubro. Lisbon, 1965. Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1969 ed.■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. O desenvolvimento do capitalismo em Portugal no século XIX. Lisbon, 1981. Caetano, Marcello. História Breve das Constituções portuguesas. Lisbon, 1971 ed.■ Carnota, Conde da. Memoirs of Marshal, the Duke of Saldanha, with Selections from His Correspondence, 2 vols. London: John Murray, 1880. Carvalho, Joaquim de. Estudos sobre a cultura portuguesa do século XIX. Coimbra, 1955.■ Cheke, Marcus. Carlota Joaquina, Queen of Portugal. London: Sidgwick and Jackson, 1947.■ França, José-Augusto. Zé Provinho na Obra de Rafael Bordalo Pinheiro. Lisbon, 1975.■ Fuschini, Augusto. Liquidações políticas. Lisbon, 1896.■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. Estrutura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975 ed.■ Hammond, Richard J. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.■ Homem, Amadeu Carvalho. A Propaganda Republicana ( 1870-1910). Coimbra, 1990.■ Livermore, H. V. Portugal: A Short History. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1973. Machado, Alvaro Manuel. A Geração de 70-uma revolução cultural e literária. Lisbon, 1986 ed.■ Martins, Joaquim Pedro de Oliveira. Portugal Contemporâneo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953 ed.■ Medina, João. Eça Político. Lisbon, 1974.■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Fontes Pereira de Melo. Oporto: Ed. Afrontamento, 1999.■ Nobre, Eduardo. Paixoes Reais. Lisbon: Quimera, 2002.■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. Livre Câmbio e Desenvolvimento Económico: Portugal na segunda metade do século XIX. Lisbon, 1971.■ Peres, Damião, ed. História de Portugal. Volume III. Barcelos, 1935 ed.■ Ramos, Rui. D.Carlos. 1863-1908. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2006.■. Liberal Reformism in Portugal. Oliveira Martins, the Movement for New Life and the Politics of the Constitutional Monarchy ( 1885-1908). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.■ Rorick, David. Maria da Fonte: History and Myth. M.A. thesis, History Department, Sonoma State University, Sonoma, Calif., 1984.■ Sá, Vítor de. Perspectivas do Século XIX. Lisbon, 1964.■ Serrão, Joel. Sampaio Bruno: O homem e o pensamento. Lisbon, 1958.■. Temas Oitocentistas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1959-62.■. "Liberalismo." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. II, 732-41. Lisbon, 1965.■. Do Sebastianismo ao Socialismo. Lisbon, 1975 ed.■ Silbert, Albert. Do Portugal de Antiga Regime ao Portugal Oitocentista. Lisbon, 1972.■ Teles, Basílio. Do Ultimatum ao 31 de Janeiro. Lisbon, 1968 ed.■ Parliamentary, Republican Portugal (1910-26)■ Antunes, José Freire. A Cadeira do Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1980. Arriaga, Manuel de. Na primeira presidência da República Portugueza: Um rápido relatório. Lisbon, 1916.■ Bell, Aubrey, F. G. In Portugal. London, 1912.■. Portugal of the Portuguese. London: Pitman, 1915.■ Bragança-Cunha, V. de. Revolutionary Portugal, 1910-1936. London: Swift, 1937.■ Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. In Brandão, Obras Completas. Lisbon, 1969.■ Burity, Braz [Pseudonym of Joaquim Madureira]. A Forja da Lei. Coimbra, 1915.■ Cabral, Manuel V. Portugal Na Alvorada Do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.■. 'The Aesthetics of Nationalism: Modernism and Authoritarianism in Early 20th-Century Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 15-43. Campos, Ezequiel. Política. Oporto, 1924.■ Cardia, Sottomayor, ed. Seara Nova: Antologia. Pela Reforma da República (1, 2) 1921-1926, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1971-72.■ Carqueja, Bento. O Povo de Portugal. Oporto, 1916.■. O Futuro de Portugal: Portugal Apos À Guerra. Oporto, 1920.■ Cortesão, Jaime. "Memórias da Grande Guerra." In Obras Completas de Jaime Cortesão. Lisbon, 1969.■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. As Minhas Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1966-68.■ Derou, Jean. Les Relations Franco-Portugaises ( 1910-1926). Paris: Publications de la Sorbonne, 1986.■ Fazenda, Pedro. A Crise Política. Lisbon, 1926.■ Ferrão, Carlos. História De la República. Lisbon, 1976.■ Ferreira, David. "5 De Outubro de 1910." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História De Portugal III (1968): 264-67. Ferreira Martins, Gen. Luís, ed. Portugal na Grande Guerra, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1945.■ Gomes da Costa, Gen. Manuel. Memórias. Lisbon, 1930. História Política da Primeira República Portuguesa ( 1910-1915), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973.■ Lorenzo, Felix. Portugal ( cinco anos de republica). Madrid, 1915.■ Machado, Bernardino. Depois de 21 de Maio. Lisbon, 1922.■ Machado Santos, Antônio. 1907-1910: A revolução portugueza. Relatôrio.■ Lisbon, 1911. Madureira, Arnaldo. 0 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1982.■ Magno, David. Livro da Guerra de Portugal na Flandres. Oporto, 1920.■. A Situação Portuguesa. Oporto, 1926.■ Marques Guedes, Armando. Cinco Meses no governo. Oporto, 1926.■ Martins, Rocha. Memórias sobre Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1921.■ Medeiros, Fernando. Nas Orígens Do A Sociedade E A Economia Portuguesas Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1978. Medina, João. "Oh! a República!...," Estudos sobre o Republicanismo e a Primeira República Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.■, ed. História Contemporânea De Portugal: Primeira República, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986.■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. "Uma Aristocracia Operária: Os Chapeleiros (18701913)." Análise Social 60, 2nd series (1979). Montalvor, Luís de, ed. História de Regimen Republicano em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1930-32.■ Oliveira, César. O Operariado E A República Democrática, 1910-1914. Oporto, 1972.■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. "The Portuguese 1920s: A General Survey." Iberian Studies 2 (1973): 32-40.■. História De la República Portuguesa: As Estruturas De Base, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973-74.■. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Alguns aspectos estruturais. Lisbon, 1975 ed.■. O Terceiro Governo Afonso Costa— 1917. Lisbon, 1977.■. Pabôn, Jesus. La Revolución Portuguesa, 2 vols. Madrid, 1945-46; Portuguese edition: Lisbon, 1961. Paxeco, Oscar. Os Que Arrancaram Em 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1937. Peres, Damião, ed. História De Portugal. Ediçao Monumental: Supplemento. Oporto, 1954.■ Pessoa, Fernando. A Memória do Presidente— Rei Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1928.■ Relvas, José. Memórias Políticas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1977-78.■ Schwartzman, Kathleen C. "Lucros, investimentos e coligações políticas na I República." Análise Social XVIII, 72-71 (1982): 741-58.■. The Social Origins of Democratic Collapse: The First Portuguese Republic in the Global Economy. Lawrence: University of Kansas Press, 1989.■ Serrão, Joel. Liberalismo, socialismo e republicanismo. Lisbon, 1979.■ Silva, Antônio Maria da. O Meu Depoimento, 2 vols. Mem Martins, 1978-82.■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Poder e a guerra, 1914-1918. Lisbon: Estampa, 1996.■, and Antônio Costa Pinto, eds. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 2000.■ Telo, Antônio José. Decadência E Queda Da I República Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980-84.■ Torre (Gomez), Hipôlito dela, and J. Sanchez Cervello. Portugal En El Siglo XX. Madrid: Ediciones Istmo: Colecciôn La Historia en sus textos, 1992.■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. "A República e as classes trabalhadores (Outubro 1910-Agosto 1911)." Análise Social IX, 31 (1972): 293-316.■. O Poder e o Povo: A Revolução de 1910. Lisbon, 1974.■ Veríssimo Serrao, Joaquim. História De Portugal. Volume XI: A Primeira República ( 1910-1926): História Política, Religiosa, Militar e Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1989.■. História De Portugal Volume XII: História Diplomática, Social, Económica e Cultural. Lisbon, 1990.■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain and Portugal, 1910-1916." Ph.D. dissertation, History, University of London, 1971.■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese Revolution of 1910." Journal of Modern History 44 (June 1972): 172-94.■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978.■. "Nightmare Republic: Portugal, 1910-1926." History Today (London) 32 (September 1981): 5-10.■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young: An Historical Study. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1917.■ Afonso, Rui. Injustiça: O Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.■ Antunes, José Freire. Os Americanos E Portugal. Vol. 1. Os anos de Ricard Nixon, 1969-1974. Lisbon, 1986.■. Os Americanos e Portugal. 1961. Kennedy e Salazar: O Leão e a Raposa. Lisbon, 1991.■. Salazar/Caetano. Cartas Secretas. 1932-1968. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1993.■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.■. Portugal na guerra do petróleo: Os Açores E As Vitórias de Israel 1973. Lisbon: Edeline, 2000. Aquino, Acácio Tómas de. O Segredo das Prisões Atlânticas. Lisbon, 1978. Araquistain, Luis. "Dictatorship in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 7 (October 1928): 41-53.■ Assac, Jacques Ploncard. Salazar. Paris: La Table Ronde, 1967.■ Baklanoff, Eric N. "The Political Economy of Portugal's Old Regime: Growth and Change Preceding the 1974 Revolution." World Development 7, 8-9 (August-September 1979): 799-812.■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. New York: Doubleday, 1975.■ Blume, Norman. "SEDES: An Example of Opposition in a Conservative Authoritarian State." Government and Opposition 12 (Summer 1977): 351-66.■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. A origem da democracia-cristã em Portugal e o Sala-zarismo. Lisbon, 1979.■. "Notas para uma caracterização política do salazarismo." In Gabinete de Investigações Sociais. Análise Social: A Formação de Portugal Contemporâneo: 1900-1980. Vol. I, 72-74 (April-December 1981): 773-94.■. "O Integralismo nas origens do Salazarismo." Análise Social XVIII (1982): 1409-19.■. "A Oposição Eleitoral ao Salazarismo." Revista de História das Ideias V (1983).■. Monárquicos e Republicanos no Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1986.■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Sobre o fascismo e o seu avento em Portugal." Análise Social XII, 48 (1976), 873-915.■ Caetano, Marcello. A Missão Dos Dirigentes. Lisbon, 1966, 4th ed.■. Depoimento. São Paulo, 1974.■. História Breve das Constituições Portugueses. Lisbon, 1974.■. As Minhas Memórias de Salazar. Lisbon, 1977.■ Campinos, Jorge. A Ditadura Militar, 1926-1933. Lisbon, 1975. Carrilho, Maria. Forças Armadas e Mudança Política em Portugal no Século XX. Lisbon, 1985.■, et al. Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial Contributos para uma reavaliação. Lisbon, 1989.■ Carvalho, Otelo Saraiva de. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.■ Castanheira, Jose Pedro and Valdemar Cruz. A Filha Rebelde. Lisbon: Temas & Debates, 2003.■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, et al. O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, Lisbon, March 1980]. Lisbon, 1982.■. 'The Radical Right and the Military Dictatorship in Portugal: The National May 28 League (1928-1933)." Luso-Brazilian Review 23, 1 (Summer 1986): 1-15.■. "O Salazarismo No Recente Investigação Sobre o Fascismo Europeu...." Análise Social XXV (1990): 695-713.■. As camisas azuis: Ideologias, elites e movimentos fascistas em Portugal, 1914-1945. Lisbon: Estampa, 1994.■. Salazar's Dictatorship and European Fascism: Problems of Interpretation. New York: Columbia University Press, 1995.■. The Blue Shirts: Portuguese Fascists and the New State. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.■ Delgado, Humberto. The Memoirs of General Delgado. London: Cassell, 1964.■. Memórias De Humberto Delgado. Iva Delgado and Antônio de Figueiredo, eds. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.■ Duarte Silva, A. E., et al. Salazar E O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1989.■ Egerton, F. C. C. Salazar, Rebuilder of Portugal. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1943.■ Ferraz, Artur Ivens. A Asenção de Salazar: Memórias de Ivens Ferraz. Lisbon, 1988.■ Ferro, Antônio. Salazar: O Homem E A Sua Obra. Lisbon, 1933. English edition: Salazar: Portugal and Her Leader. London: Faber & Faber, 1939, and editions in other languages.■. Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Ausentes. Lisbon, 1946.■ Figueiredo, Antônio. Portugal and Its Empire: The Truth. London: Gollancz, 1961.■. "The Case Against Portugal." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 46-57. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.■. Portugal. Fifty Years of Dictatorship. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1975.■ Fox, Ralph. Portugal Now. London, 1937.■ Freitas do Amaral, Diogo. O Antigo Regime E A Revolução. Memórias Políticas ( 1941-1975). Lisbon: Bertrand, 1995.■ Fryer, Peter, and Patricia McGowan Pinheiro. Oldest Ally: A Portrait of Sala-zar's Portugal. London: Dobson, 1961.■ Gallagher, Tom. "Controlled Repression in Salazar's Portugal." Journal of Contemporary History 14, 3 (July 1979): 385-403.■. "The Mystery Train: Portugal's Military Dictatorship 1926-32." European Studies Review 11 (1981): 325-54.■. "From Hegemony to Opposition: The Ultraright Before and After 1974." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 81-103. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■. Portugal: A Twentieth Century Interpretation. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1983.■ Galvão, Henrique. Santa Maria: My Crusade for Portugal. London: Weiden-feld and Nicholson, 1961.■. Carta Aberta ao Dr. Salazar. Lisbon, 1975.■ Gamier, Christine. Vacances avec Salazar. Paris, 1952; American edition: Salazar in Portugal: An Intimate Portrait. New York, 1954. Georgel, Jacques. O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1985.■ Gouveia, Fernando. Memórias de um Inspector da PIDE. Lisbon, 1979.■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Portugal: The Bureaucracy of Empire." LADAC Occasional Papers series 2, 9 (1973). Austin, Tex.: Institute of Latin American Studies.■. Portugal: The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.■. "The Military in Politics: The Politicization of the Portuguese Armed Forces." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 221-56. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■ Guyomard, George. La Dictature Militaire au Portugal. Paris, 1927.■ Janeiro, Helena Pinto. Salazar E Pétain. Relações Luso-Francesas Durante A II Guerra Mundial ( 1940-44). Lisbon: Cosmos, 1998.■ Kay, Hugh. "A Catholic View." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 80-103. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.■. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.■ Leeds, Elizabeth. "Labor Export, Development and the State: The Political Economy of Portuguese Emigration." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1984.■ Lewis, Paul H. "Salazar's Ministerial Elite, 1932-1968."Journal of Politics 40 (August 1987): 622-47.■ Lins, Alvaro. Missão em Portugal. Lisbon, 1974.■ Linz, Juan. "Foreword." In L. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, xii-xi. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■ Lucena, Manuel. A evolução do sistema corporativo português, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.■. "The Evolution of Portuguese Corporatism under Salazar and Caetano." In L. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 47-88. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■ McCarthy, Mary. "Letter from Lisbon." The New Yorker XXX, 51 (February 5, 1955): 80-96.■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. O Socialismo e o Futuro da Peninsula. Lisbon, 1969.■ Makler, Harry M. A " Elite" Industrial Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969.■. "The Portuguese Industrial Elite and Its Corporative Relations." Economic Development and Cultural Change 24, 3 (April 1976): 495-526.■ Martins, Hermínio. "Opposition in Portugal." Government and Opposition 4 (Spring 1969): 250-63.■. "Portugal." In S. J. Woolf, ed., European Fascism, 302-36. New York: Vintage, 1969.■. "Introduction: Tristes durées." In R. Feijô, H. Martins and J. de Pina-Cabral, eds., Death in Portugal: Studies in Portuguese Anthropology and Modern History. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.■ Medina, João. Salazar em França. Lisbon, 1977.■. Salazar E Os Fascistas: Salazarismo e Nacional-Sindicalismo: A história dum conflito 1932/1935. Lisbon, 1978.■ Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros, ed. Dez Anos de Política Externa ( 1936-1947): A Nação Portuguesa e a Segunda Guerra Mundial, 12 vols., and in progress. Lisbon, 1964.■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Educação e Sociedade no Portugal de Salazar. Lisbon, 1978.■ Nogueira, Alberto Franco. Salazar, 6 vols. Coimbra and Oporto, 1978-85.■ Oliveira, César. Portugal e a II República de Espanha, 1931-l 936. Lisbon, 1985.■. Salazar E A Guerra Civil De Espanha, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1988.■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. A Maçonaria Portuguesa e o Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1975.■. History of Portugal; 1 in 2 vols. New York: Columbia University Press, 1976 ed.■. A Liga de Paris E A Ditadura Militar, 1927-1928. Lisbon, 1976.■. História de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: 1980 and later eds.■, ed. A Literatura Clandestina Em Portugal, 1926-1932, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1990.■ Patriarca, Fátima. A Questaão Social no Salazarismo. Vol. 1. Lisbon: INCM, 1995.■. Sindicatos contra Salazar: A revolta do 18 de janeiro de 1934. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 2000. Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.■ Payne, Stanley G. A History of Spain and Portugal. Volume 2. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1973.■. "Salazarism: 'Fascism' or 'Bureaucratic Authoritarianism'?" In Estudos de história portuguesa: Homenagem à A. H. de Oliveira Marques. Lisbon, 1983.■ Pereira, José Pacheco. Conflitos sociais nos campos do sul de Portugal. Mem Martins, 1978.■. A Preparação Ideológica da Intervenção Militar de 28 de Maio de 1926. Oporto, 1978.■. "Problemas da história do P. C. P." In A. Costa Pinto et al., eds., O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, University of Lisbon, March 1980], 269-85. Lisbon, 1982.■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal durante a II Guerra Mundial. Em fuga de Hitler e do Holocausto. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2006.■ Pires, José Cardoso. Dinossauro Excelentíssimo. Lisbon, 1972.■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.■ Presidência do Conselho de Ministros. Comissão do Livro Negro Sobre o Regime Fascista ["Black Book" series]. Eleições No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1979.■. A Política De Informação No Regime Fascista, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980.■. Livros Proibidos No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1981.■. Presos Políticos No Regime Fascista, 5 vols. Lisbon, 1981-87.■. Relatórios Para Oliveira Salazar, 1931-1939. Lisbon, 1981.■. Discriminação Política No Emprego No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1982.■. Proibição Da " Time" No Regime Fascista [ Time magazine July 23, 1946, with Dr. Salazar on cover]. Lisbon, 1982.■. Os Estudantes No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1983.■. Trabalho, Sindicatos E Greves No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1984.■. Correspondência Entre Mário De Figueiredo E Oliveira Salazar. Lisbon, 1986.■. Repressão Política E Social No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1986.■. Correspondência de Pedro Teotónio Pereira para Oliveira Salazar vol. 1 ( 1931-1939), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1987-89.■ Queiroga, Captain Fernando. Portugal Oprimido. Lisbon, 1974.■ Raby, David L. "Populism and the Portuguese Left: From Delgado to Otelo." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 61-80. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■. Fascism and Resistance in Portugal: Communists, Liberals and the Military Dissidents in the Opposition to Salazar, 1941-1974. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1988.■ Raby, Dawn Linda. "The Portuguese Presidential Election of 1949: A Successful Government Maneuver?" Luso-Brazilian Review 27, 1 (Summer 1990): 63-77.■ Rêgo, Raúl. Diário Político. Lisbon, 1969; 1974, 2nd ed.■. Horizontes Fechados. Oporto, 1970.■. Horizontes Fechados/ Páginas de Política, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1974.■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfrâmio. Lisbon, 1944.■. Quando os Lobos Uivam. Lisbon, 1958; English ed. Patricia McGowan■ Pinheiro, trans. London: Cape, 1963.■ Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London and Boston: Allen & Unwin, 1979.■ Rocha, José Antônio De Oliveira. The Portuguese Administrative State. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, University of South Carolina, 1986.■ Rosa, Frederico Delgado. Humberto Delgado. Biografia Do General Sem Medo. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2008. Rosas, Fernando. O Estado Novo Nos Anos Trinta: 1928-1938. Lisbon, 1986.■. O Salazarismo E A Aliança Luso-Britânica. Lisbon, 1988.■. Portugal Entre A Paz E A Guerra... 1939-1945. Lisbon, 1990.■. O Estado Novo ( 1926-1974). Vol. VII of José Mattoso, ed. Historia De■ Portugal. Lisbon: Edit. Estampa, 1994.■. and Pedro Aires Oliveira (eds.). A Transicao Falhada. O Marcelismo e o Fim do Estado Novo ( 1968-1974). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.■ Rudel, Christian. Salazar. Paris: Mercure de France, 1969.■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Uma Tentativa de Participação política. Lisbon, 1971.■. A Liberalização bloqueada. Lisbon, 1972.■. Vale a Pena ser Deputado? Fundão, 1973.■ Salazar, Antônio de Oliveira. Discursos E Notas Políticas. [Speeches, Broadcasts, Notes and Statements, 1928-1966, 6 vols. Coimbra, 1935-1966]. Several editions.■. Doctrine and Action: Internal and Foreign Policy of the New Portugal, I928-1939. Robert Edgar Broughton, trans. London: Faber & Faber, 1939.■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.■. The Road for the Future [Speeches, statements of policy made during 1928-62]. Lisbon, 1963.■. Entrevistas: 1960-1966 [interviews]. Coimbra, 1967.■. Salazar: Pensamento e doutrina política. Textos anthológicos. [Anthology of speeches, writings, interviews granted, 1914-68]. Mendo C. Henriques and Gonçalo de Sampaio e Melo, eds. Lisbon, 1989.■ Santana, Emilio. Historia de um Atentado. O atentado contra Salazar. Lisbon, 1976.■ Schmitter, Philippe C. Corporatism and Public Policy in Authoritarian Portugal. London: Sage, 1975.■. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (Nov. 1975): 5-33.■. "The Impact and Meaning of Elections in Authoritarian Portugal, 1933-74." In G. Hermet et al., eds., Elections Without Choice. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1978.■. "'The 'Regime d'exception' That Became the Rule: Forty-Eight Years of Authoritarian Domination in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Mak-ler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 3-46. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■, and Gerhard Lehmbruch, eds. Trends towards Corporatist Intermediation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1979.■ Shelton, Richard L. "Development of the Communist Party of Portugal, 1921-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, St. Louis University, 1984.■ Silva, José. Memórias de um operário. Vol. 2. Oporto, 1971. Soares, Mário. Escritos Políticos. Lisbon, 1969.■. Portugal Bailloné. Paris, 1972; Portuguese edition: Portugal Amordaçado, Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Portugal's Struggle for Liberty. Translated by Mary Gawsworth. London: Allen & Unwin, 1975.■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Johannesburg: Perskor, 1974.■ Teixeira, Luis [Sampaio]. Perfil de Salazar. Lisbon, 1938.■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. "From Neutrality to Alignment: Portugal in the Foundation of the Atlantic Pact." EUI: Working Papers in History. Florence, Italy: European University Institute, 1991.■ Telo, Antônio José. Portugal na Segunda Guerra. Lisbon, 1987.■. A Neutralidade Portuguesa e o Ouro Nazi. Lisbon: Quetzal, 2000.■ Teotônio Pereira, Pedro. Memórias, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1972-73.■ Vasco, Nuno. Vigiados e perseguidos. Lisbon, 1977.■ Veríssimo, Serrão. Marcelo Caetano: Confidencias No Exílio. Lisbon, 1985. Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. West, S. George. The New Corporative State of Portugal [Inaugural lecture, King's College, London, Feb. 1937]. London: New Temple Press, 1937. Wheeler, Douglas L. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.■. "Days of Wine and Carnations: The Portuguese Revolution of [April 25] 1974." Bulletin. New Hampshire Council on World Affairs XX (July 1974): 1-10.■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Jacques Frémontier, ed., Les Hommes d'Siecle XX: Les Dictateurs. Paris: Mazenod, 1978.■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926- 1974." In S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■. "In the Service of Order: The Portuguese Dictatorship's Political Police (PVDE; PIDE) and the British, German and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 24, 2 (January 1983): 1-25.■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978. Portuguese edition: História Política de Portugal, 1910-l926. Mem Martins, 1985.■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review [two part article] 12, 1-2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27.■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa, 1926-1933. Mem Martins, 1988.■. "The Third Pig: From Theory to Grubby Fact in Reassessing the Estado Novo." In B. F. Taggie and R. W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 145-68. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State Press, 1989.■. "And Who Is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 119-39.■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Research Guide to European Historical Biography. Vol. 3. Washington, D.C.: Beacham, 1992.■. "'Estado Presente de tranquilidade,' posto em causa: Portugal observado e analisado no contexto internacional de 1958-59." In Iva Delgado, Carlos Pacheco, and Telmo Faria, eds., Humberto Delgado: As eleições de 58, 448-71. Lisbon: Vega, 1998.■, and René Pélissier. Angola. New York: Praeger and London: Pall Mall, 1971; reprinted: Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977.■ Wiarda, Howard J. "Toward a Framework for the Study of Political Change in Iberic-Latin Tradition: The Corporative Model." World Politics 25 (January 1973): 206-35.■. Corporatism and Development: The Portuguese Experience. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1977.■. "The Corporatist Tradition and the Corporative System in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal. The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 89-122. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■ Afonso, Rui. Um Homem Bom. Aristides De Sousa Mendes O " Wallenberg Portugues." Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.■. Injustica-o Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.■ Agudo, Manuel Ros. La Guerra Secreta de Franco ( 1939-1945). Barcelona, 2002.■ Anon., Fugindo a Hitler e a Salazar e ao Holocausto-Refugiados em Portugal entre 1933-1945. Lisbon: Soc. Tipografica, 1994.■ Barreiros, Jose Antonio. A Lusitania Dos Espioes. Lisbon: Hugin, 1995.■. O Espiao Alemao Em Goa. Operacao Long Shanks, 1943. Lisbon, 2001.■ Beevor, J. G. SOE. Recollections and Reflections 1940-45. London, 1981. Bloch, Michael. Operation Willi: The Plot to Kidnap the Duke of Windsor July 1940. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1984. Carrilho, Maria et. al., Portugal Na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Contributos para uma reavaliacao. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1989. Cole, Robert. Britain and the War of Words in Neutral Europe, 1939-45. New York: St. Martin's, 1990. Colvin, Ian. Flight 777. London: Evans, 1957. Dias, Mariana Tavares. Lisboa nos Anos 40. Lisbon: Quimera, 1997. Eizenstadt, Stuart E. Coord. U.S. and Allied Efforts to Recover and Restore Gold and Other Assets Stolen or Hidden by Germany during World War II. New York, 2001.■ Fralon, Jose-Alain. A Good Man in Evil Times. The Story of Aristides De Sousa Mendes: The Man Who Saved the Lives of Countless Refugees in World War II. New York: Carroll & Graf, 2001.■ Giraudoux, Jean. Portugal. Paris: Grasset, 1958.■ Johns, Philip. Within Two Cloaks. Missions With SIS and SOE. London, 1979.■ Koestler, Arthur. Arrival and Departure. London, 1943.■ Leitz, Christian. Sympathy for the Devil: Neutral Portugal and Nazi Germany in World War II. New York, 2001.■ Louca, Antonio. Hitler e Salazar. Comercio em tempos de Guerra 1940-1944. Lisbon, 2000.■ Luca, Antonio. "Portugal's Double Game: Between the Nazis and the Allies." In Avi Beker, ed., The Plunder of Jewish Property during the Holocaust. Confronting European History. New York, 2001. MacIntyre, Ben. Agent Zigzag. New York: Harmony, 2007. Martins, Maria Joao. O Paraiso Triste. O Quotidiano em Lisboa durante a II Grande Guerra. Lisbon: Vega, 1994. Masterman, J.C. The Double-Cross System in the War of 1939 to 1945. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1972. Muggeridge, Malcolm. Chronicles of Wasted Time. Chronicle 2: The Infernal Grove. New York: William Morrow, 1974.■ Nery, Julia. O Consul. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 2006.■ Popov, Dusko. Spy/ Counterspy. London, 1974.■ Prokosch, Frederick. The Conspirators. New York, 1943.■ Remarque, Erich Maria. The Night in Lisbon. New York, 1966.■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfarmio Romance. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1943.■ Rosas, Fernando. Portugal entre a Paz e a Guerra. Lisbon: Estampa, 1990.■ Saint-Exupery, Antoine. Wartime Writings, 1939-1944. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1986.■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano, ed. Portugal E A Guerra. Historia das Intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais seculos XIX e XX. Lisbon: Colibri, 1998.■ Telo, Antonio Jose. Propagandal E Guerra Secreta Em Portugal 1939-45. Lisbon, 1990.■. Portugal na Segunda Guerra ( 1941-1945), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1991.■. A neutralidade portuguesa e o ouro nazi. Lisbon, 2000.■ Vintras, R.E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman and Turner, 1974. Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Age Old Business of Espionage." 1987 World Book Year Book. Chicago, 1987.■. "'In the Service of Order.' The Portuguese Political Police and the British, Germany and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 36: no. 3 (Jan. 1983), 1-25.■. "And Who is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 23 (no. 2) (Summer 1989), 119-39.■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, WI), 23 (nos.1, 2) (Summer, 1986; Winter, 1986). 97-111; 108-127.■. "Last of the Great Air Mysteries of the War [World War II]." Bridport and Lyme Regis Gazette (Dorset, U.K.), June 5, 2003, 24-25.■. "Leslie Howard Helped Win World War II," St. Louis Post-Dispatch (St. Louis, Mo.), April 3, 5, 2005.■ Wilson, Robert. A Small Death in Lisbon. London, 2000.■. The Company Of Strangers. San Diego, 2002.■ Wylie, Neville. "An Amateur Learns His Job? Special Operations Executive in Portugal, 1940-42." Journal of Contemporary History. 36: no. 3 (2001), 441-57.■ Ferreira Martins, General. Historia do Exercito Portugues. Lisbon: Inquerito, 1945.■ Kaulza de Arriaga, General. Guerra e Politica. Em nome da verdade. Os anos decisivos. Lisbon: Referendo, 1987.■ Medeiros Ferreira, Jose. O Comportamento Politico dos Militares, Forcas Armadas e Regimes Politicos em Portugal no seculo XX. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992.■ Pereira Marques, Fernando. Exercito e Sociedade em Portugal. No Declinio do Antigo Regime e advento do Liberalismo. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.■ Ribeiro Dos Santos, Antonio Pedro. O Estado E A Order Publica. As Institui-coes Militares Portuguesas. Lisbon: Instituto Superior De Ciencias Sociais E Politicas, 1999.■ Saraiva de Carvalho, Otelo. Alvorada em Abril. Amadora (Portugal): Bertrand, 1977.■ Selvagem, Carlos. Portugal Militar. Compendio de Historia Militar e Naval de Portugal. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1931.■ Spinola, Antonio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon: Arcadia, 1974.■. Pais Sem Rumo. Contributo para a historia de uma Revolucao. Lisbon: Scire, 1978.■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. Portugal e a Guerra. Historia das intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais do seculo XX. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 1999.■. Coord., Nova Historia Militar de Portugal, 5 vols. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2003-.■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. O Poder e o Povo. A Revolucao de 1910. Lisbon: Moraes, 1976, 1982.■ Wheeler, Douglas L. Republican Portugal: A Political History ( 1910-1926). Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978, 1998.■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa ( 1926-1933). Mem Martins: Europa- America, 1988.■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926-1974: "The Honor of the Army." In Lawrence S. Graham and Harry M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■ Aguiar, Joaquim. "Hidden Fluidity in an Ultra-Stable Party System." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 101-27. Lisbon, 1985.■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel, ed. Sistema Eleitoral Portugües: Debate Político e Parlamentar. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional/ Casa da Moeda, 1998.■, ed. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." In Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer, 2000): 1-404.■ Bruneau, Thomas C., and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.■ Bruneau, Thomas C., ed. Political Parties and Democracy in Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1997. Carlucci, Frank. "Confiei no Povo Portugues." Visao (Lisbon), April 10, 1997, 46-47.■. "The View from the U.S. Embassy." In Hans Binnendijk, ed., Authoritarian Regimes in Transition. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of State, Foreign Service Institute, Center for the Study of Foreign Affairs, 1987.■ Coelho, Mário Baptista, ed. Portugal. O Sistema Política a Constitucional, 1974-87. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, UNL, 1989.■ Costa Pinto, Antonio. "Settling Accounts with the Past in a Troubled Transition to Democracy: The Portuguese Case." In Alexandra Barahona De Brito, Carmen Gonzalez-Enriquez, and Paloma Aguilar, eds., The Politics of Memory: Transitional Justice in Democratizing Societies, 65-91. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001.■ Cruzeiro, Maria Manuela. Costa Gomes-o Ultimo Marechal. Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 1998.■ Domingos, Emídio Da Veiga. Portugal Político. Análise das Instituiçoes. Lisbon, 1989.■ Goldey, David. "Elections and the Consolidation of Portuguese Democracy: 1974-1983." Electoral Studies 2, 3 (1983): 229-40.■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Institutionalizing Democracy: Governance in Post-1974 Portugal." In Ali Farazmand, ed., Handbook of Comparative and Development Public Administration, 81-90. New York: Dekker, 1991.■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■ Gunther, Richard. "Spain and Portugal." In G. A. Dorfman and P. J. Duignan, eds., Politics in Western Europe, 186-236. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1988.■ Magone, José Maria. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1997.■ Maxwell, Kenneth. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.■, ed. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■ Maxwell, Kenneth R., and Scott C. Monje, eds. Portugal: The Constitution and the Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-1989. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Camões Center Special Report No. 2, Columbia University, 1991.■ Opello, Walter C., Jr. "The New Parliament in Portugal." Legislative Studies Quarterly, 3 (May 1978): 309-334.■. "Local Government and Political Culture in a Portuguese Rural County." Comparative Politics 13 (April 1981): 271-89.■. "Portugal's Administrative Elite: Social Origins and Political Attitudes." West European Politics 6 (Jan. 1983): 63-74.■. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.■ Pinto Balsemão, Francisco. "The Constitution and Politics: Options for the Future." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 197-232. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■ Sartori, Giovanni. "Portugal." In Sartori, G, ed., Parties and Party Systems. Vol. 1, 131-45. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976. Secretary of State for Mass Communications. Constitution of the Portuguese Republic [1976]. Lisbon, 1977.■ Aguiar, Joaquim. A Ilusão do poder: Analise do Sistema Partidário, 19761982. Lisbon, 1983. Almeida, Diniz de. Orígens e Evolução do Movimento dos Capitães. Lisbon, 1977.■. Ascensao, Apogeu e Queda do MFA, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.■ Alves, Márcio Moreira. Les Soldats Socialistes du Portugal. Paris: Gallimard, 1975.■ Antunes, José Freire. Sá Carneiro: Um Meteoro Nos Anos Setenta. Lisbon, 1982.■. O Segredo do 25 de Novembro. Mem Martins, 1983.■ Arouca, Manuel. Os Filhos Da Costa Do Sol. Mem Martins, 1989. Audibert, Pierre, and Daniel Brignon. Portugal: Les nouveaux centurions. Paris, 1974.■ Baptista, Jacinto. Caminhos para uma revolução. Lisbon, 1975. Barreto, Antônio. Memórias da Reforma Agrária. Mem Martins: Europa-Amé-rica, 1983.■, and C. V. Preto, eds. A Situação Social em Portugal, 1960-1996. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 1996.■ Bermeo, Nancy Gina. "Worker Management in Industry: Reconciling Representative Government and Industrial Democracy in a Polarized Society." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 181-98. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■. The Revolution within the Revolution: Workers' Control in Rural Portugal. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.■ Braeckman, Colette. Portugal: Revolution surveilée. Brussels: Rossei, 1975.■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. "O Presidente da República na génese e evolução do sistema de governor portugües." Análise social XXIX, 125-26 (1994): 237-65.■, coord. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer 2000): 1-404. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Popular Support for Democracy in Post-revolutionary Portugal: Results from a Survey." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 21-42. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■. Politics and Nationhood: Post-Revolutionary Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1984.■. "Portugal Fifteen Years after the April Revolution." Field Staff Reports ( 1989-90/ No. 1, Europe), 3-11. Indianapolis, Ind.: Universities Field Staff International, 1990.■, and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.■ Carvalho, Ortelo Saraiva de. Cinco Meses Mudaram Portugal. Lisbon, 1975.■. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.■ Cid, Augusto. PREC-Processo Revolucionário Eventualmente Chocante. Viseu, 1977.■ Costa Lobo, Marina, and Pedro C. Magalhaes. "From 'Third Wave' to 'Third Way': Europe and the Portuguese Socialists (1975-1999)," Journal of Southern Europe and the Balkans 3, no. 1 (2001), 25-35.■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, ed. Modern Portugal. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.■, and Nuno Severiano Teixeira, eds. Southern Europe and the Making of the European Union. New York: Columbia Univ. Press, 2002.■ Cunhal, Alvaro. A Revolução Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999.■ Downs, Charles. "Comissões de Moradores and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." International Journal of Urban and Regional Research 4 (1986): 267-94.■. Revolution at the Grassroots: Community Organizations in the Portuguese Revolution. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989.■ Dufour, Jean-Marc. Prague sur Tage. Paris, 1975.■ Durão Barroso, José. Le systémepolitiqueportugais face à l'intégration euro-péenne. Lisbon, 1983.■ Eisfeid, Rainer. "Portugal: What Role/What Future?" In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution. New York: RIIC, Columbia University, 1984.■. Sozialistischer Pluralismus in Europa: Ansãtze und Scheitern am Beispiel Portugal. Cologne: Verlag Wissenchaft ünd Politik, 1985.■. "Portugal and Western Europe." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 29-62. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■ Farinha, Luis. "Regresso a Europa. Uma opcao feliz." Historia. XXIX; 95, III series (March 2007), 23-33.■ Faye, Jean-Pierre, ed. Portugal: The Revolution in the Labyrinth. Nottingham, U.K.: Spokesman, 1976. Ferreira, Hugo Gil, and Michael W. Marshall. Portugal's Revolution: Ten Years On. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986. Figueira, João Costa. Cavaco Silva: Homem de Estado. Lisbon, 1987. Filoche, Gérard. Printemps Portugais. Paris: Editions Action, 1984. Frémontier, Jacques. Os Pontos nos ii. Lisbon, 1976. Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian. 25 de Abril-10 anos depois. Lisbon, 1984. Futscher Pereira, Bernardo. "Portugal and Spain." In K. Maxwell, ed. Portugal in the 1980s, 63-87. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■ Gama, Jaime. Política Externa Portuguesa 1983-85: Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros. Lisbon, 1986.■. "Preface." In J. Calvet de Magalhães, A. de Vasconcelos, and J. Ramos Silva, eds., Portugal: An Atlantic Paradox, 9-11. Lisbon, 1990. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino. As Eleições De 25 De Abril: Geografia E Imagem Dos Partidos. Lisbon, 1976.■. "10 Anos de Democracia: Reflexos na geografia política." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opelio, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal 1974-1984/ Conflitos e Mudanças em Portugal, 1974-1984, 135-55. Lisbon, 1985.■, et al. As Eleições para assembleia da república, 1979-1983: Estudos de geografia eleitoral. Lisbon, 1984. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino, eds. Portugal em mapas e em números. Lisbon, 1981.■ Giaccone, Fausto. Una Storia Portoghese/ Uma História Portuguesa. Palermo: Randazzo Focus, 1987.■ Gladdish, Ken. "Portugal: An Open Verdict." In Geoffrey Pridham, ed. Securing Democracy: Political Parties and Democratic Consolidation in Southern Europe, 104-25. London and New York: Routledge, 1990.■ Graham, Lawrence S. The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■ Grayson, George W. "Portugal and the Armed Forces Movement." Orbis XIX, 2 (Summer 1975): 335-78.■ Green, Gil. Portugal's Revolution. New York: International, 1976.■ Hammond, John L. Building Popular Power: Workers' and Neighborhood Movements in the Portuguese Revolution. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1988.■ Harsgor, Michael. Naissance d'un Nouveau Portugal. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1975.■. Portugal in Revolution. Washington, D.C.: CSIS and Sage, 1976.■ Harvey, Robert. Portugal, Birth of a Democracy. London: Macmillan, 1978.■ Herr, Richard, ed. Portugal: The Long Road to Democracy and Europe. Berkeley, Calif.: International and Area Studies, 1992.■ Insight Team of the Sunday [London] Times. Insight on Portugal: The Year of the Captains. London: Deutsch, 1975.■ Janitschek, Hans. Mario Soares: Portrait of a Hero. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1985.■ Keefe, Eugene K., et al. Area Handbook for Portugal, 1st ed. Washington, D.C.: Foreign Area Studies of American University, 1977. Kramer, Jane. "A Reporter at Large: The Portuguese Revolution." The New Yorker (Dec. 15, 1975): 92-131.■ Lauré, Jason, and Ettagal Lauré. Jovem Portugal: After the Revolution. New York: Straus, Farrar and Giroux, 1977.■ Livermore, H. V. A New History of Portugal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976.■ Lourenço, Eduardo. Os Militares e O Poder. Lisbon, 1975.■. O Fascismo Nunca Existiu. Lisbon, 1976.■. "Identidade e Memôria: o caso português." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-l 984, 17-22. Lisbon, 1985.■ Lucena, Manuel. Evolução e Instituições: A Extinção dos Grémios da Lavoura Alentejanos. Mem Martins, 1984.■. "A herança de duas revoluções." In M. Baptista Coelho, ed., Portugal: O Sistema Político e Constitucional, 1974-87, 505-55. Lisbon, 1989.■ Macedo, Jorge Braga de, and S. Serfaty. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. New York: Praeger, 1981.■ Magone, José M. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. New York: St. Martin's, 1997. Mailer, Phil. Portugal: The Impossible Revolution. London: Solidarity, 1977. Manta, João Abel. Cartoons/ 1969-1975. Lisbon, 1975.■ Manuel, Paul C. Uncertain Outcome: The Politics of Portugal's Transition to Democracy. Lanham, Md. and London: University Press of America, 1994.■ Mateus, Rui. Contos Proibidos. Memorias de Um PS Desconhecido, 3rd ed. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1996.■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Portugal under Pressure." The New York Review of Books (May 2, 1974).■. "The Hidden Revolution in Portugal." The New York Review of Books (April 17, 1975).■. "The Thorns of the Portuguese Revolution." Foreign Affairs 54, 2 (Jan. 1976): 250-70.■. "The Communists and the Portuguese Revolution." Dissent 27, 2 (Spring 1980): 194-206.■. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.■, ed. "Portugal: Toward the Twenty-First Century." Camoes Center Quarterly 5, 3-4 (Fall 1995): 6-55.■, ed. The Press and the Rebirth of Iberian Democracy. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983.■. Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution: Reports of Three Columbia University-Gulbenkian Workshops. New York: Research Institute on International Change, Columbia University, 1984.■ Maxwell, Kenneth, and Michael H. Haltzel, eds. Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.■ Medeiros Ferreira, José. Ensaio Histórico sobre a revolução do 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1983.■ Medina, João, ed. Portugal De Abril: Do 25 Aos Nossos Dias. In Medina, ed., História Contemporãnea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1985. Merten, Peter. Anarchismus ünd Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libertare, 1981.■ Miranda, Jorge. Constituição e Democracia. Lisbon, 1976.■. A Constituição de 1976. Lisbon, 1978.■ Morrison, Rodney J. Portugal: Revolutionary Change in an Open Economy. Boston: Auburn House, 1981.■ Mujal-Leôn, Eusebio. "The PCP [Portuguese Communist Party] and the Portuguese Revolution." Problems of Communism 26 (Jan.- Feb. 1977): 21-41.■ Neves, Mário. Missão em Moscovo. Lisbon, 1986.■ Oliveira, César. M. F. A. e Revolução Socialista. Lisbon, 1975.■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.■ Opello, Waiter C., Jr. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.■. Portugal: From Monarchy to Pluralist Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1991.■ Pell, Senator Claiborne H. Portugal ( Including the Azores and Spain) in Search of New Directions: Report to the Committee on Foreign Relations, U.S. Senate. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1976.■ Pereira, J. Pacheco. "A Case of Orthodoxy: The Communist Party of Portugal." In Waller and Fenema, eds., Communist Parties in Western Europe: Adaptation or Decline? Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988.■ Pilmott, Ben. "Socialism in Portugal: Was It a Revolution?" Government and Opposition 7 (Summer 1977).■. "Were the Soldiers Revolutionary? The Armed Forces Movement in Portugal, 1973-1976." Iberian Studies 7, 1 (1978): 13-21.■, and Jean Seaton. "Political Power and the Portuguese Media." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 43-57. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm and Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1977.■ Pouchin, Dominique. Portugal, quelle révolution? Paris, 1976.■ Pulido Valente, Vasco. "E Viva Otelo." In Pulido Valente, V., ed., O País das Maravilhas, 451-54. Lisbon, 1979 [anthology of articles from weekly Lisbon paper, Expresso].■. Estudos Sobre a Crise Nacional. Lisbon, 1980.■ Rebelo de Sousa, Marcelo. O Sistema de Governo Português antes e depois da Revisão Constitucional, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1981. Rêgo, Raúl. Militares, Clérigos e Paisanos. Lisbon, 1981. Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.■ Rodrigues, Avelino, Cesário Borga, and Mário Cardoso. O Movemento dos Capitães e o 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1974.■. Portugal Depois De Abril. Lisbon, 1976.■ Ruas, H. B., ed. A Revolução das Flores. Lisbon, 1975.■ Rudel, Christian. La Liberte couleur d'oeillet. Paris: Fayard, 1980.■ Sa, Tiago Moreira de. Os Americanos na Revolucao Portuguesa ( 1974-1976). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Por Uma Social-Democracia Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.■ Sanches Osôrio, Helena. Um Só Rosto. Uma Só Fé. Conversas Com Adelino Da Palma Carlos. Lisbon, 1988. Sanches Osôrio, J. The Betrayal of the 25th of April in Portugal. Madrid: Sedmay, 1975.■ Schmitter, Philippe C. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (1974): 5-33.■. "An Introduction to Southern European Transitions from Authoritarian Rule: Italy, Greece, Portugal, Spain and Turkey." In G. O'Donnell,■ P. C. Schmitter, and L. Whitehead, eds., Transitions from Authoritarian Rule, 3-10. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986.■ Silva, Fernando Dioga da. "Uma Administração Envelhecido." Revista da Ad-ministraçao Pública 2 (Oct.-Dec. 1979).■ Simões, Martinho, ed. Relatório Do 25 De Novembro: Texto Integral, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.■ Soares, Isabel, ed. Mário Soares: O homem e o político. Lisbon, 1976. Soares, Mário. Democratização e Descolonização: Dez meses no Governo Provisório. Lisbon, 1975. Sobel, Lester A., ed. Portuguese Revolution, 1974-1976. New York: Facts on File, Inc., 1976.■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974.■. País Sem Rumo: Contributo para a História de uma Revolução. Lisbon, 1978.■ Story, Jonathan. "Portugal's Revolution of Carnations: Patterns of Change and Continuity." International Affairs 52 (July 1976): 417-34. Sweezey, Paul. "Class Struggles in Portugal." Monthly Review 27, 4 (Sept. 1975): 1-26.■ Szulc, Tad. "Lisbon and Washington: Behind Portugal's Revolution." Foreign Policy 21 (Winter 1975-76): 3-62. Tavares de Almeida, Antônio. Balsemão: O retrato. Lisbon, 1981. "Vasco." Desenhos Políticos. Lisbon, 1974.■ Vasconcelos, Alvaro. "Portugal in Atlantic-Mediterranean Security." In Douglas T. Stuart, ed., Politics and Security in the Southern Region of the Atlantic Alliance, 117-36. London: Macmillan, 1988.■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "Golpes militares e golpes literários. A literatura do golpe de 25 de Abril de 1974 em contexto histôrico." Penélope. Fazer E Desfazer A História, 19-20 (1998): 191-212.■. "Tributo ao Historiador dos Historiadores. Memorias de A.H.de Oliveira Marques (1933-2007)," Historia XXIX, 95, III series (March 2007), 18-22.■ Wiarda, Howard J. Transcending Corporatism? The Portuguese Corporative System and the Revolution of 1974. Columbia: Institute of International Studies, University of South Carolina, 1976.■. The Transition to Democracy in Spain and Portugal. Washington, D.C.: American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy Research, 1989. Wise, Audrey. Eyewitness in Revolutionary Portugal. With a Preface by Judith Hart, MP. London: Spokesman, 1975.■ PHYSICAL FEATURES: GEOGRAPHY, GEOLOGY, FAUNA, AND FLORA■ Birot, Pierre. Le Portugal: Étude de géographie régionale. Paris, 1950.■ Embleton, Clifford. Geomorphology of Europe. London: Macmillan, 1984.■ Girão, Aristides de Amorim. Divisão regional, divisão agrícola e divisão administrativa. Coimbra, 1932.■. Condições geográficos e históricas de autonomia política de Portugal. Coimbra, 1935.■. Atlas de Portugal, 2nd ed. Coimbra, 1958.■ Ribeiro, Orlando. Portugal, O Mediterrâneo e o Altântico. Coimbra, 1945 and later eds.■. Portugal. Volume V of Geografia de Espana y Portugal. Barcelona, 1955.■. Ensaios de Geografia Humana e regio nal. Lisbon, 1970.■. A geografia e a divisão regional do país. Lisbon, 1970.■ Stanislawski, Dan. The Individuality of Portugal. Austin: The University of Texas Press, 1959.■. Portugal's Other Kingdom: The Algarve. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1963.■ Taylor, Albert William. Wild Flowers of Spain and Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1972.■ Way, Ruth, and Margaret Simmons. A Geography of Spain and Portugal. London: Methuen, 1962.■ ARCHAEOLOGY AND PREHISTORY■ "Actas do Colóquio Inter-Universitário do Noroeste Peninsular (Porto-Baião, 1988), vol. II, Proto-História, romanização e Idade Média." In Trabalhos de antropologia e etnologia. 28, 3-4 (1988).■ Alarcão, Jorge de, ed. "Do Paleolítico va arte visigótica." Vol. 1, História da■ Arte em Portugal. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.■. Roman Portugal, 3 vols. Warminister, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.■. Portugal Das Orígens A Romanização. Vol. I. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon: Presença, 1990. Anderson, James M., and M. S. Lea. Portugal 1001 Sights: An Archaeological and Historical Guide. Calgary, Alberta: University of Calgary and Robert Hale, 1994.■ Balmuth, Miriam S., Antonio Gilman, and Lourdes Prados-Torreira, eds. Encounters and Transformations: The Archaeology of Iberia in Transition. Monographs in Mediterranean Archaeology, no. 7. Sheffield, U.K.: Sheffield Academic Press, 1997.■ Beirão, C. M. M. Une civilization protohistorique du Sud au Portugal ( 1er Age du Fer). Paris: D. Boccard, 1986.■ Cardoso, João Luís, Santinho A. Cunha, and Delberto Aguiar. O Homem Pre-Histórico no Concelho de Oeiras. Oeiras, Portugal: Estudos Arquelógicos de Oeiras, 1991.■ Harrison, Richard J. The Bell Beaker Cultures of Spain and Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1977.■ Mangas, Júlio, ed. Hispania epigraphica. Madrid, 1989.■ Maloney, Stephanie J. "The Villa of Toerre de Palma, Portugal: Archaeology and Preservation." Portuguese Studies Review VIII, 1 (Fall-Winter, 1999-2000): 14-28.■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. London, 1968.■ Silva, A. C. F. A cultura castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Paços de Ferreira:■ Museu da Citânia de Sanfins, 1986. Straus, L. G. Iberia before the Iberians. Albuquerque, N.M., 1992.■ FOREIGN TRAVELERS AND RESIDENTS' ACCOUNTS■ Andersen, Hans Christian. A Visit to Portugal 1866. London: Peter Owen, 1972.■ Beckford, William. Italy, with Sketches of Spain and Portugal. Paris: Baudry's European Library, 1834.■ Boyd Alexander, ed. London: Hart-Davies, 1954.■. Recollections of an Excursion to the Monasteries of Alcoboca and Batalha. Fontwell, U.K.: Centaur Press, 1972.■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. In Portugal. London: Bodley Head, 1912.■ Borrow, George. The Bible in Spain, 2 vols. London: Constable, 1923 ed.■ Chaves, Castelo Branco. Os livros de viagens em Portugal no século XVIII e a sua projecção europeia. Lisbon, 1977.■ Costigan, Arthur William. Sketches of Society and Manners in Portugal. London: T. Vernon, 1787.■ Crawfurd, Oswald. Portugal Old and New. London: Kegan, Paul, 1880.■. Round the Calendar in Portugal. London: Chapman & Hall, 1890.■ Darymple, William. Travels through Spain and Portugal in 1774. London: J. Almon, 1777.■ Dumouriez, Charles Francois Duperrier. An Account of Portugal as It Appeared in 1766. London: C. Law, 1797.■ Fielding, Henry. Jonathan Wild and the Journal of a Voyage to Lisbon. London: J. M. Dent, 1932.■ Fullerton, Alice. To Portugal for Pleasure. London: Grafton, 1945.■ Gibbons, John. I Gathered No Moss. London: Robert Hale, 1939.■ Gordon, Jan, and Cora Gordon. Portuguese Somersault. London: Harrap, 1934.■ Hewitt, Richard. A Cottage in Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996.■ Huggett, Frank. South of Lisbon: Winter Travels in Southern Portugal. London: Gollancz, 1960.■ Hume, Martin. Through Portugal. London: Richards, 1907.■ Hyland, Paul. Backwards Out of the Big World: A Voyage into Portugal. Hammersmith, U.K.: HarperCollins, 1996.■ Jackson, Catherine Charlotte, Lady. Fair Lusitania. London: Bentley, 1874.■ Kelly, Marie Node. This Delicious Land Portugal. London: Hutchinson, 1956.■ Kempner, Mary Jean. Invitation to Portugal. New York: Athenaeum, 1969.■ Kingston, William H. G. Lusitanian Sketches of the Pen and Pencil. 2 vol. London: Parker, 1845.■ Landmann, George. Historical, Military and Picturesque Observations on Portugal. 2 vol. London: Cadell and Davies, 1818.■ Latouche, John [Pseudonym of Oswald Crawfurd]. Travels in Portugal. London: Ward, Lock & Taylor, ca. 1874.■ Link, Henry Frederick. Travels in Portugal and France and Spain. London: Longman & Rees, 1801.■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.■. They Went to Portugal, Too. Manchester: Carcanet Books, 1990.■ Merle, Iris. Portuguese Panorama. London: Ouzel, 1958.■ Murphy, J. C. Travels in Portugal. London: 1795.■ Proper, Datus C. The Last Old Place: A Search through Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992.■ Quillinan, Dorothy [Wordsworth]. Journal of a Few Months in Portugal with Glimpses of the South of Spain. 2 vol. London: Moxon, 1847. Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1954. Smith, Karine R. Until Tomorrow: Azores and Portugal. Snohomish, Wash.: Snohomish Publishing, 1978. Southey, Robert. Journals of a Residence in Portugal, 1800-1801 and a Visit to France, 1838. London and New York: Oxford Univ. Press, 1912. Thomas, Gordon Kent. Lord Byron's Iberian Pilgrimage. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983. Twiss, Richard. Travels through Portugal and Spain in 1772-1773. London, 1775.■ Watson, Gilbert. Sunshine and Sentiment in Portugal. London: Arnold, 1904. Wheeler, Douglas L. "A[n American] Fulbrighter in Lisbon, Portugal, 196162." Portuguese Studies Review 1 (1991): 9-16.■ PORTUGUESE CARTOGRAPHY, DISCOVERIES, AND NAVIGATION■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Curso de História de Naútica. Coimbra, 1972.■. Introdução a história dos descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Mem Martins, 1983.■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon: Alfa, 1983.■. Portuguese Books on Nautical Science from Pedro Nunes to 1650. Lisbon, 1984.■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1985.■ Boorstin, Daniel. The Discoverers. New York: Random House, 1983. Boxer, C. R. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire, 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.■ Brazão, Eduardo. La découverte de Terre-Neuve. Montreal: Les Presses de l'Université, 1964.■. "Les Corte-Real et le Nouveau Monde." Revue d'histoire d'Amérique Française 19, 1 (1965): 335-49. Cortesão, Armando, and Avelino Teixeira de Mota. Cartografia Portuguesa Antiga. Lisbon, 1960.■. Portugalia Monumenta Cartográfica, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.■. História da Cartografia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1969-70.■ Cortesão, Jaime. L'expansion des portugais dans l'historie de la civilisation. Brussels, 1930.■. Os descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. V. Magalhães Godinho and Joel Serrão, eds. Lisbon, 1960.■. A expansão dos Portugueses no período henriquinho. Lisbon, 1965.■. Descobrimentos precolombanos dos portugueses. Lisbon, 1966.■ Costa, Abel Fontoura da. A Marinharia dos Descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1960.■ Costa Brochado, Idalino F. Descobrimento do Atlântico. Lisbon, 1958. English ed., 1959-60.■ Coutinho, Admiral Gago. A naútica dos descobrimentos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1951-52.■ Crone, G. R. Maps and Their Makers. New York: Capricorn Books, 1966.■ Dias, José S. da Silva. Os descobrimentos e a problemática cultural do Século XVI, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1982.■ Disney, Anthony, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães, ed. Documentos sobre a expansão portuguesa [ to 1460], 3 vols. Lisbon, 1945-54.■ Guedes, Max, and Gerald Lombardi, eds. Portugal. Brazil: The Age of Atlantic Discoveries. Lisbon: Bertrand; Milan: Ricci; Brazilian Culture Foundation, 1990. [Catalogue of New York Public Library Exhibit, Summer 1990]■ Harley, J. B., and David Woodward. The History of Cartography. Volume 1: Cartography in Prehistoric, Ancient and Medieval Europe and Mediterranean. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.■ Leite, Duarte. História dos Descobrimentos: Colectânea de esparsos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1958-61.■ Ley, Charles. Portuguese Voyages, 1498-1663. London: Dent, 1953.■ Marques, J. Martins da Silva. Descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1944-71.■ Martyn, John R. C., ed. Pedro Nunes ( 1502-1578): His Lost Algebra and Other Discoveries. John R. C. Martyn, trans. New York: Peter Lang, 1996.■ Morison, Samuel Eliot. The European Discovery of America: The Northern Voyages, A. D. 500-1600. New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.■. Portuguese Voyages to America in the Fifteenth Century. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1974.■ Mota, Avelino Teixeira da. Mar, Além-Mar-Estudos e Ensaios de História e Geografia. Lisbon, 1972.■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Vida e Obra do Infante D. Henrique. Lisbon, 1959.■ Parry, J. H. The Discovery of the Sea. New York: Dial, 1974.■ Penrose, Boies. Travel and Discovery in the Renaissance, 1420-1620. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1952.■ Peres, Damião. História dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. Oporto, 1943.■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London, 1933; New York: Barnes & Noble, 1967.■ Rogers, Francis M. Precision Astrolabe: Portuguese Navigators and Transoceanic Aviation. Lisbon, 1971.■ Seary, E. R. "The Portuguese Element in the Place Names of Newfoundland." In Luís Albuquerque, ed., Vice-Almirante A. Teixeira da Mota: In Memo-riam. Vol. II, 359-64. Lisbon: Academia da Marinha, 1989.■ Subrahmanyam, Sanjay. The Career and Legend of Vasco Da Gama. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.■ Velho, Alvaro. Roteiro ( Navigator's Route) da Primeira Viagem de Vasco da Gama ( 1497-1499). Lisbon, 1960.■ Winius, George, ed. Portugal, the Pathfinder: Journeys from the Medieval toward the Modern World 1300-ca. 1600. Madison, Wisc.: Hispanic Seminary of Medieval Studies, 1995.■ PORTUGAL AND HER OVERSEAS EMPIRES (1415-1975)■ Abshire, David M., and Michael A. Samuels, eds. Portuguese Africa: A Handbook. New York: Praeger, 1969.■ Afonso, Aniceto, and Carlos de Matos Gomes. Guerra Colonial. Lisbon: Noticias, 2001.■ Albuquerque, J. Moushino de. Moçambique. Lisbon, 1898.■ Alden, Dauril. The Making of an Enterprise: The Society of Jesus in Portugal, Its Empire & Beyond. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1995.■ Alexandre, Valentim. Orígens do Colonialismo Português Moderno ( 18221891). Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1979.■, and Jill Dias, eds. "O Império Africano 1825-1890. Volume X." In J.■ Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1998.■ Ames, Glen J. "The Carreira da India, 1668-1682: Maritime Enterprise and the Quest for Stability in Portugal's Asian Empire." Journal of European Economic History 20, 1 (1991): 7-28.■. Renascent Empire? The House of Braganza and the Quest for Stability in Portuguese Monsoon Asia, ca. 1640-1683. Amsterdam: Amsterdam Univ.Press, 2000.■. Vasco da Gama. Renaissance Crusader. New York: Pearson/Longman, 2005.■ Antunes, José Freire. O Império com Pés de Barro: Colonizaçao e Descolonização: As Ideologias em Portugal. Lisbon: D. Quixote, 1980.■. O Factor Africano 1890-1990. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1990.■. A Guerra De Africa 1961-1974, 2 vols. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995-96.■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto 1919-1982. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.■ Axelson, Eric A. South-East Africa, 1488-1530. London: Longmans, 1940.■. "Prince Henry and the Discovery of the Sea Route to India." Geographical Journal (U.K.) 127, 2 (June 1961): 145-58.■. Portugal and the Scramble for Africa, 1875-1891. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1967.■. Portuguese in South-East Africa, 1488-1699. Cape Town: Struik, 1973.■. Congo to Cape: Early Portuguese Explorers. New York: Harper & Row, 1974.■ Azevedo, Mário. Historical Dictionary of Mozambique, 2nd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2003.■ Baião, António, Hernãni Cidade, and Manuel Murias, eds. História da Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 4 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40.■ Bender, Gerald J. "The Limits of Counterinsurgency [in the Angolan War, 1961-72]." Comparative Politics (1972): 331-60.■. Angola under the Portuguese: The Myth Versus Reality. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.■ Bhíla, H. H. K. Trade and Politics in a Shona Kingdom: The Manyika and Their Portuguese and African Neighbours, 1875-1902. Harlow, U.K.: Longman, 1990.■ Birmingham, David. The Portuguese Conquest of Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965.■. Trade and Conflict in Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1966.■. Frontline Nationalism in Angola & Mozambique. London: James Currey, 1992.■. Portugal and Africa. New York: St. Martins, 1999.■ Bottineau, Yves. Le Portugal Et Sa Vocation Maritime. Paris: Boccard, 1977. Boxer, C. R. Fidalgos in the Far East— Fact and Fancy in the History of Macau. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1948. ———. The Christian Century in Japan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1951.■ ———. Salvador de Sá and the Struggle for Brazil and Angola, 1602-1688. London, 1952.■ ———. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.■ ———. The Golden Age of Brazil, 1695-1750. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1962.■ ———. Race Relations in the Portuguese Colonial Empire, 1415-1825. Oxford:■ Clarendon Press, 1963. ———. Portuguese Society in the Tropics. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1965.■ ———. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchi nson, 1969.■ ———, and Carlos de Azevedo, eds. Fort Jesus and the Portuguese in Mombasa. London: Hollis and Carter, 1960.■ Broadhead, Susan H. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 2nd ed. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1992.■ Burton, Richard. Goa and the Blue Mountains. London: Bentley, 1851.■ Cabral, Luís. Crónica da Libertação. Lisbon, 1984.■ Caetano, Marcello. Colonizing Traditions, Principles and Methods of the Portuguese. Lisbon, 1951.■ ———. Portugal E A Internacionalização Dos Problemas Africanos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1965.■ Cann, John P. Counterinsurgency in Africa: The Portuguese Way of War, 1961-1974. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1997. Castelo, Claudia. " O modo portugues de estar no mundo." O luso-tropicalismo e a ideologia colonial portuguesa ( 1931-1961). Oporto: Afrontamento, 1998. Castro, Armando. O Sistema Colonial Português em Africa ( meados do Século XX). Lisbon, 1978.■ Chaliand, Gerard. "The Independence of Guinea-Bissau and the Heritage of [Amilcar] Cabral." In Revolution in the Third World. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1978.■ Chilcote, Ronald H. Portuguese Africa. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967.■ Clarence-Smith, Gervase. Slaves, Peasants and Capitalists in Southern Angola 1840-1926. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979.■ ———. The Third Portuguese Empire 1825-1975: A Study in Economic Imperialism. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1985.■ Coates, Timothy J. Convicts and Orphans: Forced and State-Sponsored Colonizers in the Portuguese Empire, 1550-1720. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 2001.■ Davies, Shann. Macau. Singapore: Times Editions, 1986.■ Dias, C. Malheiro, ed. História da colonização portuguesa no Brasil, 3 vols. Oporto, 1921-24.■ Diffie, Bailey W., and George Winius. Foundations of the Portuguese Empire, 1415-1580. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1977.■ Disney, Anthony R. Twilight of the Pepper Empire: Portuguese Trade in Southwest India in the Early Seventeenth Century. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1978.■ ———, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.■ Duffy, James. Shipwreck and Empire: Being an Account of Portuguese Maritime Disaster in a Century of Decline. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1955.■ ———. Portuguese Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1959. ———. Portugal in Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1962.■. "The Portuguese Territories." In Colin Legum, ed., Africa: A Handbook to the Continent. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1967. ———. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1967. Felgas, Hélio. História do Congo Português. Carmona, Angola, 1958. ———. Guerra em Angola. Lisbon, 1961.■ Galvão, Henrique, and Carlos Selvagam. O Império Ultramarino Português, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953.■ Gleijeses, Piero. Conflicting Missions: Havana, Washington and Africa, 19591976. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2002.■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. "Portugal and Her Empire." In The New Cambridge Modern History. Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1963): 509-TO.■ Grenfell, F. James. História da Igreja Baptista em Angola, 1879-1975. Queluz, Portugal: Núcleo, 1998.■ Hammond, Richard J. "Economic Imperialism: Sidelights on a Stereotype." Journal of Economic History XXI, 4 (1961): 582-98.■ ———. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.■ Hanson, Carl. Portugal and the Wider World 1147-1497. New Orleans, La.: University Press of the South, 2001.■ Harris, Marvin. Portugal's African Wards. New York: American Committee on Africa, 1957.■ ———. "Portugal's Contribution to the Underdevelopment of Africa and Brazil." In Ronald H. Chilcote, ed., Protest & Resistance in Angola & Brazil: Comparative Studies, 209-23. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972.■ Henderson, Lawrence W. Angola: Five Centuries of Conflict. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1979. ———. A Igreja Em Angola. Lisbon: Edit. Além-Mar, 1990. Heywood, Linda. Contested Power in Angola 1840s to the Present. Rochester, N.Y.: University of Rochester Press, 2000.■ Hilton, Anne. The Kingdom of Kongo. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985.■ Hower, Alfred, and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds. Empire in Transition: The Portuguese World in the Time of Camões. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1985.■ Isaacman, Allen. "The Prazos da Coroa 1752-1830: A Functional Analysis of the Political System." STUDIA (Lisbon) 26 (1969): 149-78.■. Mozambique: The Africanization of a European Institution: The Zambezi Prazos, 1750-1902. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1972.■ ———. The Tradition of Resistance in Mozambique: Anti-Colonial Activity in the Zambesi Valley 1850-1921. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976.■ James, Martin. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2004.■ Jardim, Jorge. Sanctions Double-Cross: Oil to Rhodesia. Lisbon, 1978. Johnson, Harold, and Maria Beatriz Nizza da Silva. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1500-1620. Volume VI. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992. Joliffe, Jill. East Timor: Nationalism & Colonialism. University of Queensland Press, 1978.■ Kea, Ray A. Settlements, Trade and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982.■ Kohen, Arnold. From the Place of the Dead. The Epic Struggles of Bishop Belo of East Timor. New York: St Martins, 1999.■ Livingstone, Charles, and David Livingstone. Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambezi and Its Tributaries. New York: 1866.■ Livingstone, David. Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa. London, 1857.■ Lobban, Richard, and Joshua Forrest. Historical Dictionary of the Republic of Guinea-Bissau, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1996. Lobban, Richard, and Marilyn Halter. Historical Dictionary of Cape Verde, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1993. Martino, Antonio M. Joao de Azevedo Coutinho. Marinheiro e soldado de Portugal. Lisbon: Colibri, 2002. Martins, Rocha. História das Colónias Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1933. Marvaud, Angel. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1912. Mason, Philip, ed. Angola: A Symposium; Views of a Revolt. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1961. Melo, João de, ed. Os Anos Da Guerra 1961-1975: Os Portugueses em Africa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1988. Miller, Joseph C. Way of Death: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade, 1730-1830. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1988.■ Ministry of Foreign Affairs. Portugal. Vinte Anos de Defesa do Estado Português de India. Lisbon, 1967.■. Portugal Replies in the United Nations. Lisbon, 1970.■ Mondlane, Eduardo. The Struggle for Mozambique. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1969.■ Moreira, Adriano. Política Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1956.■. Portugal's Stand in Africa. New York: University Publishers, 1962.■, and Jose Carlos Venancio. Eds. Luso-Tropicalismo. Uma Teoria Social em Questao. Lisbon: Vega, 2000.■ Múrias, Manuel, ed. História da expansão portuguesa no mundo, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1937-42.■. Short History of Portuguese Colonization. Lisbon, 1940.■ Newitt, Malyn. Portuguese Settlement on the Zambesi: Exploration, Land Tenure and Colonial Rule in East Africa. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1973.■. Portugal in Africa: The Last Hundred Years. London: Longmans, 1981.■. A History of Mozambique. London: Hurst, 1995.■. A History ofPortuguese Overseas Expansion, 1400-1668. London: Routledge, 2005.■. História De Portugal. 1933-1974: II Suplemento. Oporto, 1981.■. Salazar. Vol. V: A Resistência ( 1958-1964). Oporto, 1981.■ Nowell, Charles E. "Portugal and the Partition of Africa." Journal of Modern History XIX, 1 (1947): 1-17.■ Nunes, Antonio Lopes Pires. Angola 1961. Da Baixa do Cassange a Nambu-angongo. Lisbon: Prefacio, 2005.■ Okuma, Thomas. Angola in Ferment: The Background and Prospects of Angolan Nationalism. Boston: Beacon, 1962.■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wise.: Bruce, 1957.■ Pélissier, René. Les Guerres Grises: Resistance Et Revoltes en Angola ( 18451941). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1977.■. Naissance Du Mozambique: Tome 1, Tome 2, Resistance Et Revoltes Anticoloniales ( 1854-1981), 2 vols. Orgeval: Pélissier, 1984.■. História de Moçambique. Vol. II. Lisbon, 1988.■. Naissance de la Guinée: Portugais et Africains en Senegambie ( 1841-1936). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1989.■ Pires, Adelino Serras, and Fiona Claire Capstick. The Winds of Havoc: A Memoir of Adventure and Destruction in Deepest Africa. New York: St. Martin's, 2001.■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.■ Ranger, T. [Terence] O. "Revolt in Portuguese East Africa: The Makombe Rising of 1917." St. Anthony's Papers. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 15 (1963).■ Remy. Goa, Rome of the Orient. Trans. from the French by Lancelot Sheppard. London, 1957.■ Ribeiro, General Goncalves. A Vertigem da Descolonizacao. Da Agonia do Exodo a Cidadania Plena. Lisbon: Inquerito, 2002. Ricard, Robert. Etudes sur l'Histoire des Portugais au Maroc. Coimbra, 1955.■ Richards, J. M. Goa. London: Hurst, 1982.■ Rodney, Walter. A History of the Upper Guinea Coast, 1545-1800. New York: Oxford University Press, 1970. Rodrigues, José Honório. Africa e Brasil: Outro Horizonte. Rio de Janeiro, 1961.■ Rogers, Francis M. "Valentim Fernandes, Rodrigo de Santaella, and the Recognition of the Antilles as "Opposite India." Boletim da Sociedade de Geografia de Lisboa series 75 (July-September 1957): 279-309.■. The Obedience of a King of Portugal. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1958.■. The Quest for Eastern Christians: Travels and Rumors in the Age of Discovery. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1962.■ Russell-Wood, A. J. Fidalgos and Philanthropists: The Santa Casa da Mi-sericordia of Bahia, 1550-1755. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1968.■. "Colonial Brazil." In David W. Cohen and Jack Greene, eds., Neither Slave nor Free, 84-133. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1972.■. "Local Government in Portuguese America: A Study in Cultural Divergence." Comparative Studies in Society and History 16 (1974): 187-231.■. From Colony to Nation: Essays on the Independence of Brazil. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1975.■. World on the Move: The Portuguese in Africa, Asia & America, 1415-1808. New York: St. Martins, 1993.■ Salazar, António de Oliveira. Goa and the Indian Union. Lisbon, 1954.■. "Portugal, Goa and the Indian Union." Foreign Affairs (New York) 34, 3 (April, 1956): 418-31.■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs (London) XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.■ Saldanha, C. F. A Short History of Goa. Goa, 1957.■ Sanceau, Elaine. Indies Adventure: The Amazing Career of Afonso de Albuquerque. London: Blackie, 1936.■. Portugal in Quest of Prester John. London: Hutchinson, 1943.■. The Land of Prester John. New York: Knopf, 1944.■. Henry the Navigator. New York: Norton, 1947.■. The Perfect Prince: Dom João II. Oporto, 1959.■. Good Hope, the Voyage of Vasco da Gama. Lisbon, 1967.■. Knight of the Renaissance: A Biography of Dom João de Castro. London: Hutchinson, n.d.■ Schubert, Benedict. A Guerra e as Igrejas: Angola, 1961-1991. Basel, Switzerland: Schlettwein, 2000 [orig. ed. in German, Lucerne, Exodus Pub., 1997].■ Schwartz, Stuart G. Sovereignty and Society in Colonial Brazil. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973.■ Serra, Carlos, ed. História de Moçambique, 2 vols. Maputo, Mozambique: Tempo, 1982-83.■ Silva, Botelho da, ed. and comp. " Dossier" Goa. ( General Manuel) Vassalo e Silva. A Recusa do Sacrifício Inútil. Lisbon, 1975.■ Silva, Maria Beatriz Nizza da, ed. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1750-1822. Volume VIII. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1986.■ Silva Cunha J. M. da. Questões Ultramarinos e Internacionais. Lisbon, 1960.■ Silva Rego, A. da. História das missões do padroado português do Oriente: India ( 1500-1542). 1 vol. Lisbon, 1949.■. Portuguese Colonization in the Sixteenth Century: A Study of Royal Ordinances. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1957.■. O Ultramar Português No Século XIX ( 1834-1910). Lisbon, 1966.■ Sousa Dias, Gastão. Os Portugueses em Angola. Lisbon, 1959.■ Sykes, John. Portugal and Africa: The People and the War. London: Hutchinson, 1971.■ Telo, António José. Lourenço Marques na Política Externa Portuguesa. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1991.■. Economia E Império No Portugal Contemporânea. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.■. Os Açores e o Controlo do Atlântico. Lisbon: Asa, 1993.■ Vail, Leroy, and Landeg White. Capitalism and Colonialism in Mozambique: A Study of Quelimane District. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1980.■ Veen, Ernst van. Defeat or Decay? An Inquiry into the Portuguese Decline in Asia 1580-1645. Leiden: University of Leiden, 2000.■ Verlinden, Charles. "Italian Influence on Iberian Colonization." Hispanic American Historical Review 33 (1953): 99-211.■. The Beginnings of Modern Colonization. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1970.■ Vogel, Charles. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1860.■ Vogt, John. Portuguese Rule on the Gold Coast 1469-1682. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1979.■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola. 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, Boston University, Department of History, 1963.■. "Anti-Imperialism Traditions in Portugal, Yesterday and Today." Boston University Graduate Journal XII, 2 (Spring 1964): 125-37.■. 'The Portuguese and Mozambique: The Past against the Future." In John A. Davis and James K. Baker, eds., Southern Africa in Transition. 180-96. New York: Praeger, 1966.■. "Gungunhana." In Norman R. Bennett, ed., Leadership in Eastern Africa, Six Political Biographies, 165-220. Boston: Boston University Press, 1968.■. "Gungunyane the Negotiator." Journal of African History IX, 4 (1968): 585-602.■. "Nineteenth-Century African Protest in Angola: Prince Nicolas of Kongo (1830?-1860)." African Historical Studies (Boston) I (1968): 40-59.■. "The Portuguese Army in Angola." Journal of Modern African Studies (Cambridge U.K.), 7, 3 (Oct. 1969): 425-39.■. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.■. "Portugal in Angola: A Living Colonialism?" In C. Potholm and R. Dale, eds., Southern Africa in Perspective, 172-82. New York: Free Press, 1972.■. "The First Portuguese Colonial Movement, 1835-1875." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) I, 1 (Spring 1975): 25-27.■. "Rebels and Rebellions in Angola, 1672-1892." In Mark Karp, ed., African Dimensions: Essays in Honor of William O. Brown, 81-93. Boston: Boston University Press, 1975.■. "African Elements in Portugal's Armies in Africa (1961-1974)." Armed Forces and Society (Chicago) 2, 2 (Feb. 1976): 233-50.■. "Portuguese Colonial Governors in Africa, 1870-1974." In L. H. Gann and Peter Duignan, eds., African Proconsuls: European Governors in Africa, 415-26. New York: Free Press, 1978; and "J. Mousinho de Albuquerque (1855-1902)" and "J. Norton de Matos (1867-1955)": 427-44; 445-63.■. "The Portuguese Withdrawal from Africa, 1974-1975; The Angolan Case." In John Seiler, ed., Southern Africa Since the Portuguese Coup, 3-21. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1980.■. "The Portuguese Exploration Expeditions and Expansion in Angola, 1877-1883." In Academia de Marinha and Instituto de Investigação Científica Tropical, eds., Vice Almirante A. Teixeira Da Mota: In Memoriam. Volume I, 267-76. Lisbon, 1987.■. "'Aqui é Portugal!': The Politics of the Colonial Idea during the Estado Novo, 1926-1974." In Pavilhão de Portugal, EXPO'98 and Instituto de História Contemporânea, eds., Portugal No Transição Do Milênio: Colóquio Internacional, 375-105. Lisbon: Fim de Século, 1998.■. The Empire Time Forgot: Writing a History of the Portuguese Overseas Empire, 1808-1975. Oporto: Universidade Fernando Pessoa, 1998.■. "Filho Do Porto, Filho Do Império: Antônio Francisco Da Silva Porto (1817-1890) and the Politics of Motivation in Portugal's First and Second Scrambles for Africa (1836-1861; 1875-1891)." Revista da UFP [Universidade Fernando Pessoa] 4 (Dec. 1999): 225-54.■. "'Mais leis do que mosquitos': A Primeira República Portuguesa e o Império Ultramarino (1910-1926)." In Nuno Severiano Teixeira and Antó-nio Costa Pinto, eds., A Primeira República Portuguesa Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo, 133-68. Lisbon: University Nova de Lisboa, 2000.■. "Spiritual Peoples at Odds: Portugal, India and the Goa Question, 1947-61." In Anthony Disney and Emily Booth, eds., Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia, 452-70. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.■. "Portugal, Africa and the future." In Stewart Lloyd-Jones and Antonio Costa Pinto, eds., The Last Empire: Thirty Years of Portuguese Decolonization, 113-25. Bristol, U.K.: Intellect, 2003.■. "The Forced Labor 'System' in Angola, 1903-1947: Reassessing Origins and Persistence in the Context of Colonial Consolidation, Economic Growth and Reform Failures." In CEAUP, Centro de Estudos Africanos da Universidade do Porto, ed., Trabalho forcado africano-experiencias coloniais comparadas, 367-393. Oporto: CEAUP, 2006.■. "As Raizes Do Nacionalismo Angolano: Publicacoes De Protesto Dos Assimilados, 1870-1940." In Nuno Vidal and Justino Pinto De Andrade, eds., O Processo De Transicao Para O Multipartidarismo Em Angola, 73-92. Lisbon: Ed. Firmamento, 2006.■, and René Pélissier. Angola. London: Pall Mall and New York: Praeger, 1971; reprinted, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977; Portuguese lang. edition, Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2009. Whiteway, R. W. The Rise of the Portuguese Power in India, 1497-1550. London: Constable, 1899.■ Winius, George D. The Fatal History of Portuguese Ceylon: Transition to Dutch Rule. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1971.■. "The Portuguese Asian 'Decadência' Revisited." In Alfred Hower and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds., Empire in Transition, 106-17. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1980.■. The Black Legend of Portuguese India. New Delhi: New Concept, 1985.■ Alves, Marcial. Os Portugueses no Mundo. Lisbon, 1983.■ Anderson, Grace M., and David Higgs, eds. A Future to Inherit: Portuguese Communities in Canada. Toronto: McClelland and Stewart, 1976. Arroteia, Jorge Carvalho. A emigração Portuguesa-suas origens e distribuição. Lisbon, 1983.■ Brettell, Caroline B. "Nineteenth- and Twentieth-Century Portuguese Emigration: A Bibliography." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 3 (Fall-Winter, 1977-78).■. "Emigrar Para Voltar: A Portuguese Ideology of Return Migration." Papers in Anthropology 20 (1979): 1-20.■. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1982.■. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.■ Carvalho, Eduardo de. Os portugueses na Nova Inglaterra. Rio de Janeiro, 1931.■ Caspari, Andrea. "The Return Orientation among Portuguese Migrants in France." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 193-203. Lisbon, 1985.■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone, ed. Portugueses na América do Norte. Baden: Peregrinação, 1983.■ Fagundes, Francisco Cota. Hard Knocks: An Azorean-American Odyssey.■ [Memoir]. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000. Felix, John Henry, and Peter F. Senecal. The Portuguese in Hawaii. Honolulu, Hawaii: Authors' edition, 1978. Fernandes, Ferreira. Os Primos da América. Lisbon: Relógio D'Agua, 1991. Ferreira, Eduardo de Sousa. As orígens e formas de emigração. Lisbon, 1976. Freitas, J. F. Portuguese-American Memories. Honolulu, Hawaii, 1930.■ Giles, Wenona. "Motherhood and Wage Labour in London, England: Portuguese Migrant Women and the Politics of Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. University of Toronto, 1987.■ Higgs, David, ed. Portuguese Migration in Global Perspective. Ontario: Multicultural Historical Society of Ontario, 1990.■ Klimt, Andrea. "Portuguese Migrants in Germany: Class, Ethnicity and Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Stanford University, 1987.■ Lavigne, Gules. Les ethniques et la ville: L'aventure des immigrants portugais à Montreal. Montreal: Preamble, 1987.■ Leder, Hans Howard. Cultural Persistence in a Portuguese-American Community. New York: Arno Press, 1980.■ Lewis, J. R., and A. M. Williams. "Emigrants and Retornados: A Comparative Analysis of the Economic Impact of Return Migration in the Região Centro." In E. D. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 227-50. Lisbon, 1985.■ McCabe, Marsha L., and Joseph D. Thomas, eds. Portuguese Spinner: An American Story; Stories of History, Culture and Life from Portuguese Americans in Southeastern New England. New Bedford, Mass.: Spinner, 1998.■ Marques, D., and J. Medeiros. Portuguese Immigrants: 25 Years in Canada. Toronto: West End YMCA, 1989.■ Martins, J. Oliveira. Fomento Rural e emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1956.■ Mira, Manuel. The Forgotten Portuguese: The Melungeons and Other Groups; The Portuguese Making of America. Franklin, N.C.: Portuguese-American Historical Research Foundation, 1998.■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal." Economia e Sociedade (Lisbon) 23 (1977): 31-50.■ Nunes, Maria Luisa. A Portuguese Colonial in America: Belmira Nunes Lopes; The Autobiography of a Cape Verdean-American. Pittsburgh, Penn.: Latin American Literary Review Press, 1982.■ Oliver, Lawrence. Never Backward: The Autobiography of Lawrence Oliver; A Portuguese-American. San Diego, 1972.■ Pap, Leo. The Portuguese-Americans. Boston: Twayne, 1981.■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. A Política Portuguesa de Emigraçao, 1850 a 1930. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.■ Pereira da Rosa, Victor M., and Salvato V. Trigo. "Elementos para uma Caracterização da Família Imigrante Portuguesa na Africa do Sul." Economia e Sociologia 41 (1986): 61-71.■. Azorean Emigration: A Preliminary Overview. Oporto: Fernando Pessoa University, 1994.■. Portugueses e Moçambicanos no Apartheid: Da Ficção à Realidade. Lisbon, 1986.■ Purves, James. "Portuguese in Bermuda." Bermuda Historical Quarterly 3 (1946): 133-42.■ Ribeiro, F. G. Cassola. Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1986.■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da. "La Sociologie des Migrations au Portugal." Current Sociology 32, 2 (Summer 1984): 175-98.■. "Towards Reintegration of Emigrants." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and Guy Clausse, eds., Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal, 183-94. Saarbrücken: Breitenbach, 1985.■. "Emigração." In Dicionario Illustrado Da História De Portugal ( 1985): 205-7.■. A Emigração. Lisbon, 1986.■. "Espaços de herança cultural portuguesa-gentes, factos, políticas." Analise Social (Lisbon) XXIV (1988): 313-51.■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da, and Jorge Arroteia. Bibliografia da Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1984.■ Rogers, Francis M. Americans of Portuguese Descent: A Lesson in Differentiation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1974.■. Testemunhos sobre a Emigração Portuguesa: Antologia. Lisbon, 1976.■ Silva, F. Emídio da. A Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1917.■ Silva, Manuela, et al. Retorno, Emigração e Desenvolvimento Regional em Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.■ Simões, Mário Pinto. O Emigrante Português: Processos de Adaptação ( o exemplo da Suiça). Oporto, 1985.■ Simões, Nuno. O Brasil e a Emigração Portuguesa. Coimbra, 1934.■ Sousa Ferreira, Eduardo de, and Guy Clausse, eds. Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal. Saarbrucken: Verlag Breitenbach, 1986.■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Sea to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.■ Vicente, António Luís. Os Portuguese Nos Estados Unidos Da América: Política De Comunidades E Comunidade Política. Lisbon: FLAD, 1998.■ Viera, David, et al. Portuguese in the United States: A Bibliography ( Supplement to the 1976 Leo Pap Bibliography). Essay Number 6 in Essays in Portuguese Studies. Durham, N.H.: International Conference Group on Portugal, 1989.■ Williams, Jerry. And Yet They Come: Portuguese Immigration from the Azores to the United States. New York: Center for Migration Studies, 1982.■ Portugal's Atlantic Islands (Azores, Madeiras)■ Biddle, Anthony J. Drexel. The Madeira Islands, 2 vols. London: Hurst and Blackett, 1900.■ Bryans, Robin. Madeira, Pearl of the Atlantic. London: Robert Hale, 1959.■. The Azores. London: Faber & Faber, 1963.■ Cooke, Rupert Croft. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.■ Cossart, Noel. Madeira— the Island Vineyard. London: Christie's, 1984.■ Da Silva, Fernando Augusto, and Carlos Azevedo de Menezes. Elucidário Madeirense, 3 vols. Funchal, 1940.■ Duncan, T. Bentley. Atlantic Islands in the Seventeenth Century: Madeira, the Azores and the Cape Verdes in Seventeenth-Century Commerce andNavigation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1972.■ Guill, James H. A History of the Azores Islands. Menlo Park, Calif.: Author's Edition, 1972.■ Instituto Histórico Da Ilha Terceira [Azores]. Os Açores E O Atlântico ( Séculos XIV-XVII) [Proceedings of International Colloquium, August 1983]. Angra do Heroismo, Terceira Island, Azores, 1984.■ Koebel, William Henry. Madeira Old and New. London: Griffiths, 1909.■ Mee, Jules. Histoire de la découverte des Iles Açores. Ghent, 1901.■ Peres, Damião. A Madeira sob os donatórios-Séculos XV e XVI. Funchal, 1914.■ Rogers, Francis M. Atlantic Islanders of the Azores and Madeiras. North Quincy, Mass.: Christopher House, 1979.■ Serpa, Caetano Valadão. A Gente Dos Açores. Identificaçao-Emigraçio E Religiosidade: Séculos XVI-XX. Lisbon: 1978.■ Silva, J. Donald. "With Columbus in Madeira." Portuguese Studies Review (Durham, NH) I, 1 (Spring-Summer 1991).■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Azores and the United States (1787-1987): Two Hundred Years of Shared History." Boletim do Instituto Histórico da Ilha Terceira XLV (1988): 55-71.■ Almada, José de. A Aliança Inglesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1947.■. Para a história da aliança luso-britânica. Lisbon, 1955.■ Atkinson, William C. British Contributions to Portuguese and Brazilian Studies. London: British Council, 1974.■ Bourne, Kenneth. The Foreign Policy of Victorian England 1830-1902. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1970.■ British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC). 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance. London: BBC, 1973.■ British Community Council of London. Souvenir Brochure Commemorating the 600th Anniversary of the Anglo-Portuguese Treaty of Alliance and Friendship, 1373-1973. Lisbon, 1973.■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. Portugal na Alvorada do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.■ Caetano, Marcello "Aliança Inglesa." Enciclopédia Luso-Brasileira da Cultura. Vol. 1 (1963): 1270-1271.■. "L'alliance Anglo-Portuguese: Histoire et situation actuelle." Chronique de politique etrangére (Paris) XX, 6 (1967): 695-708.■. Portugal e a Internacionalização dos Problemas Africanos. Lisbon, 1971.■ Castro, Armando. A dominação inglesa em Portugal. Estudo seguido de Antologia Textos dos Sécs. XVIII e XIX. Oporto: Afrontamento, 1972.■. "Portugal." In O. De Raeymaeker et al. Small Powers in Alignment, 27-96. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1974.■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. Portugal e Inglaterra. Corunna, 1932.■ Davidson, Basil. "The Oldest Alliance Faces a Crisis." In Philip Masonm, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 138-60. London: Oxford University Press, 1962.■ Duff, Katherine. "The War and the Neutrals." In Arnold and Veronica Toyn-bee, eds., Survey of International Affairs. London: Chatham House, 1956.■ Duffy, James. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1967.■ Epstein, John. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1373-1973." World Survey (London) 54 (June 1973): p. 18.■ Ferreira, José Medeiros. Estudos de Estratégia e Relações Internacionais. Lisbon, 1981.■ Ferreira Martins, General L. O Poder Militar Da Gran-Bretanha E A Aliança Anglo-Lusa. Coimbra, 1939.■. A Cooperaçio Anglo-Portuguesa na Grande Guerra de 1914-18. Lisbon, 1942.■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal 1691-1700. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.■. Portugal 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.■ Freitas, A. Barjona de. A Questão Ingleza. Lisbon, 1891.■ Gonçalves, Caetano. A Aliança Luso-Britânica e o Domínio Colonial Português. Lisbon, 1917.■ Guedes, Armando Marques. A Aliança Inglesa: Notas de História diplomática, 1383-1943. Lisbon, 1943. Halpern Pereira, Miriam. Revoluçio, finanças, dependência externa. Lisbon, 1979.■ Howorth, A. H. D'Araujo Scott. A Aliança Luso-Britânica E A Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 1956.■ Kay, Hugh. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.■ Lawrence, L. Nehru Seizes Goa. New York: Pageant, 1963.■ Livermore, H. V. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance: Historical Perspective." 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 7-15. Lisbon: BBC, 1973.■ Macedo, Jorge Borges de. História Diplomática Portuguesa-Constantes e Linhas de Força. Lisbon, 1987.■ Manoel, J. de Câmara. Portugal e Inglatterra. Lisbon, 1909.■ Martinez, Pedro S. História Diplomática de Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.■ Medlicott, W. N. The Economic Blockade, Vol. II. London: His Majesty's Stationery Office, 1952.■ Oliveira, Pedro Aires. Os Despojos Da Alianca. A Gra-Bretanha e a questao colonial portuguesa 1945-1975. Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2007. Ortigão, Ramalho. John Bull. Lisbon, 1887.■ Prestage, Edgar. Diplomatic Relations of Portugal with France, England and Holland from 1646 to 1668. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1925.■. Chapters in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. London: Voss & Michael, 1935.■ Russell, Peter E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955. Sarmento, J. E. Morães. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and Coast Defense. London, 1908.■ Serrão, Joel. "O Ultimatum (January 1890)." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. IV (1971): 219-24.■ Shafaat, Ahmed Khan, ed. Anglo-Portuguese Negotiations Relating to Bombay, 1660-1667. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922.■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.■ Sousa, Carlos Hermenegildo de. A Aliança Anglo-Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1943.■ Stone, Glyn A. "The Official British Attitude to the Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1910-45." Journal of Contemporary History (London) 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 729-46.■. The Oldest Ally: Britain and the Portuguese Connection, 1936-1941. Woodbridge, U.K.: Royal Historical Society and Boydell Press, 1994. Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Ultimatum Inglês: Política Externa no Portugal do 1890. Lisbon, 1990.■ Teles, Basilio. Do Ultimatum ao 30 de Janeiro. Oporto, 1905.■ Vicente, António Pedro. "Um testemunho de 1796 sobre a Situação de Portugal face ao domínio inglês." In Arquivos do Centro Cultural Portugües, IV. Paris, 1972.■ Vieira de Castro, Luís. D. Carlos I. ( Elementos de História Diplomática), 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1941.■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain, Portugal and the First World War." European Studies Review 4, 3 (1974).■. "The Portuguese Economy and the Anglo-Portuguese Commercial Treaty of 1916." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) III, 2 (Autumn 1974): 49-54.■. As Relações Políticas Luso-Britânicas 1910-1916. Lisbon, 1975.■. "The Portuguese Republic and Britain, 1910-14." Journal of Contemporary History 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 707-27.■ Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: A Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. Viriato [Pseud]. A Aliança lnglesa. Lisbon, 1914.■ Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon and Its Closing Stages Ensuring upon the Treaty of 1810. Lisbon, 1940.■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola, 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 1963.■. "19th Century: Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and the Scramble for Africa." In BBC, 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 40-43. London: BBC, 1973.■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 34, 1, 2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27; 97-111.■ Wordsworth, William. William Wordsworth's Convention of Cintra: A Facsimile of the 1809 Tract [Introduction by Gordon Kent Thomas]. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983.■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1917.■ ANTHROPOLOGY, SOCIOLOGY, RURAL AND URBAN SOCIETY■ Almeida, Miguel Vale de. The Hegemonic Male: Masculinity in a Portuguese Town. Oxford: Berghan, 1996.■ Black, Richard. Crisis and Change in Rural Europe: Agricultural Development in the Portuguese Mountains. Aldershot, U.K.: Avebury and Ashgate, 1992.■ Brettell, Caroline B. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.■. "The Absence of Men." Natural History 96, 2 (Feb. 1987): 52-61.■. "The Portuguese." In Encyclopedia of World Cultures. New Haven, Conn.: Human Relations Area Files, 1990.■. "The Priest and His People: The Contractual Basis for Religious Practice in Rural Portugal." In Ellen Badone, ed., Religious Orthodoxy and Popular Faith in European Society, 55-75. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1990.■ Brogger, Jan. Pre-bureaucratic Europeans: A Study of a Portuguese Fishing Community. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989. Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. "Portuguese Perspectives." Sociologia Ruralis [Journal of European Rural Sociology] XXIV, 1 (1986); number devoted to rural Portugal today. Chaney, Rick. Regional Emigration and Remittances in Developing Countries: The Portuguese Experience. New York: Praeger, 1986. Cole, Sally. Women of the Praia: Work and Lives in a Portuguese Colonial Community. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1991. Cutileiro, José. A Portuguese Rural Society. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1971.■ Deschamps, Paul. Portugal: La Vie Sociale Actuelle. Paris, 1935.■. Histoire Sociale du Portugal. Paris, 1959.■ Dias, Jorge. Rio do Onor-comunitarismo agropastoral. Oporto, 1953.■. Ensaios Etnológicos. Lisbon, 1961.■. The Portuguese Contribution to Cultural Anthropology. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1964.■. Vilarinho Da Furna: Uma Aldeia Comunitária. Rev. ed. Lisbon, 1981.■ Downs, Charles. Os Moradores à Conquista da Cidade. Lisbon, 1978.■. "Community Organization, Political Change and Urban Policy: Portugal. 1974-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology. University of California, 1980.■. "Residents' Commissions and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■ Dracklé, Dorlé. Macht und Ohnmacht: Der Kampf num die Agarreform im Alentejo ( Portugal). Gottingen, Germany: Edit. Re, 1991.■ Espírito Santo, Moise. Communidade Rural ao Norte do Tejo. Lisbon, 1980.■ Feijó, Rui, H. Martins, and João de Pina Cabral, eds. Death in Portugal. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.■ Feijó, Rui Graça. "State, Nation and Regional Diversity in Portugal: An Overview." In Richard Herr and John H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity: Essays on the Nature of Identity in Portugal and Spain, 37-47. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, University of California, 1989.■ Feio, Mariano. Les Bas Alentejo et l'Algarve. Lisbon, 1949.■ Ferreira de Almeida, João. Classes sociais nos campos. Lisbon, 1986.■ Fonseca, Ramiro da. O Livro da Saúde e da Doença. Lisbon, 1979.■ Gallop, Rodney. Portugal: A Book of Folk-Ways. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1936. Reprinted, 1961.■ Hoefgen, Lynn. "The Integration of Returnees from the Colonies into Portugal's Social and Economic Life." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, University of Florida, 1985.■ Ingerson, Alice Elizabeth. "Corporatism and Class Consciousness in Northwestern Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Johns Hopkins University, 1984.■ Jenkins, Robin. The Road to Alto. London: Pluto Press, 1979.■ Lawrence, Denise. "Menstrual Politics: Women and Pigs in Rural Portugal." In T. Buckley and A. Gottlieb, eds., Blood Magic: The Anthropology of Menstruation, 117-36. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988.■. "Suburbanization of House Form and Gender Relations in a Rural Portuguese Agro-Town." Architecture and Behavior 4, 3 (1988): 197-212.■ Martins, Hermínio. "Portugal." In Margaret S. Archer and Salvador Giner, eds., Contemporary Europe: Class, Status and Power. New York: St. Martins, 1971.■ Mattoso, José. Identificação de um país. Lisbon, 1985.■ Merten, Peter. Anarchismüs und Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libera-tare Association, 1981.■ Monteiro, Paulo. Terra que ja foi terra: Análise Sociológica de nove lugares agro-pastorais da Serra da Lousã. Lisbon, 1985.■ Nataf, Daniel. "Social Cleavages and Regime Formation in Contemporary Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, UCLA, 1987.■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal: Ensaio Exploratório." Economia e Socialismo 23 (1977): 31-50.■ O'Neill, Brian Juan. "Dying and Inheriting in Rural Tras-os-Montes." Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford 14 (1983): 44-74.■. Social Inequality in a Portuguese Hamlet: Land, Late Marriage, and Inheritance, 1870-1978. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987.■ Pacheco, Helder. Tradições Populares de Portugal. Lisbon, 1985.■ Pardoe, Julia. Traits and Traditions of Portugal, 2 vols. London, 1832.■ Pereira Neto, João Baptista. "Social Evolution in Portugal since 1945." In Raymond S. Sayers, ed., Portugal and Brazil in Transition, 212-27. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1968.■ Pina-Cabral, João de. Sons of Adam, Daughters of Eve: The Peasant World-View of the Alto Minho. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.■. "Sociocultural Differentiation and Regional Identity in Portugal." In■ R. Herr and J. H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity, 3-18. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, 1989.■ Poinard, Michel. La Retour des Traveilleurs Portugais. Paris: La Documentation Francaise, 1979.■ Reed, Robert Roy. "Managing the Revolution: Revolutionary Promise and Political Reality in Rural Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Indiana University, 1988.■ Riegelhaupt, Joyce F. "In the Shadow of the City: Integration of a Portuguese Village" [São João das Lampas, nr, Cascais]. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Columbia University, 1964.■. "Saloio Women: An Analysis of Informal and Formal Political and Economic Roles of Portuguese Peasant Women." Anthropological Quarterly 40, 3 (July 1967): 109-26.■. "Festas and Padres: The Organization of Religious Action in a Portuguese Parish." American Anthropologist 75 (1973): 835-52.■. "Peasants and Politics in Salazar's Portugal: The Corporate State and Village 'Nonpolitics'" In L. S. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 167-90. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■ Rodrigues, Julieta E. S. de Almeida. "Continuity and Change in Urban Portuguese Women's Roles: Emerging New Household Structures." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology, Columbia University, 1979.■ Rowland, Robert. "Demographic Patterns and Rural Society in Portugal." So-ciologica Ruralis 26, 1 (1986): 36-47.■ Sanchis, Pierre. Arraial. La Fête d'un Peuple: Les Pélerinages Populaires au Portugal. Paris, 1976.■ Siegel, Bernard J. "Social Structure and Medical Practitioners in Rural Brazil and Portugal." Sociologia (São Paulo) 20, 4 (Oct. 1958): 463-76.■. "Conflict, Parochialism and Social Differentiation in Portuguese Society." Journal of Conflict Resolution V, 1 (March 1961): 35-12.■ Smith, T. Lynn. "The Social Relationships of Man to the Land in Portugal." Sociologia 25, 1 (Dec. 1963): 319-43.■ Sousa Santos, Boaventura. "Estado e sociedade na semiperíferia do sistema mundiale: O caso português." Análise Social 87-89 (1985): 869-902.■. "Social Crisis and the State." In Kenneth Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation, 167-95. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■ Vasconcellos, Joaquim Leite de. Ethnograia Portuguesa, 8 vols. Lisbon, 1941-82.■. Tradições Populares Portugueses. New ed. Lisbon, 1986.■ Willems, Emilio. "On Portuguese Family Structure." International Journal of Comparative Society (Dharwar, India) 3, 1 (Sept. 1962): 65-79.■ ARTS, ARCHITECTURE, URBAN PLANNING, MUSIC■ Almeida, Rodrigo Vicente de. História da Arte em Portugal: ( Segundo Estudo) Documentos lnéditos. Oporto, 1883. Almeida D'Eca, Admiral Vicente M. Castles of Portugal. Lisbon, 1925. Amaral, Francisco K. Lisboa: Uma Cidade em Transformação. Lisbon, 1969. Azevedo, Carlos de, and Chester Brummel. Churches of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1985.■ Barreira, João, ed. Arte Portuguesa: As Decorativas, 2 vols. Lisbon, n.d.■ Barretto, Mascarenhas, and George Dykes. Fado: Lyrical Origins and Poetical Motivation. Lisbon, 1977.■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. London: Scala, 1987.■ Branco, Luís de Freitas. A Música em Portugal. Lisbon, 1930.■ Brito, Manuel Carlos de. Opera in Portugal in the Eighteenth Century. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989.■ Carvalho, Pinto de. História de Fado. Lisbon, 1903 and 1982 eds.■ Castro d'Aire, Teresa. O Fado. Lisbon: Temas da Actualidade, 1996.■ Chicó, Mário Tavares. A Architectura Gótica em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.■ França, José-Augusto. A Arte em Portugal No Século XIX. Lisbon, 1966.■. Lisboa Pombalina e o Illuminismo, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1977.■. A Reconstrucão e a Arquitectura Pombalina. Lisbon, 1978.■ Gallop, Rodney. "The Fado (The Portuguese Song of Fate)." Musical Quarterly XIX (1933): 199-213.■. Eight Portuguese Folksongs. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1936.■ Gil, Júlio. The Finest Churches in Portugal. Lisbon, 1988.■. The Finest Castles in Portugal, 3rd ed. George F. W. Dykes, trans. Lisbon, 1996.■ Gonçalves, Rui Mário. Pintura e escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura, 1984.■. 100 Pintores Portugueses do século XX. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.■ Kubler, George. Portuguese Plain Architecture: Between Spices and Diamonds, 1521-1706. Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University Press, 1972.■. Studies in Ancient American and European Art: The Collected Essays of George Kubler. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1985.■, and Martin Soria. Art and Architecture in Spain and Portugal. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1959.■ Lacerda, Aarão de. História da Arte em Portugal, 2 vols. Oporto, 1942-48.■ Leão, Joaquim de Sousa. "Decorative Art: The Azulejo." In H. V. Livermore, ed. Portugal and Brazil: An Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1953.■ Lopes Graça, Fernando. A canção popular portuguesa. Lisbon, 1953.■. A música portuguesa e os sus problemas: Ensaios. Lisbon, 1959.■ Moita, Luís. O fado: canção de vencidos. Lisbon, 1936.■ Neves, José Cassiano. The Palace and Gardens of Fronteira: Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Portuguese Style. Lisbon: Quetzal and Scala, 1995. North, C.T. Guia dos castelos antigos de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: Bertrand Ed., 2002.■ Pacheco, Jose. Stuart Carvalhais. O desenho grafico e a imprensa. Lisbon: Biblioteca do Empresario, 2000. Pereira, Paulo, ed. Arte portuguesa. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995. Picchio, Luciana Stegagno. Storia del Teatro Portoghese. Rome: Edizinio deli' Ateneo, 1964.■ Queirós, José. Cerâmica Portuguesa, 2 vols. 2nd rev. ed. Lisbon, 1948.■ Santos, Luís Reis. Monuments of Portugal. Lisbon, 1940.■ Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1948-50.■. História da Arte em Portugal. Oporto, 1953.■ Sasportes, José. História da Dança em Portugal. Lisbon, 1970. Simões, J. M. dos Santos. "Azulejos in a Land of Many Colours." Connoisseur (London) CXXXVII, 551 (1956): 15-21.■. Azulejaria em Portugal no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1979.■ Smith, Robert C. A Talha em Portugal. Lisbon, 1963.■. The Art of Portugal, 1500-1800. London, Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1968.■. "The Building of Mafra." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 360-67.■ Stoop, Anne de. Demeures portugaises dans les environs de Lisbonne. Paris: Weber, 1986.■. Palais et manoirs: Le Minho. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1995.■ Tannock, Michael. Portuguese 20th Century Artists: A Biographical Dictionary. Chichester, U.K.: Phillimore, 1978.■ Taylor, René. "The Architecture of Port Wine." The Architectural Review CXXIX, 772 (1961): 368-99.■ Terol, Marylene. Azulejos a Lisbonne. Paris: Hervas, 1992.■ Veiga de Oliveira, Ernesto. Instrumentos musicais populares portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.■ Watson, Walter Crum. Portuguese Architecture. London: Constable, 1908. Wohl, Hellmut. "Carlos Mardel and His Lisbon Architecture." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 350-59.■ Andrade, Sergio de. "Presepios." In Dicionario de Arte Barroca em Portugal. Lisbon: Presenca, 1989. Barreira, Joao. Arte Portuguesa, Arquitectura e Escultura. Lisbon: Excelsior, n.d.■ Cardoso, Arnaldo Pinto. O Presepio Barroco Portugues. Lisbon: Bertrand, 2003.■ Chaves, Luis. Os Barristas Portugueses. Coimbra, 1925.■. Natal Portugues. Oporto: Liv. Classica Editora, 1942.■ Gargano, Pietro. Il Presepio. Otto Secoli di Storia, Arte, Tradizione. Milan: Fenice, 1995.■ Lima, Henrique de Campos F. Joaquim Machado de Castro, Escultor Conimbricense. Coimbra: Instituto de Historia de Arte, 1989. Macedo, Diogo de. Presepios Portugueses. Lisbon: Artis, 1951.■. Machado de Castro. Lisbon: Artis, 1958.■ Morais, Heitor. Natal do Meu Coracao. Braga: Ed. A.O., 1991.■ Pais, Alexandre Nobre. Presepios Portugueses Monumentos do Seculo XVIII em Terracotta, 2 vols. Master's thesis in history of art, Universidade Nova de Lisboa, 1998.■ Queiros, Jose. Ceramica Portuguesa. Lisbon: Presenca, 1998. Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1951. Serrao, Vitor. Historia da Arte em Portugal IV-O Barroco. Lisbon: Presenca, 2003.■ Smith, Robert C. The Art Of Portugal 1500-1800. New York: Meredith Press, 1968.■ Sousa, Ernesto de. Presepios. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1998.■ Cinema■ Antunes, Joao and Jose de Matos-Cruz, Cinema Portugues 1896-1998. Lisbon: Lusomundo, 1997.■ Bandeira, Jose Gomes. Porto: 100 anos de cinema portugues. Oporto: Camara Municipal do Porto, 1996. Duarte, Fernando. Primitivos do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Cinecultura, 1960.■ Faria de Almeida, M., Resumo da Historia do Cinema. Lisbon: RTP, 1982. Nobre, Roberto. Singularidades do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Portugalia, n.d.■ Pina, Luis de. Aventura do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Vega, 1977.■. Documentarismo Portugues. Lisbon: IPC, 1977.■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.■. Historia do Cinema Portugues. Mem Martins: Europa-America, 1986.■ Ribeiro, Felix. O Cinema Portugues antes do Sonoro. Esboco Historiconema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: n.d.■ Andresen, Sofia de Melo Breyner. A Fada Oriana. 9th ed. Lisbon: Figueiri-nhas, 1985.■ Araújo, Matilde Rosa. A estrada fascinante. Lisbon: Livros Horizonte, 1988. Barreto, Garcia. Literatura Para Crianças E Jovens Em Portugal. Oporto:■ Campo Das Letras, 1998. Bastos, Glória. A escrita para crianças em Portugal no seculo XIX. Lisbon:■ Caminho da Educaçao, 1997. Cadet, Maria Rita Chiappe. Os Contos da Mamã. Lisbon: Lallement Freres, 1883.■ Castro, Fernanda. Mariazinha em Africa, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1947. Cross, Esther, and Wilbur Cross. Portugal. Chicago: Childrens Press, 1986. DeSkalon, Anna, and Christa Stadtler. We Live in Portugal. New York: Watts, 1987.■ Gomes, Alice. A Nau Catrineta, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1973.■. A literatura para a infância. Lisbon: Torres & Abreu, 1979.■ Letria, José Jorge. Do sentimento mágico da vida. Lisbon: Escritor, 1994. Müller, Adolfo Simões. Historiazinha de Portugal, 6th ed. Oporto: Tavares Martins, 1983.■ Osório, Ana de Castro. Para as crianças. Illustr. by Leal da Câmara. Setúbal: Liv. Crianças, 1908.■ Pires, Maria Laura Bettencourt. História da literatura infantil portuguesa. Lisbon: Vega, 1981. Ribeiro, Aquilino. Arca de Noé-III Classe. Lisbon, 1989. Rocha, Natércia. Breve História da Literatura para Crianças em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura e Língua Portuguesa, 1984.■. Bibliografia geral da literatura portuguesa para crianças. Lisbon: Edit. Comunicação, 1987.■ Sá, Domingos Guimarães de. A literatura infantil em Portugal. Braga: Edit. Franciscana, 1981.■ Selfridge. John. Portugal. New York: Chelsea House, 1990. Vaz de Carvalho, Maria Amália. Contos para os Nossos Filhos, 11th ed. Oporto: Barreira, 1947.■ Viana, António Manuel Couto. Jõao de Deus e um século de literatura infantil em Portugal. Lisbon: Ed. do Templo, 1978.■ Lisbon, Capital City, in History and Literature■ Castelo-Branco, Fernando. Lisboa Seiscentista, 3rd ed. Lisbon: 1969.■ Castilho, Júlio de. Lisboa Antiga, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1935-45.■ Couto, Dejanirah. Histoire de Lisbonne. Paris: Fayard, 2000.■ Crespo, Ángel. Lisboa Mítica e Literária. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1987.■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Lisboa Desaparecida. Lisbon: Quimera, 1990.■ Dionísio, Sant'anna, ed. Guia de Portugal. Vol. I: Lisboa e Arredores. Lisbon: Biblioteca Nacional de Lisboa, 1924, orig. ed; reprint, Gulbenkian Foundation, 1979.■ França, José-Augusto. Lisboa Pombalina e o Iluminismo. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1977.■ Moita, Irisalva, ed. O Livro de Lisboa. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1994.■ Neves, Orlando. Lisboa em Crónica. Lisbon: Author's Ed., 1968.■ Pavão, Luís, and Mário Pereira. Tabernas de Lisboa. Lisbon: Assírio & Alvim, 1981.■ Pessoa, Fernando. Lisboa. O que o turista deve ver: What the Tourist Should See. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1997.■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. À Capital. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1960.■ Santos, Piedade Braga, et al. Lisboa Setecentista vista por Estrangeiros. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1996.■ Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa. Lisbon: Caminho, 1993.■ Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.■ Azevedo, João Lúcio. Historia das Cristãos-Novos. Lisbon: Liv. Clássica, 1975.■ Baião, António. A Inquisição em Portugal e no Brasil: Subsídios para a sua história. Lisbon: Arquivo Histórico Portugues, 1906. Bethencourt, Francisco. "Portugal: A Scrupulous Inquisition," In Bengt Ankarloo and Gustav Henningsen, eds., Early Modern Witchcraft: Centres and Peripheries, 403-22. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1990.■. "Os equilíbrios sociais do Poder." In José Mattoso, ed., Historia De Portugal, Vol. 3, No Alvorecer Da Modernidade ( 1480-1620). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.■ Braga, Maria Luísa. A Inquisição em Portugal na primeira metade do Séc. XVIII. Lisbon: Inst. Nacional de Investigação Científica, 1992.■ Haliczer, Stephen, ed. Inquisition and Society in Early Modern Europe. London: Croom Helm, 1987.■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. Reprint. New York: AMS Press, 1968.■ Magalhães, Joaquim Romero. "Em Busca dos Tempos da Inquisição (15731615)." Revista de História das Ideias 9 (1987): 191-228.■ Mea, Elvira Cunha Azevedo. A Inquisição de Coimbra no Século XVI. Oporto, 1989.■ Mendonça, José Lourenço D. de, and António Joaquim Moreira. História da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1980.■ Novinsky, Anita, and Luísa M. Carneiro, eds. Inquisição: Ensaios sobre Mentalidade, Heresias e Arte. Rio de Janeiro: Expressão e Cultura, 1992.■ Pereira, Isais da Rosa. Documentos para a história da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.■ Rego, Yvonne Cunha, ed. Feiticeiros, Profetas e Visionários: Textos Antigos Portugueses. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional e Casa da Moeda, 1981.■ Saraiva, António José. Inquisição e cristãos-novos. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.■ Walker, Timothy Dale. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, Boston University, 2001.■ Literature in English Translation: Selection■ Alcaforado, Mariana. The Letters of a Portuguese Nun ( Mariana Alcaforado). Edgar Prestage, trans. London: D. Nutt, 1893.■ Andrade, Eugénio de. "White on White." Alexis Levitin, trans. Quarterly Review of Literature. Poetry Series VIII. Vol. 27. Princeton, N.J., 1987.■. Another Name for Earth; O outro nome da terra. Alexis Levitin, trans. Ft. Bragg, Calif.: QED Press, 1997.■ Andresen, Sophia de Mello Breyner. Marine Rose: Selected Poems. Ruth Fain-light, trans. Redding Ridge, Conn.: Swan Books, 1989.■ Antunes, António Lobo. South of Nowhere. Elizabeth Lowe, trans. New York: Random House, 1983.■. Fado Alexandrino. Gregory Rabassa, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1990.■. An Explanation of the Birds. Richard Zenith, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1991.■. Act of the Damned. New York: Grove Press, 1995.■. The Natural Order of Things. New York: Grove Press, 2000.■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. Poems from the Portuguese ( with the Portuguese text). A.■ Bell, trans. Oxford: Blackwell, 1913.■ Camões, Luís de. The Lusiads of Luís de Camões. Leonard Bacon, trans. New York: Hispanic Society of America, 1950.■. The Lusiads. William C. Atkinson, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1952.■. The Lusiads. Landeg White, trans. New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.■ Castelo Branco, Camilo. Doomed Love ( A Family Memoir). Alice R. Clemente, trans Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1995. Castro, José Maria Ferreira de. Emigrants. Dorothy Ball, trans. New York: Macmillan, 1962.■. Jungle. Charles Duff, trans. New York: Viking, 1935.■. The Mission. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1963.■ Dantas, Júlio. The Cardinals' Collation, 48th ed. A. Saintsbury, trans. London, 1962.■ Dias de Melo. Dark Stones. Gregory McNab, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1996.■ Dinis, Júlio. The Fidalgos of Casa Mourisca. Rosanna Dabney, trans. Boston: D. Lothrop, 1891.■ Garrett, Almeida. Brother Luiz de Sousa [play]. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: Elkin Mathess, 1909.■. Travels in My Homeland. John M. Parker, trans. London: Peter Owen and UNESCO, 1987. Griffin, Jonathan. Camões: Some Poems Translated from the Portuguese by Jonathan Griffin. London: Menard Press, 1976. Jorge, Lídia. The Murmuring Coast. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1995.■ Lisboa, Eugénio, ed. Portuguese Short Fiction. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1997.■ Lopes, Fernão. The English in Portugal 1367-87: Extracts from the Chronicles of Dom Fernando and Dom João. Derek W. Lomax and R. J. Oakley, eds. and trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.■ Macedo, Helder, ed. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry: An Anthology in English. Helder Macedo, et al., trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet New Press, 1978.■ Martins, J. P. De Oliveira. A History of Iberian Civilization. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans.; preface by Salvador de Madariaga. New York: Cooper Square, 1969.■ Mendes Pinto, Fernão. The Travels of Mendes Pinto [Orig. title: Peregrinação].■ Rebecca D. Catz, trans., with introduction and notes. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989. Miguéis, José Rodrigues. A Man Smiles at Death with Half a Face. George■ Monteiro, trans. Hanover, N.H.: University Press of New England, 1991.■. Happy Easter. John Byrne, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.■. Steerage and Ten Other Stories. George Monteiro, ed. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1998. Monteiro, Luís De Sttau. The Rules of the Game. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1965.■ Mourão-Ferreira, David. Lucky in Love. Christine Robinson, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1999. Namora, Fernando. Field of Fate. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1970.■. Mountain Doctor. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1956.■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Inclement Weather over the Channel. Francisco Cota Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1993.■. Stormy Isles: An Azorean Tale. Francisco C. Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000.■ Paço D'Arcos, Joaquim. Memoirs of a Banknote. Robert Lyle, trans. London, 1968.■ Pedroso, Consiglieri, comp. Portuguese Folk-Tales. Henriqueta Monteiro, trans. Reprint of orig. 1882 ed. New York: Benjamin Blom, 1969.■ Pessoa, Fernando. Fernando Pessoa: Sixty Portuguese Poems. F. E. G. Quintanilha, ed. and trans. Cardiff: University of Wales Press, 1971.■. Selected Poems: Fernando Pessoa. 2nd rev. ed. Jonathan Griffin, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1982.■. The Book of Disquiet. Alfred MacAdams, trans. New York: Pantheon, 1991.■. Fernando Pessoa: Selected Poems. Peter Rickard, ed. and trans. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1991.■. "The Mariner: A 'Static Drama' in One Act." In Translation: Portugal.■ George Ritchie, et al., trans. The Journal of Literary Translation. Vol. XXV, 38-56. New York: Translation Center, Columbia University, 1991.■. Message: Bilingual Edition. Jonathan Griffin, trans. London: Menard Press and King's College, 1992.■ Pires, José Cardoso. Ballad of a Dog's Beach. Mary Fitton, trans. London: J. M. Dent, 1986.■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. Cousin Bazilio. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1953.■. The Relic. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1954.■. The City and the Mountains. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1955.■. The Sin of Father Amaro. Nan Flanagan, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1962.■. The Maias. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1965.■. The Illustrious House of Ramires. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1968.■. Letters from England. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1970.■. To the Capital. John Vetch, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.■ Quental, Antero de. Sixty-four Sonnets. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: David Nutt, 1894.■ Redol, Alves. The Man with Seven Names. L. L. Barrett, trans. New York: Knopf, 1964.■ Resende, André de. André deResende's 'Poema Latina'/ 'Latinpoems.' J. C. R. Martyn, ed. and trans. Lewiston N.Y.: Lampeter and Edwin Mellen, 1998. Ribeiro, Aquilino. When the Wolves Howl. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. New York: Macmillan; London: Cape, 1963. Sá Carneiro, Mário de. The Great Shadow ( and Other Stories). Margaret Jull Costa, trans. Sawtry, U.K.: Dedalus, 1996. Santareno, Bernardo. The Promise. Nelson H. Vieira, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1981.■ Saramago, José. Baltasar and Blimunda. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1987.■. The Stone Raft. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.■. The Year of the Death of Ricardo Reis. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.■. The History of the Siege of Lisbon. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt Brace, 1996.■. Blindness. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1999.■. Tale of the Unknown Island. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2000.■. All the Names. Margaret Jull Costa, trans. New York: Harcourt, 2000.■. Journey to Portugal. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2001.■ Sena, Jorge de. The Poetry of Jorge de Sena: A Bilingual Selection. Frederick G. Williams et al., trans. Santa Barbara, Calif.: Mudborn Press, 1980.■. By the Rivers of Babylon and Other Stories. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1989.■ Vicente, Gil. Four Plays of Gil Vicente: Edited from the Editio Princeps ( 1562). Aubrey F. G. Bell, ed. and trans. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1920.■. Lyrics of Gil Vicente. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. Oxford: Oxford University Press, Hispanic Notes and Monographs, Portuguese Series 1, 1921.■. The Play of Rubena. Jack E. Tomlins, trans.; Rene P. Garay and José I. Suarez, eds. New York: National Hispanic Foundation for Humanities, 1993.■. The Boat Plays. David Johnston, trans. and adaptation. London: Oberon, 1996.■. Three Discovery Plays. Anthony Lappin, trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1997.■ Vieira, António. Dust Thou Art. Rev. W. Anderson, trans. London, 1882.■ Portuguese and Portuguese-American Cooking: Cuisine■ Anderson, Jean. Food of Portugal. New York: Hearst, 1994. Asselin, E. Donald. A Portuguese-American Cookbook. Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1966.■ Bourne, Ursula. Portuguese Cookery. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1973. Crato, Maria Helena Tavares. Cozinha Portuguesa I, II. Lisbon: Editorial Presença, 1978.■ Dienhart, Miriam, and Anne Emerson, ed. Cooking in Portugal. Cascais: American Women of Lisbon, 1978.■ Feibleman, Peter S. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. New York: Time-Life Books; Foods of the World, 1969.■ Koehler, Margaret H. Recipes from the Portuguese of Provincetown. Riverside, Conn.: Chatham Press, 1973. Manjny, Maite. The Home Book of Portuguese Cookery. London: Faber & Faber, 1974.■ Marques, Susan Lowndes. Good Food from Spain and Portugal. London: Muller, 1956.■ Modesto, Maria de Lourdes. Cozinha Tradicional Portuguesa. Lisbon: Verbo, 1982.■ Ortiz, Elisabeth Lambert. The Food of Spain and Portugal. The Complete Iberian Cuisine. New York: Atheneum, 1989. Pinto, Elvira. La Bonne Cuisine Portugaise. Paris: Edicions Garanciere, 1985.■ Robertson, Carol. Portuguese Cooking: The Authentic and Robust Cuisine of Portugal. Berkeley Calif.: North Atlantic, 1993. Schmaeling, Tony. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. Ware, U.K.: Omega, 1983.■ Vieira, Édite. The Taste of Portugal. London: Robinson, 1989.■ Von Treskow, Maria. Zü Gast in Portugal: Eine Kulnarische Reise in Garten Europas. Weingarten: Kunstverlag, 1989. Wright, Carol. Portuguese Food. London: Dent, 1969.■. Self-catering in Portugal: Making the Most of Local Food and Drink. London: Croom Helm, 1986.■ Afonso, Simonetta Luz, and Angela Delaforce. Palace of Queluz— The Gardens. Lisbon, 1989.■ Araújo, Iluídio Alves de. Arte Paisagista e Arte das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1962.■ Azeredo, Francisco de. Casas Senhoriais Portuguesas. Barcelos, 1986.■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1987.■ Bowe, Patrick, and Nicolas Sapieha. Gardens of Portugal. New York: Scala Books and Harper and Row, 1989.■ Cane, Florence du. The Flowers and Gardens of Madeira. London, 1924.■ Cardoso, Pedro Homem, and Helder Carita. Da Grandeza das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.■ Carita, Helder, and Homem Cardoso. Portuguese Gardens. London: Antique Collector's Club, 1987.■ Costa, António da, and Luís de O. Franquinho. Madeira: Plantas e Floras. Funchal, 1986.■ Nichols, Rose Standish. Spanish and Portuguese Gardens. Boston, 1926.■ Pereira, Arthur D. Sintra and Its Farm Manors. Sintra, 1983.■ Sampaio, Gonçalo. Flora Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1946.■ Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1945.■ Underwood, John, and Pat Underwood. Landscapes of Madeira. London, 1980.■ Vieira, Rui. Flowers of Madeira. Funchal, 1973.■ Viterbo, Francisco Marques de Sousa. A Jardinagem em Portugal, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1906-9.■ Education, Science, Health, and Medical History■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Estudos de História, 3 vols. Coimbra, 1973-81.■. Ciência e experiência nos Descobrimentos portugueses. Lisbon, 1983.■. Para a História de Ciência em Portugal. Lisbon, 1983.■. As Navegaçoes E A Sua Projecção Na Ciência E Na Cultura. Lisbon, 1987.■ Baião, Antônio. Episódios Dramáticos da Inquisição Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1936-55.■ Cabreira, Antônio. Portugal nos mares e nas ciências. Lisbon, 1929. Carvalho, Rômulo de. A Astronomia em Portugal (séc. xviii). Lisbon, 1985. Fernandes, Barahona. Egas Moniz: Pioneiro de descobrimentos médicos. Lisbon, 1983.■ Gaitonde, P. D. Portuguese Pioneers in India: Spotlight on Medicine. London: Sangam Books, 1983.■ Hanson, Carl A. "Portuguese Cosmology in the Late Seventeenth Century." In Benjamin F. Taggie and Richard W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 75-85. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State University, 1989.■ Higgins, Michael H., and Charles F. S. de Winton. Survey of Education in Portugal. London, 1942.■ Hirsch, Elizabeth Feist. Damião de Góis: The Life and Thought of a Portuguese Humanist. The Hague, 1967.■ Lemos, Maximiano. Arquivos de História da Medicina Portuguesa. Several vols. Lisbon, 1886-1923. Vol. I. História da Medicina em Portugal. Doutrina e Instituições. Lisbon, 1899.■ Mira, Matias Ferreira de. História da Medicina Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1948.■ Orta, Garcia de. Colóquios dos Simples e Drogas e Cousas Medicinais da India. Conde de Ficalho, ed., 2 vols. Lisbon, 1891-95.■ Osório, J. Pereira. História e Desenvolvimento da Ciência em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986-89.■ Pina, Luís de. "Uma prioridade portuguesa do século XVI. João de Barros e a Dactiloscópia Oriental." Arquivo da Repartição de Antropologia Criminal IV (1936).■. "As Ciências na História do Império Colonial Português — Séculos XV a XIX." Anais de Faculdade de Ciências do Porto ( 1939-10).■. "Os Portugueses Mestres de Ciência e Metras no Estrangeiro." Actas do Congresso do Mundo Português. Lisbon, 1940.■. "A Ciência em Portugal (bosquejo Histórico)." In Secretariado Nacional da Informação, ed., Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Portugueses Ausentes, 277-301. Lisbon, 1946.■ Richards, Robert A. C., ed. Guide to World Science: Vol. 9: Spain and Portugal, 2nd ed. Guernsey, U.K.: F. H. Books, 1974.■ Saraiva, António José. História da Cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-62.■ ———. "João de Barros." In Serrao, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal 1 (1963): 307-8.■ Silvestre Ribeiro, José. História dos Establecimentos Scientíficos, Literários e Artísticos de Portugal nos Successivos Reinados da Monarchia, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1871-83.■ Veiga-Pires, J. A., and Ronald G. Grainger, eds. Pioneers in Angiography: The Portuguese School ofAngiography. Lancaster, U.K.: MTP Press, 1982.■ Walker, Timothy. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 2001.■ Barbosa, Madelena. "Women in Portugal." Women's Studies International Quarterly 4 (1981): 477-80.■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. Novas Cartas Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1972.■ ———. The Three Marias. New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.■ Brettell, Caroline B. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman, 1982.■ Ferreira, Virginia. "Engendering Portugal: Social Change, State Politics, and Women's Social Mobilization." In António Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 162-88. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.■ Goodwin, Mary. "Portuguese Feminism." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 17 (Spring-Summer 1987): 12-13.■ Lamas, Maria. As Mulheres do Meu País. Lisbon, 1948.■ "Mulheres Portuguesas e Feminismo." Análise Social [special number on Portuguese Women and Feminism] 22 (1986): 92-93.■ Osório, Ana de Castro. As Mulheres Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1905.■ Sadlier, Darlene J. The Question of How: Women Writers and New Portuguese Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood; Contributions in Women's Studies, no. 109, 1989.■ Silva, Manuela. The Employment of Women in Portugal. Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications, European Communities, 1984. Velho da Costa, Maria. Maina Mendes. Lisbon, 1974.■ Vicente, Ana, and Maria Reynolds de Souza. Family Planning in Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História da Igreja em Portugal. 6 vols. Coimbra, 1910-24, and Oporto, 1967-72. Alonso, Joaquim Maria. The Secret of Fátima: Fact and Legend. Cambridge, Mass.: Ravengate Press, 1979. Alves, José da Felicidade, ed. Católicos e política de Humberto Delgado à Marcelo Caetano. Lisbon, 1969. Araújo, Miguel de, ed. Dicionario político; 1; Os Bispos e a revoluçao de Abril. Lisbon, 1976. Bishko, Charles Julian. Spanish and Portuguese Monastic History 600-1300. London, Variorum Reprints, 1984.■ Blanshard, Paul. Freedom and Catholic Power in Spain and Portugal. Boston: Beacon Press, 1962.■ Boxer, C. R. The Church Militant and Iberian Expansion 1440-1770. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1978. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Church and State in Portugal: Crises of Cross and Sword." Journal of Church and State XVIII (1976): 463-90. Freire, José Geraldes. Resistência Católico ao Salazarismo-Marcelismo. Oporto, 1976.■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. John C. Banner, trans. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1962.■ IPOPE. Estudo sobre liberdade e religião em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973. Johnston, Francis. Fátima: The Great Sign. Chulmleigh, U.K.: Augustine Publications, 1980.■ Kondor, Fr. Louis. Fátima in Lucia's Own Words: Sister Lucia's Memoirs. Fatima: Postulation Center, 1976. Lourenço, Joaquim Maria. Situação jurídica da Igreja em Portugal. Coimbra, 1943.■ Mattoso, José. Religião e Cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1982. Miller, Samuel J. Portugal and Rome c. 1748-1830: An Aspect of Catholic Enlightenment. Rome: Universita Gregoriana Editrice, 1978. O'Malley, John W. The First Jesuits. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1993.■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.■ Prestage, Edgar. Portugal: A Pioneer of Christianity. Lisbon, 1945.■ Richard, Robert. Etudes sur l'histoire morale et religieuse de Portugal. Paris: Centro Cultural de Gulbenkian, 1970.■ Robinson, Richard A. H. "The Religious Question and Catholic Revival in Portugal, 1900-1930." Journal of Contemporary History XII (1977): 345-62.■. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.■ Rodrigues, R. P. Francisco. História da Companhia de Jesus na Assistência de Portugal, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1931-50.■ Roth, Cecil. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.■ Agriculture, Viticulture, and Fishing■ Abreu-Ferreira, Darlene. "The Portuguese in Newfoundland: Documentary Evidence Examined." Portuguese Studies Review 4, 1 (1995-96): 11-33.■ Allen, H. Warner. The Wines of Portugal. London: Michael Joseph, 1963.■ Barros, Afonso de. A reforma agrária em Portugal. Oeiras, 1979.■ Beamish, Huldine V. The Hills of Alentejo. London: Geoffrey Bles, 1958.■ Bennett, Norman R. "The Golden Age of the Port Wine System, 1781-1807." The International History Review XII (1990): 221-18.■ Black, Richard. "The Myth of Subsistence: Market Production in the Small Farm Sector of Northern Portugal." Iberian Studies 1, 8 (1989): 25-41.■ Bravo, Pedro, and Duarte de Oliveira. Viticulture Moderna. Lisbon, 1974.■. Vinhas e Vinhos De Portugal. Lisbon, 1979.■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Agrarian Structures and Recent Movements in Portugal." Journal of Peasant Studies 4, 5 (July 1978): 411-45.■ Cardoso, José Carvalho. A Agricultura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1973.■ Carvalho, Bento de. Guía Dos Vinhos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.■ Clarke, Robert. Open Boat Whaling in the Azores: The History and Present Methods of a Relic Industry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1954.■ Cockburn, Ernest. Port Wine and Oporto. London: Wine & Spirit, 1949. Cole, S. C. "Cod, Cod Country and Family: The Portuguese Newfoundland Fishery." Mast 3, 1 (1990): 1-29.■ Coull, James. The Fisheries of Europe. London: G. Bell & Sons, 1972.■ Croft-Cooke, Rupert. Port. London: Putnam, 1957.■. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.■ Delaforce, John. The Factory House at Oporto. London: Christie's Wine Publications, 1979 and later eds.■ Doel, Patricia A. Port O'Call: Memories of the Portuguese White Fleet in St. John's Newfoundland. St. John's, Newfoundland: ISER, 1992.■ Fletcher, Wyndham. Port: An Introduction to Its History and Delights. London: Bernet, 1978.■ Francis, A. D. The Wine Trade. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1972.■ Freitas, Eduardo, João Ferreira de Almeida, and Manuel Villaverde Cabral. Modalidades de penetração do capitalismo na agricultura: estruturas agrárias em Portugal Continental, 1950-1970. Lisbon, 1976.■ Gonçalves, Francisco Esteves. Portugal: A Wine Country. Lisbon, 1984.■ Gulbenkian Foundation. Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.■ Kurlansky, Mark. Cod: A Biography of the Fish That Changed the World. New York: Walker, 1997.■ Malefakis, Edward. "Two Iberian Land Reforms Compared: Spain, 1931-1936 and Portugal, 1974—1978." In Gulbenkian Foundation, Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.■ Moutinho, M. História da pesca do bacalhau. Lisbon: Imprensa Universitária, 1985.■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. lntrodução a história da agricultura em Portugal.■ Lisbon, 1968. Pato, Octávio. O Vinho. Lisbon, 1971.■ Pearson, Scott R. Portuguese Agriculture in Transition. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1987.■ Postgate, Raymond. Portuguese Wine. London: Dent, 1969.■ Read, Jan. The Wines of Portugal. London: Faber & Faber, 1982.■ Robertson, George. Port. London: Faber & Faber, 1982 ed.■ Rutledge, Ian. "Land Reform and the Portuguese Revolution." Journal of Peasant Studies 5, 1 (Oct. 1977): 79-97.■ Sanceau, Elaine. The British Factory at Oporto. Oporto, 1970.■ Simon, Andre L. Port. London: Constable, 1934.■ Simões, J. Os grandes trabalhadores do Mar: Reportagens na Terra Nova e na Groenlândia. Lisbon: Gazeta dos Caminho de Ferro, 1942.■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992: Special Report. New York: Camões Center/RIIC, Columbia University, 1990.■ Stanislawski, Dan. Landscapes of Bacchus: The Vine in Portugal. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1970.■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Seat to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.■ Unwin, Tim. "Farmers' Perceptions of Agrarian Change in Northwest Portugal." Journal of Rural Studies 1, 4 (1985): 339-57.■ Valadão do Valle, E. Bacalhau: tradições históricas e económicos. Lisbon, 1991.■ Venables, Bernard. Baleia! The Whalers of Azores. London: Bodley Head, 1968.■ Villiers, Alan. The Quest of the Schooner Argus: A Voyage to the Banks and Greenland. New York: Scribners, 1951. World Bank. Portugal: Agricultural Survey. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.■ ECONOMY, INDUSTRY, AND DEVELOPMENT■ Aiyer, Srivain, and Shahid A. Chandry. Portugal and the E.E.C.: Employment and Implications. Lisbon, 1979.■ Baklanoff, Eric N. The Economic Transformation of Spain and Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1978.■. "Changing Systems: The Portuguese Revolution and the Public Enterprise Sector." ACES ( Association of Comparative Economic Studies) Bulletin 26 (Summer-Fall 1984): 63-76.■. "Portugal's Political Economy: Old and New." In K. Maxwell and M. Haltzel, eds., Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy, 37-59. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.■ Barbosa, Manuel P. Growth, Migration and the Balance of Payments in a Small, Open Economy. New York: Garland, 1984.■ Braga de Macedo, Jorge, and Simon Serfaty, eds. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1981.■ Carvalho, Camilo, et al. Sabotagem Econômica: " Dossier" Banco Espírito Santo e Comercial de Lisboa. Lisbon, 1975.■ Corkill, David. The Development of the Portuguese Economy: A Case of Euro-peanization. London: Routledge, 1999.■ Cravinho, João. "The Portuguese Economy: Constraints and Opportunities." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 111-65. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.■ Dornsbusch, Rudiger, Richard S. Eckhaus, and Lane Taylor. "Analysis and Projection of Macroeconomic Conditions in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 299-330. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.■ The Economist (London). "On the Edge of Europe: A Survey of Portugal." (June 30, 1981): 3-27.■. "Coming Home: A Survey of Portugal." (May 28, 1988).■. 'The New Iberia: Not Quite Kissing Cousins" [Spain and Portugal]. (May 5, 1990): 21-24.■ Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian and German Marshall Fund of the U.S., eds. II Conferência Internacional sobre e Economia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.■ Hudson, Mark. Portugal to 1993: Investing in a European Future. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit/Special Report No. 11 57/EIU Economic Prospects Series, 1989.■ International Labour Office (ILO). Employment and Basic Needs in Portugal. Geneva: ILO, 1979.■ Kavalsky, Basil, and Surendra Agarwal. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.■ Krugman, Paul, and Jorge Braga de Macedo. "The Economic Consequences of the April 25th Revolution." Economia III (1979): 455-83.■ Lewis, John R., and Alan M. Williams. "The Sines Project: Portugal's Growth Centre or White Elephant?" Town Planning Review 56, 3 (1985): 339-66.■ Makler, Harry M. "The Consequences of the Survival and Revival of the Industrial Bourgeoisie." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 251-83. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■ Marques, A. La Politique Economique Portugaise dans la Période de la Dictature ( 1926-1974). Doctoral thesis, 3rd cycle, University of Grenoble, France, 1980.■ Martins, B. Sociedades e grupos em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973.■ Mata, Eugenia, and Nuno Valério. História Econômica De Portugal: Uma Perspectiva Global. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1994. Murteira, Mário. "The Present Economic Situation: Its Origins and Prospects." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 331-42. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979. OCED. Economic Survey: Portugal: 1988. Paris: OCED, 1988 [see also this series since 1978].■ Pasquier, Albert. L'Economie du Portugal: Données et Problémes de Son Expansion. Paris: Librarie Generale de Droit, 1961. Pereira da Moura, Francisco. Para onde vai e economia portuguesa? Lisbon, 1973.■ Pintado, V. Xavier. Structure and Growth of the Portuguese Economy. Geneva: EFTA, 1964.■ Pitta e Cunha, Paulo. "Portugal and the European Economic Community." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 321-38. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.■. "The Portuguese Economic System and Accession to the European Community." In E. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 281-300. Lisbon, 1985. Porto, Manuel. "Portugal: Twenty Years of Change." In Alan Williams, ed., Southern Europe Transformed, 84-112. London: Harper & Row, 1984. Quarterly Economic Review. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit, 1974-present.■ Salgado de Matos, Luís. Investimentos Estrangeiros em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973 and later eds.■ Schmitt, Hans O. Economic Stabilisation and Growth in Portugal. Washington, D.C.: International Monetary Fund, 1981.■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Columbia University, 1989.■ Tillotson, John. The Portuguese Bank Note Case [ 1920s]: Legal, Economic and Financial Approaches to the Measure of Damages in Contract. Manchester, U.K.: Faculty of Law, University of Manchester, 1992.■ Tovias, Alfred. Foreign Economic Relations of the Economic Community: The Impact of Spain and Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1990.■ Valério, Nuno. A moeda em Portugal, 1913-1947. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1984.■. As Finanças Públicas Portuguesas Entre As Duas Guerras Mundiais. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.■ World Bank. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978 and to the present.■ PHOTOGRAPHY ON PORTUGAL■ Alves, Afonso Manuel, Antônio Sacchetti, and Moura Machado. Lisboa. Lisbon, 1991.■ Antunes, José. Lisboa do nosso olhar; A look on Lisbon. Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1991. Beaton, Cecil. Near East. London: Batsford, 1943.■. Lisboa 1942: Cecil Beaton, Lisbon 1942. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal/Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1995.■ Bottineau, Yves. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1957.■ Câmara Municipal de Lisboa. 7 Olhares ( Seven Viewpoints). Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1998.■ Capital, A. Lisboa: Imagens d'A Capital. Lisbon: Edit. Notícias, 1984.■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Photographias de Lisboa, 1900 ( Photographs of Lisbon, 1900). Lisbon: Quimera, 1991.■. Os melhores postais antigos de Lisboa ( The best old postcards of Lisbon). Lisbon: Químera, 1995.■ Finlayson, Graham, and Frank Tuohy. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1970.■ Glassner, Helga. Portugal. Berlin-Zurich: Atlantis-Verlag, 1942. Hopkinson, Amanda, ed. Reflections by Ten Portuguese photographers. Bark-way, U.K.: Frontline/Portugal 600, 1996.■ Lima, Luís Leiria, and Isabel Salema. Lisboa de Pedra e Bronze. Lisbon, 1990.■ Martins, Miguel Gomes. Lisboa ribeirinha ( Riverside Lisbon). Lisbon: Arquivo Municipal, Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, Livros Horizonte, 1994. Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa ( This Lisbon). Lisbon: Caminho, 1994. Wohl, Hellmut, and Alice Wohl. Portugal. London: Frederick Muller, 1983.■ EQUESTRIANISM■ Andrade, Manoel Carlos de, Luz da Liberal e Nobre Arte da Cavallaria. Lisbon, 1790.■ Graciosa, Filipe. Escola Portuguesa de Arte Equestre. Lisbon, 2004.■ Horsetalk Magazine. Published in New Zealand.■ Oliveira, Nuno. Reflections on the Equestrian Art. London, 2000.■ Russell, Eleanor, ed. The Truth in the Teaching of Nuno Oliveira. Stanhope,■ Queensland, Australia, 2003. Vilaca, Luis V., and Pedro Yglesias d'Oliveira, eds. LUSITANO. Coudelarias De Portugal. O Cavalo ancestral do Sudoeste da Europa. Lisbon: ICONOM, 2005.■ Websites of interest: www.equestrian.pt portugalweb.comHistorical dictionary of Portugal > CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE
-
15 passer
passer [pαse]━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━➭ TABLE 1━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Lorsque passer fait partie d'une locution comme passer sous le nez de qn, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━1. <• où passe la route ? where does the road go?► passer à ( = passer par, aller à)• si nous passions au salon ? shall we go into the sitting room?• le confort, ça passe après comfort is less important► passer avant• passez donc devant ! you go first!• il est passé devant le conseil de discipline he came up before the disciplinary committee► passer par to go through• pour y aller, je passe par Amiens I go there via Amiens• par où êtes-vous passé ? (pour venir ici) which way did you come? ; (pour aller ailleurs) which way did you go?• pour téléphoner, il faut passer par le standard you have to go through the switchboard to make a call• ça fait du bien par où ça passe ! (inf) that's just what the doctor ordered! (inf)► passer sous to go under• l'air passe sous la porte there's a draught from under the door► passer sur to go over ; ( = ignorer) to ignore• et je passe sur la saleté du lieu ! not to mention how dirty the place was!► laisser passer [+ air, lumière] to let in ; [+ personne, procession] to let through ; [+ erreur, occasion] to missb. ( = faire une halte rapide) passer au bureau to call in at the office► passer + infinitif• puis-je passer te voir en vitesse ? can I pop round?► en passant ( = sur le chemin) on the way ; ( = dans la conversation) in passing• il aime tous les sports, du football à la boxe en passant par le golf he likes all sports, from football to golf to boxingd. ( = franchir un obstacle) [véhicule] to get through ; [cheval, sauteur] to get over• ça passe ? (en manœuvrant) have I got enough room?e. ( = s'écouler) [temps] to go by• comme le temps passe ! how time flies!f. ( = être digéré) to go down• ça ne passe pas [repas] I've got indigestiong. ( = être accepté) [demande, proposition] to be accepted• il est passé dans la classe supérieure he's moved up to the next class (Brit) he's been promoted to the next grade (US)• l'équipe est passée en 2e division the team have moved up to the second divisionh. ( = devenir) to becomei. ( = être montré) [film, émission, personne] to be onj. ( = disparaître) [douleur] to pass ; [orage] to blow over ; [beauté, couleur] to fade ; [colère] to subside ; [mode] to die outl. (locutions) qu'il soit menteur, passe encore,... he may be a liar, that's one thing,...• se faire passer pour to pass o.s. off ason a eu la grippe, tout le monde y est passé we've all had flu• si elle veut une promotion, il faudra bien qu'elle y passe (sexuellement) if she wants to be promoted, she'll have to sleep with the boss► passons let's say no more about it2. <a. ( = franchir) [+ frontière] to cross ; [+ porte] to go throughb. ( = donner, transmettre) to give ; [+ consigne, message] to pass on• je vous passe M. Duroy [standard] I'm putting you through to Mr Duroy ; ( = je lui passe l'appareil) here's Mr Duroyc. ( = mettre) [+ vêtement] to put ond. ( = dépasser) [+ gare, maison] to passe. ( = omettre) [+ mot, ligne] to leave out• et j'en passe ! and that's not all!f. ( = permettre) passer un caprice à qn to humour sbg. [+ examen] to takeh. [+ temps, vacances] to spendi. [+ film, diapositives] to show ; [+ disque] to playj. [+ commande] to place3. <a. ( = avoir lieu) to happen• qu'est-ce qui s'est passé ? what happened?• que se passe-t-il ? what's going on?• ça ne se passera pas comme ça ! I won't stand for that!b. ( = se mettre à soi-même) elle s'est passé de la crème solaire sur les épaules she put some sun cream on her shouldersc. (se transmettre) [+ ballon] to pass to each other ; [+ notes de cours, livre, plat] to pass around━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━+1! La traduction la plus courante de passer n'est pas to pass ; passer un examen se traduit par to take an exam.* * *pɑse
1.
1) ( franchir) to cross [fleuve, frontière]; to go through [porte, douane]; to get over [obstacle]2) ( faire franchir)3) ( dépasser) to go past, to passquand vous aurez passé le feu, tournez à droite — turn right after the lights
4) ( mettre)5) ( transmettre) to pass [objet] (à to); to pass [something] on [consigne, maladie] (à to); ( prêter) (colloq) to lend ( à quelqu'un to somebody); ( donner) (colloq) to give ( à quelqu'un to somebody)6) ( au téléphone)attends, je te la passe — hold on, here she is, I'll put her on
je vous le passe — ( sur un autre poste) I'm putting you through
7) ( se présenter à) to take, to sit [examen scolaire, test]; to have [visite médicale, entretien]c'est moi qui fais passer l'oral de français aux nouveaux — I'm taking the new pupils for the French oral
8) ( réussir) to pass [examen, test]9) ( dans le temps) to spend [temps] ( à faire doing)dépêche-toi, on ne va pas y passer la nuit! — (colloq) hurry up, or we'll be here all night!
10) ( pardonner)11) ( omettre) to skip [mot, page, paragraphe]j'en passe et des meilleures — (colloq) ( après énumération) and so on and so forth, I could go on
12) ( utiliser)passer l'aspirateur dans le salon — to hoover® GB ou vacuum the lounge
13) ( étendre)14) ( soumettre)qu'est-ce qu'elle nous a passé! — (colloq) she really went for us! (colloq)
15) ( à travers une grille) to filter [café]; to strain [jus, sauce]; to purée [légumes]16) ( enfiler) to slip [something] on [vêtement, anneau]; to slip into [robe]17) ( faire jouer) to play [disque, cassette audio]; ( projeter) to show [film, diapositives, cassette vidéo]; ( diffuser) to place [annonce]18) ( signer) to sign [contrat]; to enter into [accord]; to place [commande]; to pass [loi, décret]passer un marché — (colloq) to make a deal
19) Automobile ( enclencher)passer la troisième/la marche arrière — to go into third gear/into reverse
20) Jeux
2.
verbe intransitif1) ( parcourir son chemin) [personne, animal, véhicule, ballon] to go past ou by, to passle facteur n'est pas encore passé — the postman hasn't come ou been yet
passer à pied/à bicyclette — to walk/to cycle past
2) (se trouver, s'étendre)ligne qui passe par les centres de deux cercles — line that goes through the centres [BrE] of two circles
3) ( faire un saut)je ne fais que passer — I've just popped in GB ou dropped by for a minute
passer dans la matinée — to call in the morning GB, to come over in the morning
passer prendre quelqu'un/qch — to pick somebody/sth up
4) ( se rendre) to goil est passé devant moi — ( dans une queue) he pushed in front of me
5) ( aller au-delà) to get throughvas-y, ça passe! — go on, there's plenty of room!
il est passé par la fenêtre — ( par accident) he fell out of the window; ( pour entrer) he got in through the window
passer derrière la maison — to get round GB ou around US the back of the house
6) ( transiter)passer par — [personne] lit to pass ou go through; fig to go through
qu'est-ce qui lui est passé par la tête? — what was he/she thinking of?
un sourire passa sur ses lèvres — he/she smiled briefly
des reptiles à l'homme, en passant par le singe — from reptiles to man, including apes
7) (colloq) ( avoir son tour)il accuse le patron, ses collègues, bref, tout le monde y passe — he's accusing the boss, his colleagues - in other words, everyone in sight
que ça te plaise ou non, il va falloir y passer — whether you like it or not, there's no alternative
je sais, j'en suis déjà passé par là — I know all about that, I've been there (colloq)
8) ( négliger)passons! — ( injonction) let's hear no more about it!
passer à côté d'une question — ( involontairement) to miss the point
laisser passer quelque chose — ( délibérément) to overlook something
laisser passer plusieurs fautes — ( par inadvertance) to let several mistakes slip through
9) ( ne pas approfondir)10) (être admis, supporté) [aliment, repas] to go down; [commentaires, discours, critiques] to go down well ( auprès de with); [loi, candidat] to get through; [attitude, pensée] to be acceptedprends un peu de cognac, ça fait passer! — have a drop of brandy, it's good for the digestion
que je sois critiqué, passe encore, mais calomnié, non! — criticism is one thing, but I draw the line at slander
avec lui, la flatterie, ça ne passe pas — flattery won't work with him
passer au premier tour — Politique to be elected in the first round
passer dans la classe supérieure — to move up to the next year ou grade US
(ça) passe pour cette fois — (colloq) I'll let it go this time
11) ( se déplacer)12) ( être pris)faire passer quelqu'un/qch pour exceptionnel — to make somebody/sth out to be exceptional
13) ( disparaître) [douleur, événement] to passquand l'orage sera or aura passé — lit when the storm is over; fig when the storm dies down
ça passera — ( sa mauvaise humeur) it'll pass; ( ton chagrin) you'll get over it
la première réaction passée — once we/they calmed down
nous avons dû attendre que sa colère soit passée — we had to wait for his/her anger to subside
14) (apparaître, être projeté, diffusé) [artiste, groupe] ( sur une scène) to be appearing; (à la télévision, radio) to be on; [spectacle, film] to be on; [cassette, musique] to be playing15) ( être placé)passer avant/après — ( en importance) to come before/after
16) (colloq) ( disparaître)17) ( s'écouler) [temps] to pass, to go by18) ( se mettre à) to turn to19) ( être transmis)20) ( être promu) to be promoted to21) ( être dépensé) [argent, somme] to go on ou in ou into; [produit, matière] to go into22) (colloq) ( mourir)si tu continues à conduire comme ça, tu vas finir par y passer — if you keep driving like that, you'll kill yourself
on y passera tous, mais le plus tard sera le mieux — we've all got to go sometime, the later the better
23) ( se décolorer) [teinte, tissu] to fade24) ( filtrer) [café] to filter25) ( changer de vitesse)passer en troisième/marche arrière — to go into third/reverse
la troisième passe mal or a du mal à passer — third gear is a bit stiff
26) Jeux (au bridge, poker) to pass
3.
se passer verbe pronominal1) ( se produire) to happen2) ( être situé) to take place3) ( se dérouler) [opération, examen, négociations] to go4) ( s'écouler) [période] to go by, to pass5) ( se dispenser)se passer de — [personne] to do without [objet, activité, personne]; to go without [repas, nourriture, sommeil]
6) ( se mettre)7) ( l'un à l'autre)* * *pɒse1. vi1) (= aller) to go, to pass, to pass by, to go byIls sont passés par Paris. — They went through Paris.
2) (= faire une halte rapide) [facteur] to come, to call, (pour rendre visite) to call in, to drop inJe passerai chez vous ce soir. — I'll call in this evening., I'll drop in this evening.
Je lui ai dit en passant que j'allais me marier. — I told him in passing that I was getting married.
3) CARTES to pass4)passe encore de le penser, mais de le dire! — it's one thing to think it, but to say it!
passer sur qch [faute, détail inutile] — to pass over sth
5) (= s'écouler) [temps, jours] to go by, to pass6) (= disparaître) [douleur] to pass, to go away, [mode] to die out, [couleur, papier] to fadefaire passer à qn le goût de qch [homme] — to cure sb of his taste for sth, [femme] to cure sb of her taste for sth
7) (= franchir un obstacle, traverser) [personne] to get through, [courant, air, lumière] to get through, [liquide, café] to go throughfaire passer [message] — to get over, to get across
laisser passer [air, lumière, personne] — to let through, [occasion] to miss, [erreur] to overlook
Il m'a laissé passer. — He let me through.
8) (= être digéré, avalé) to go down10) (= être diffusé) [film, émission] to be on"Titanic" passe à la télé ce soir. — "Titanic" is on TV tonight.
Mon père passe à la radio demain soir. — My father's on the radio tomorrow night.
passer à [ennemi, opposition] — to go over to
passer aux aveux — to confess, to make a confession
passer avant qch/qn fig — to come before sth/sb
passer en seconde AUTOMOBILES — to change into second
passer pour; Il passe pour riche. — He is thought to be rich.
faire passer qn/qch pour — to make sb/sth out to be
2. vt1) (= franchir) [frontière, rivière] to cross, [douane] to go throughNous avons passé la frontière belge. — We crossed the Belgian border.
2) (= transmettre, donner)passer qch à qn — to pass sth to sb, to give sb sth
Passe-moi le sel, s'il te plaît. — Pass me the salt, please.
je vous passe M. Cousin (au téléphone) — I'm putting you through to Mr Cousin
passer qch en fraude (= faire entrer) — to smuggle sth in, (= faire sortir) to smuggle sth out
3) [temps, journée] to spendElle a passé la journée à ne rien faire. — She spent the day doing nothing.
Ils passent toujours leurs vacances au Danemark. — They always spend their holidays in Denmark.
4) (= subir) [examen] to sit, to take, [visite médicale] to haveGordon a passé ses examens la semaine dernière. — Gordon took his exams last week.
5) (= mettre) [vêtement] to slip onpasser la seconde AUTOMOBILES — to change into second
6) (= faire passer) [thé, soupe] to strain7) (= jouer) [film] to show, [disque, CD] to play, to put onOn passe "Le Kid" au cinéma cette semaine. — They're showing "The Kid" at the cinema this week.
8) (= conclure) [marché] to agree on, [accord] to reach9) (= tolérer)10) (= devenir)* * *passer verb table: aimerA vtr1 ( franchir) to cross [fleuve, pont, frontière, col]; to go through [porte, douane]; to get over [haie, obstacle]; ils ont fait passer la rivière au troupeau they took the herd across the river; il m'a fait passer la frontière he got me across the border;2 ( faire franchir) passer qch à la douane to get sth through customs; passer qch en fraude or contrebande to smuggle sth; passer qn en fraude ( vers l'intérieur) to smuggle sb in; ( vers l'extérieur) to smuggle sb out; ⇒ gauche;3 ( dépasser) to go past, to pass; quand vous aurez passé le feu, tournez à droite turn right after the lights; passer la barre des dix euros to pass the ten-euro mark; on a passé l'heure it's too late; j'ai passé l'âge I'm too old; le malade ne passera pas la nuit the patient won't last the night;4 ( mettre) passer le doigt sur la table to run one's finger over the table-top; passer la tête à la fenêtre to stick one's head out of the window; elle m'a passé le bras autour des épaules she put her arm around my shoulders; elle m'a passé la main dans les cheveux she ran her fingers through my hair;5 ( transmettre) to pass [objet] (à to); to pass [sth] on [consigne, maladie] (à to); ( prêter)○ to lend (à qn to sb); ( donner)○ to give (à qn to sb); passer le ballon au gardien de but to pass the ball to the goalkeeper; passe-moi le sel pass me the salt; passe le vin à ton père pass your father the wine; faites passer le plat entre vous pass the dish around; fais passer la bonne nouvelle à tes amis pass the good news on to your friends; elle a attrapé la grippe et l'a passée à son mari she caught flu and gave it to her husband; il m'a passé son vélo○ ( prêté) he lent me his bike; ( donné) he gave me his bike; il m'a passé son rhume he's given me his cold;6 ( au téléphone) tu peux me passer Chris? can you put Chris on?; attends, je te la passe hold on, here she is, I'll put her on; je vous le passe ( sur un autre poste) I'm putting you through; pourriez-vous me passer le poste 4834/le service de traduction? could you put me through to extension 4834/the translation department, please?; il est sorti, je vous passe sa secrétaire he's out, I'll put you through to his secretary;7 ( se présenter à) to take, to sit [examen scolaire, test]; to have [visite médicale, entretien]; passer son permis de conduire to take one's driving test; faire passer un test à qn to give sb a test; c'est moi qui fais passer l'oral de français aux nouveaux I'm taking the new pupils for the French oral;8 ( réussir) to pass [examen, test];9 ( dans le temps) to spend [temps, jour, vie, vacances] (à faire doing); passer une nuit à l'hôtel to spend a night at a hotel; nous avons passé de bons moments ensemble we've had some good times together; dépêche-toi, on ne va pas y passer la nuit○! hurry up, or we'll be here all night!; passer sa colère sur son chat/ses collègues to take one's anger out on the cat/one's colleagues;10 ( pardonner) passer qch à qn to let sb get away with sth; il ne me passe rien he doesn't let me get away with anything; elle leur passe tout she lets them get away with murder; passez-lui ses écarts de langage excuse his/her strong language; il passe tous ses caprices à sa fille he indulges his daughter's every whim; passez-moi l'expression/le terme if you'll pardon the expression/the word;11 ( omettre) to skip [mot, page, paragraphe]; je vous passe les détails I'll spare you the details; j'en passe et des meilleures ( après énumération) and so on and so forth, I could go on;12 ( utiliser) passer un chiffon humide sur les meubles to go over the furniture with a damp cloth; passer un coup de fer sur une chemise to give a shirt a quick press; n'oublie pas de passer l'aspirateur dans le salon don't forget to hoover® GB ou vacuum the lounge;13 ( étendre) en passant un peu de cire, les rayures disparaîtront if you go over it with a bit of wax, the scratches will disappear; passer un peu de baume sur une brûlure to dab some ointment on a burn; passer une couche de peinture sur qch to give sth a coat of paint;14 ( soumettre) passez le plat au four put the dish in the oven; passer la pointe d'une aiguille à la flamme to hold the point of a needle over a flame; passer le plancher à la cire to put some wax on the floor; passer qch à l'eau ( pour rincer) to give sth a rinse; ( pour obtenir une réaction) to soak sth briefly in water; qu'est-ce qu'elle nous a passé○! she really went for us○!; ⇒ peigne;15 ( à travers une grille) to filter [café]; to strain [jus de fruit, sauce]; to purée [légumes]; passer des légumes au moulin à légumes to purée vegetables;16 ( enfiler) to slip [sth] on [vêtement, anneau]; to slip into [robe]; ils ont essayé de me passer la camisole they tried to put me in a straitjacket;17 ( faire jouer) to play [disque, cassette audio]; ( projeter) to show [film, diapositives, cassette vidéo]; ( diffuser) to place [annonce];18 ( signer) to sign [contrat]; to enter into [accord]; to place [commande]; to pass [loi, décret]; passer un marché○ to make a deal;20 Aut ( enclencher) to go into [vitesse]; passer la troisième/la marche arrière to go into third gear/into reverse;B vi1 ( parcourir son chemin) [personne, animal, véhicule, ballon] to go past ou by, to pass; passer entre to pass between; regarder passer les trains to watch the trains go past ou by; nous sommes passés devant le palais/près du lac we went past the palace/the lake; passer sous/sur un pont to go under/over a bridge; l'autobus vient juste de passer the bus has just gone; le facteur n'est pas encore passé the postman hasn't been yet; quand passe le prochain car pour Caen? when is the next coach GB ou bus for Caen?; je suis passé à côté de lui/du monument I passed him/the monument; nous sommes passés près de chez toi ce matin we were near your house this morning; passer à pied/à cheval/en voiture/à bicyclette to walk/ride/drive/cycle past; un avion est passé a plane flew past overhead; il est passé en courant/boitant he ran/limped past; j'ai renversé le vase en passant I knocked over the vase as I went by; en passant, achète du lait buy some milk while you're out; le ballon est passé tout près des buts the ball narrowly missed the goal;2 (se trouver, s'étendre) la route passe à côté du lac the road runs alongside the lake; le ruisseau passe derrière la maison the stream runs behind the house; ils ont fait passer la route devant chez nous/près de l'église/derrière le village they built the road in front of our house/near the church/behind the village; ligne qui passe par les centres de deux cercles line that connects the centresGB of two circles; en faisant passer une ligne par ces deux villes drawing a line through these two towns;3 ( faire un saut) je ne fais que passer I've just popped in GB ou dropped by for a minute; quand je suis passé au marché when I went down to the market; quand je suis passé à l'école when I dropped by the school; quand je suis passé chez lui when I called in to see him GB, when I dropped by his place; passer à la banque to call in at the bank GB, to drop by the bank; il est passé déposer un dossier he came to drop off a file; il est passé quelqu'un pour toi someone was looking for you; je passerai un de ces jours I'll drop by one of these days; passer dans la matinée [plombier, représentant] to call in the morning GB, to come over in the morning; passe nous voir plus souvent! come and see us more often!; passer prendre qn/qch to pick sb/sth up; je passerai te prendre à six heures I'll pick you up at six; je passerai prendre le gâteau dans une heure I'll pick up the cake in an hour;4 ( se rendre) to go; passez au guichet numéro 3 go to counter 3; passons au salon let's go into ou through to the lounge; les contrebandiers sont passés en Espagne the smugglers have crossed into Spain; passez derrière moi, je vous montrerai le chemin follow me, I'll show you the way; il est passé devant moi, il m'est passé devant○ ( dans une queue) he pushed in front of me; passer à la visite médicale to go for a medical examination; passer devant une commission to come before a committee;5 ( aller au-delà) to get through; tu ne passeras pas, c'est trop étroit you'll never get through, it's too narrow; on ne peut pas passer à cause de la neige we can't get through because of the snow; impossible de passer tant il y avait de monde you couldn't get through, there were so many people; il est passé au rouge he went through the red lights; il n'a pas attendu le feu vert pour passer he didn't wait for the lights to turn green; il m'a fait signe de passer he waved me on; il a fait passer la vieille dame devant lui he let the old lady go first; vas-y, ça passe! ( à un automobiliste) go on, there's plenty of room!; laisser passer qn to let sb through; laisser passer une ambulance to let an ambulance through; le volet laisse passer un peu de lumière the shutter lets in a chink of light; la cloison laisse passer le bruit the partition doesn't keep the noise out; passer par-dessus bord to fall overboard; il est passé par la fenêtre ( par accident) he fell out of the window; ( pour entrer) he got in through the window; il est passé sous un train he was run over by a train; nous n'avons pas pu faire passer l'armoire par la porte we couldn't get the wardrobe through the door; à cause des travaux, on ne peut pas passer derrière la maison because of the road works, we can't get round GB ou around US the back of the house; ⇒ caravane, casser;6 ( transiter) passer par [personne] lit to pass ou go through; fig to go through; nous sommes passés par Édimbourg we went via Edinburgh; ça ira plus vite en passant par la Belgique it'll be quicker to go via Belgium; la manifestation passera dans cette avenue the demonstration will come along this avenue; passer par qn pour faire qch to do sth through sb; passer par de rudes épreuves to go through the mill, to have a rough time; passer par l'opératrice to go through the operator; passer par une rue to go along a street; passer par l'escalier de service to use the service stairs; nous sommes passés par une agence matrimoniale we met through a marriage bureau; il est passé par tous les stades de la formation he went through the various different stages of training; passer au bord de la faillite to come very close to bankruptcy; il est passé par une très bonne école he went to a very good school; la formation par laquelle il est passé the training (that) he had; il dit tout ce qui lui passe par la tête he always says the first thing that comes into his head; je ne sais jamais ce qui te passe par la tête I never know what's going on in your head; une idée m'est passée par la tête an idea occurred to me; mais qu'est-ce qui lui est passé par la tête? what on earth was he/she thinking of?; ça fait du bien par où ça passe○! [aliment, boisson] I needed that!; un éclair de malice passa dans ses yeux his/her eyes gleamed with mischief, he/she had a mischievous glint in his/her eyes; un sourire passa sur ses lèvres he/she smiled for a second; en passant par including; des reptiles à l'homme, en passant par le singe from reptiles to man, including apes; ⇒ maire;7 ○( avoir son tour) il accuse le patron, ses collègues, le cuisinier, bref, tout le monde y passe he's accusing the boss, his colleagues, the cook-in other words, everyone in sight; le rock, le blues, la musique classique, tout y passe rock, blues, classical music, you name it; que ça te plaise ou non, il va falloir y passer whether you like it or not, there's no alternative; la nouvelle secrétaire va y passer aussi the new secretary will get it as well; on ne peut pas faire autrement que d'en passer par là there is no other way around it; je sais, j'en suis déjà passé par là I know all about that, I've been there○;8 ( négliger) passer sur to pass over [question, défaut, erreur]; je préfère passer sur ce point pour l'instant I'd rather not dwell on that point for the moment; il est or a passé sur les détails he didn't go into the details; si l'on passe sur les frais de déplacement if we ignore the travel expenses; passons (là-dessus)! ( injonction) let's hear no more about it!; ( pardon) let's say no more about it!; passer à côté d'une question ( volontairement) to sidestep a question; ( involontairement) to miss the point; laisser passer qch ( délibérément) to let sth pass, to overlook sth; ( par inadvertance) to let sth slip through, to overlook sth; laisser passer une occasion, passer à côté d'une occasion to miss an opportunity, to let an opportunity slip ou go by; laisser passer quelques erreurs par gentillesse to overlook a few errors out of soft-heartedness; on ne peut pas laisser passer une telle erreur we cannot let a mistake like that through; le réviseur a laissé passer plusieurs fautes the proofreader let several mistakes slip through; il leur laisse passer tous leurs caprices he indulges their every whim;9 ( ne pas approfondir) en passant in passing; notons en passant que we should note in passing that; en passant, il a ajouté que in passing, he added that; soit dit en passer incidentally;10 (être admis, supporté) [aliment, repas] to go down; [commentaires, discours, critiques] to go down well (auprès de with); [loi, règlement, mesure] to get through; [attitude, pensée, doctrine] to be accepted; [candidat] to get through; je ne me sens pas bien, ce doit être le concombre qui passe mal I don't feel well, it must be the cucumber; prends un peu de cognac, ça fait passer! have a drop of brandy, it's good for the digestion; vos critiques sont mal passées/ne sont pas passées your criticism went down badly/didn't go down well; ils n'ont jamais pu faire passer leur réforme/leurs idées they never managed to get their reform through/their ideas accepted; que je sois critiqué, passe encore, mais calomnié, non! criticism is one thing, but I draw the line at slander; avec lui, la flatterie, ça ne passe pas flattery won't work with him; passer au premier tour Pol to be elected in the first round; passer dans la classe supérieure to move up to the next year ou grade US; (ça) passe pour cette fois○ this time, I'll let it go;11 ( se déplacer) passer de France en Espagne to leave France and enter Spain; passer de la salle à manger au salon to move from the dining room to the lounge; passer à l'ennemi to go over to the enemy; passer dans le camp adverse to go over to the other side; passer sous contrôle de l'ONU/de l'État to be taken over by the UN/the government; passer sous contrôle ennemi to fall into enemy hands; passer de main en main to be passed around; passer constamment d'un sujet à l'autre to flit from one subject to another; passer d'un amant à un autre to go from one lover to the next; passer de l'opulence à la misère to go from extreme wealth to extreme poverty; passer de la théorie à la pratique to put theory into practice; leur nombre pourrait passer à 700 their number could reach 700; passer à un taux supérieur/inférieur to go up to a higher rate/down to a lower rate; faire passer qch de 200 à 300 to increase sth from 200 to 300; faire passer qch de 300 à 200 to decrease sth from 300 to 200; expression passée en proverbe expression that has become a proverb;12 ( être pris) passer pour un imbécile/pour être une belle ville to be generally thought of as stupid/as a beautiful town (auprès de by); passer pour un génie to pass as a genius; son excentricité passe pour de l'intelligence his/her eccentricity passes for intelligence; il passe pour l'inventeur de l'ordinateur he's supposed to have invented computers; passer pour quelqu'un d'autre to be taken for someone else; il pourrait passer pour un Américain he could be taken for an American; il veut passer pour un grand homme he wants to be seen as a great man; faire passer qn/qch pour exceptionnel/exemplaire to make sb/sth out to be exceptional/a model of perfection; se faire passer pour malade to pretend to be ill; se faire passer pour mort to fake one's own death; il se fait passer pour mon frère he passes himself off as my brother; se faisant passer pour un agent d'assurance by passing himself off as ou by impersonating an insurance salesman; il m'a fait passer pour un imbécile he made me look like a fool;13 ( disparaître) [douleur, événement] to pass; quand l'orage sera or aura passé lit when the storm is over; fig when the storm dies down; ça passera ( sa mauvaise humeur) it'll pass; ( ton chagrin) you'll get over it; la première réaction passée, il a été possible de faire once we/they calmed down it was possible to do; nous avons dû attendre que sa colère soit passée we had to wait for his/her anger to subside; passer de mode [vêtement, style, chanson, expression] to go out of fashion; cette mode est vite passée or a vite passé that fashion was short-lived; faire passer à qn l'envie or le goût de faire to cure sb of the desire to do; les sales gosses, je vais leur faire passer l'envie or l'habitude de tirer sur ma sonnette! those damn kids, I'll teach them to ring my bell!; ce médicament fait passer les maux d'estomac this medicine relieves stomach ache; cette mauvaise habitude te passera it's a bad habit you'll grow out of; ça lui passera avant que ça me reprenne○ it won't last;14 (apparaître, être projeté, diffusé) [artiste, groupe] ( sur une scène) to be appearing; (à la télévision, radio) to be on; [spectacle, film] to be on; [cassette, musique] to be playing; mon ami passe à la télévision ce soir my friend is on television tonight; les films portugais qui passent à la télévision/au Rex/à Paris the Portuguese films (that are) on television/on at the Rex/on in Paris;15 ( être placé) passer avant/après ( en importance) to come before/after; la santé passe avant tout health comes first; il fait passer sa famille avant ses amis he puts his family before his friends;16 ○( disparaître) où étais-tu (encore) passé? where (on earth) did you get to?; où est passé mon livre/le chat? where has my book/the cat got to?;17 ( s'écouler) [temps] to pass, to go by; deux ans ont passé depuis l'événement two years have passed since it happened; le temps a passé, et les gens ont oublié time has passed and people have forgotten; je ne vois pas le temps passer I don't know where the time goes; le week-end a or est passé trop vite the weekend went too quickly;18 ( se mettre à) to turn to; passons aux choses sérieuses let's turn to serious matters; nous pouvons passer à l'étape suivante we can move on to the next stage; passons à autre chose let's change the subject; nous allons passer au vote let's vote now; passer à l'offensive to take the offensive;19 ( être transmis) passer de père en fils/de génération en génération/à ses héritiers to be handed down from father to son/from generation to generation/to one's heirs; l'expression est passée dans la langue the expression has become part of the language; ça finira par passer dans les mœurs it'll eventually become common practice; il a fait passer son émotion dans la salle he transmitted his emotion to the audience;20 ( être promu) to be promoted to; il est passé général he's been promoted to general; elle est passée maître dans l'art de mentir she's an accomplished liar;21 ( être dépensé) [argent, somme] to go on ou in ou into; [produit, matière] to go into; la moitié de mon salaire passe en remboursement de mes dettes half my salary goes on paying off my debts; toutes mes économies y sont passées○ all my savings went into it;22 ○( mourir) y passer to die; si tu continues à conduire comme ça, tu vas finir par y passer if you keep driving like that, you'll kill yourself; on y passera tous, mais le plus tard sera le mieux we've all got to go sometime, the later the better;25 ( changer de vitesse) passer en troisième/marche arrière to go into third/reverse; la troisième passe mal or a du mal à passer third gear is a bit stiff; passer de seconde en troisième to go from second into third;26 Jeux (au bridge, poker) to pass.C se passer vpr1 ( se produire) to happen; ça s'est passé en Chine/à Pékin/le matin/au bon moment it happened in China/in Beijing/in the morning/at the right time; il ne se passe jamais rien dans ce village nothing ever happens in this village; que se passe-t-il?, qu'est-ce qui se passe? what's happening, what's going on?; tout se passe comme si le dollar avait été dévalué it's as if the dollar was devalued;2 ( être situé) to take place; la scène se passe au Viêt Nam/dans les années trente/de nos jours the scene is set in Vietnam/in the thirties/in the present day;3 ( se dérouler) [opération, examen, négociations] to go; comment s'est passée la réunion? how did the meeting go?; tout s'est bien passé everything went well; ça s'est mal passé it didn't go well; la réunion s'est très mal passée the meeting went very badly; tout s'est passé très vite it all happened very fast; ça va mal se passer pour toi si tu continues! you're going to be in trouble if you carry on GB ou continue doing that!; ça ne se passera pas comme ça! I won't leave it at that!;4 ( s'écouler) [période] to go by, to pass; il s'est passé deux ans depuis, deux ans se sont passés depuis that was two years ago; il ne se passe guère de jour (sans) qu'elle ne trouve à se plaindre hardly a day goes by without her finding something to complain about; attendons que ça se passe let's wait till it's over; nos soirées se passaient à regarder la télévision we spent the evenings watching television; ⇒ jeunesse;5 ( se dispenser) se passer de [personne] to do without [objet, activité, personne]; to go without [repas, nourriture, sommeil]; nous nous sommes passés de voiture we did without a car; nous nous passerons de lui we'll do without him; je me passerais bien de tes remarques I can do without your comments; se passer de commentaires to speak for itself; ne pas pouvoir se passer de faire not to be able to help oneself from doing; se passer des services de qn to do without sb's services;6 ( se mettre) se passer la langue sur les lèvres/la main dans les cheveux to run one's tongue over one's lips/one's fingers through one's hair; se passer la main sur le front to put a hand to one's forehead;7 ( l'un à l'autre) ils se sont passé des documents they exchanged some documents; nous nous sommes passé le virus we caught the virus from each other.[pase] verbe intransitif (auxiliaire être)A.[EXPRIME UN DÉPLACEMENT]passer dans: pour empêcher les poids lourds de passer dans le village to stop lorries from driving ou going through the villagea. [devant moi] go in front of me if you can't seeb. [devant tout le monde] go to the front if you can't seepasser sous une voiture [se faire écraser] to get run over (by a car)des péniches passaient sur le canal barges were going past ou were sailing on the canal[fugitivement]un sourire passa sur ses lèvres a smile played about her lips, she smiled briefly3. [emprunter un certain itinéraire]si vous passez à Paris, venez me voir come and see me if you're in Paris[fleuve, route] to go, to run5. [sur un parcours régulier - démarcheur, représentant] to call ; [ - bateau, bus, train] to come ou to go pastle facteur passe deux fois par jour the postman delivers ou comes twice a dayle bateau/train est déjà passé the boat/train has already gone ou leftle prochain bateau passera dans deux jours the next boat will call ou is due in two days6. [faire une visite] to callj'ai demandé au médecin de passer I asked the doctor to call (in) ou to come ou to visit7. [franchir une limite] to get through8. [s'infiltrer] to passpasser dans le sang to pass into ou to enter the bloodstreamle café doit passer lentement [dans le filtre] the coffee must filter through slowly9. [aller, se rendre] to gooù sont passées mes lunettes? where have my glasses got ou disappeared to?passer de Suisse en France to cross over ou to go from Switzerland to FranceB.[EXPRIME UNE ACTION]1. [se soumettre à]ce matin, je suis passé au tableau I was asked to explain something at the blackboard this morningy passer (familier) : je ne veux pas me faire opérer — il faudra bien que tu y passes, pourtant! I don't want to have an operation — you're going to have to!avec lui, toutes les femmes du service y sont passées he's had all the women in his department2. [être accepté] to passelle est passée à l'écrit mais pas à l'oral she got through ou she passed the written exam but not the oralton petit discours est bien passé your little speech went down well ou was well receivedle film passe mal sur le petit écran/en noir et blanc the film just isn't the same on TV/in black and whitepasse (encore): l'injurier, passe encore, mais le frapper! it's one thing to insult him, but quite another to hit him!3. [être transmis] to gola ferme est passée de père en fils depuis cinq générations the farm has been handed down from father to son for five generationsla locution est passée du latin à l'anglais the phrase came ou passed into English from Latin4. [entrer] to passc'est passé dans le langage courant it's passed into ou it's now part of everyday speechc'est passé dans les moeurs it's become standard ou normal practice5. [être utilisé, absorbé] to gosi les socialistes passent if the socialists get in ou are electedRADIO & TÉLÉVISIONpasser à la radio [émission, personne] to be on the radio ou the aira. [personne] to be ou to appear on televisionb. [film] to be on television8. DROIT [comparaître]passer devant le tribunal to come up ou to go before the courtpasser en correctionnelle ≃ to go before the magistrate's courtC.[EXPRIME UN CHANGEMENT D'ÉTAT]1. [accéder - à un niveau]2. [devenir] to become3. [dans des locutions verbales]passer de... à [changer d'état]: passer de l'état liquide à l'état gazeux to pass ou to change from the liquid to the gaseous statela production est passée de 20 à 30/de 30 à 20 tonnes output has gone (up) from 20 to 30/(down) from 30 to 20 tonnescomment êtes-vous passé du cinéma au théâtre? how did you move ou make the transition from the cinema to the stage?il passe d'une idée à l'autre he jumps ou flits from one idea to another4. AUTOMOBILEpasser en troisième to change ou go into third (gear)D.[EXPRIME UNE ÉVOLUTION DANS LE TEMPS]la journée est passée agréablement the day went off ou passed pleasantly2. [s'estomper - douleur] to fade (away), to wear off ; [ - malaise] to disappear ; [ - mode, engouement] to die out ; [ - enthousiasme] to wear off, to fade ; [ - beauté] to fade, to wane ; [ - chance, jeunesse] to pass ; [ - mauvaise humeur] to pass, to vanish ; [ - rage, tempête] to die down ; [ - averse] to die down, to stopfaire passer: ce médicament fait passer la douleur très rapidement this medicine relieves pain very quickly[se faner - fleur] to wilt[pâlir - teinte]4. (auxiliaire avoir) (vieilli) [mourir]il a passé cette nuit he passed on ou away last night————————[pase] verbe transitif (auxiliaire avoir)A.[EXPRIME UN DÉPLACEMENT]1. [traverser - pont, col de montagne] to go over (inseparable), to cross ; [ - écluse] to go through (inseparable)2. [franchir - frontière, ligne d'arrivée] to crosspasser l'arrêt de l'autobus [le manquer] to miss one's bus stoppasser le cap Horn to (go) round Cape Horn, to round the Capequand on passe les 1 000 mètres d'altitude when you go over 1,000 metres highl'or a passé les 400 dollars l'once gold has broken through the $ 400 an ounce mark4. [transporter] to ferry ou to take across (separable)5. [introduire]passer de la drogue/des cigarettes en fraude to smuggle drugs/cigarettes6. [engager - partie du corps] to putpasser son bras autour de la taille de quelqu'un to put ou to slip one's arm round somebody's waistje n'arrive pas à passer ma tête dans l'encolure de cette robe my head won't go through the neck of the dress7. [faire aller - instrument] to runpasse le balai dans l'escalier give the stairs a sweep, sweep the stairs9. SPORT [franchir - obstacle, haie] to jump (over)[transmettre - ballon] to passB.[EXPRIME UNE ACTION]1. [se soumettre à - permis de conduire] to take ; [ - examen] to take, to sit (UK) ; [ - entretien] to have ; [ - scanner, visite médicale] to have, to go for (inseparable)il a passé l'écrit, mais attendons l'oral he's passed the written exam, but let's see what happens in the oralje passe toutes les descriptions dans ses romans I miss out ou I skip all the descriptions in her novels4. [tolérer]passez-moi l'expression/le mot if you'll pardon the expression/excuse the term5. [soumettre à l'action de]passer des légumes au mixeur to put vegetables through the blender, to blend vegetablespasser quelque chose sous l'eau to rinse something ou to give something a rinse under the tappasser quelque chose à quelqu'un (familier) to give somebody a good dressing-down, to tick somebody off (UK)se faire passer quelque chose (familier) to get a good ticking off (UK), to get a good chewing-out (US)6. [donner, transmettre - généralement] to pass, to hand, to give ; [ - maladie] to give ; [ - au téléphone] to put through (separable)je te passe Fred here's Fred, I'll hand you over to Fredpasse-moi Annie let me talk to Annie, put Annie on7. [rendre public - annonce]8. (familier) [prêter] to lendje vais te passer de la crème dans le dos I'm going to put ou to rub some cream on your back11. [enfiler - vêtement] to slip ou to put on (separable)12. AUTOMOBILEpasser la troisième to change ou to shift into third gear[diapositive] to showRADIO [émission] to broadcast14. COMMERCE [conclure - entente] to conclude, to come to (inseparable), to reach ; [ - marché] to agree on (inseparable), to strike, to reach ; [ - commande] to placeC.[EXPRIME UNE NOTION TEMPORELLE]1. [employer - durée] to spendpassez un bon week-end/une bonne soirée! have a nice weekend/evening!as-tu passé une bonne nuit? did you sleep well last night?, did you have a good night?elle ne passera pas la nuit she won't see the night out, she won't last the night3. [assouvir - envie] to satisfy————————passer après verbe plus prépositionil faut le faire libérer, le reste passe après we must get him released, everything else is secondary————————passer avant verbe plus prépositionto go ou to come beforeses intérêts passent avant tout his own interests come before anything else, he puts his own interests before everything else————————passer par verbe plus préposition1. [dans une formation] to go through2. [dans une évolution] to go through, to undergole pays est passé par toutes les formes de gouvernement the country has experienced every form of government3. [recourir à] to go throughpour comprendre, il faut être passé par là you have to have experienced it to understand————————passer pour verbe plus préposition1. [avec nom] to be thought of asje vais passer pour un idiot I'll be taken for ou people will take me for an idiot2. [avec adj]3. [avec verbe]elle passe pour descendre d'une famille noble she is said to be descended from an aristocratic family————————passer sur verbe plus préposition[excuser] to overlookpassons sur les détails let's pass over ou skip the detailspassons! let's say no more about it!, let's drop it!tu me l'avais promis, mais passons! you promised me, but never mind!————————se passer verbe pronominal intransitifla soirée s'est passée tranquillement the evening went by ou passed quietlyqu'est-ce qui se passe? what's happening?, what's going on?il se passe que ton frère vient d'être arrêté, (voilà ce qui se passe)! your brother's just been arrested, that's what's!il ne se passe pas une semaine sans qu'il perde de l'argent aux courses not a week goes by without him losing money on the horses3. [se dérouler - dans certaines conditions] to go (off)l'opération s'est bien/mal passée the operation went (off) smoothly/badlysi tout se passe bien, nous y serons demain if all goes well, we'll be there tomorrowtout se passe comme prévu everything's going according to plan ou going as planned————————se passer verbe pronominal transitifil se passa un peigne/la main dans les cheveux he ran a comb/his fingers through his hair————————se passer de verbe pronominal plus préposition1. [vivre sans] to do ou to go without2. [s'abstenir]3. [ne pas avoir besoin de]————————en passant locution adverbiale1. [dans la conversation] in passingfaire une remarque en passant to remark in passing, to make a casual remark2. [sur son chemin]il s'arrête de temps à autre en passant he calls on his way by ou past from time to time————————en passant par locution prépositionnelle————————1. [dans l'espace] vial'avion va à Athènes en passant par Londres the plane goes to Athens via London ou stops in London on its way to Athens2. [dans une énumération] (and) including -
16 ὅς
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ① as relative pron. who, which, what, that (Hom.+). On its use s. B-D-F §293–97; 377–80; Rydbeck 98–118; W-S. §24; Rob. 711–26, and for ancient Gk. in gener. Kühner-G. II 399ff; Schwyzer II 639–41.ⓐ As a general rule, the relative pron. agrees in gender and number w. the noun or pron. to which it refers (i.e. its antecedent); its case is determined by the verb, noun, or prep. that governs it: ὁ ἀστήρ, ὸ̔ν εἶδον Mt 2:9. ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὅν ἐγὼ καταγγέλλω ὑμῖν Ac 17:3. Ἰουδαῖον, ᾧ (sc. ἦν) ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 13:6. ὁ Ἰουδαῖος …, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος Ro 2:29. Ἰσραηλίτης, ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν J 1:47. οὗτος, περὶ οὗ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα Lk 9:9 and very oft.ⓑ A demonstrative pron. is freq. concealed within the relative pron.:α. in such a way that both pronouns stand in the same case: ὅς the one who ὅς οὐ λαμβάνει Mt 10:38; sim. Mk 4:9; 9:40 (the three w. implied condition). οὗ of the one whose J 18:26. ᾧ to the one to whom Ro 6:16. ὅν the one whom (or someth. sim.) Mk 15:12; J 1:45. οἷς to those for whom Mt 20:23. οὕς those whom Mk 3:13; J 5:21. ὅ that which, what Mt 10:27.—A prep. governing the relative belongs in certain pass. to the (omitted) demonstr. pron. alone: παρʼ ὅ Ro 12:3; Gal 1:8; ὑπὲρ ὅ (ἅ) 1 Cor 10:13; 2 Cor 12:6; Phlm 21; πρὸς ἅ 2 Cor 5:10; εἰς ὅν J 6:29. In others it must be added to both pronouns: ἐν ᾧ in that in which 2 Cor 11:12; 1 Pt 2:12; 3:16 (these passages in 1 Pt may be classed under 1kγ also). ἐν οἷς Phil 4:11. ὑπὲρ οὑ because of that for which 1 Cor 10:30. ἀφʼ ὧν from the persons from whom 2 Cor 2:3.—The much disputed pass. ἑταῖρε, ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 would belong here if we were to supply the words necessary to make it read about as follows: friend, (are you misusing the kiss) for that (purpose) for which you are here? (Wlh.; EKlostermann) or thus: in connection with that (=the purposes), for which (=for the realization of which) you have appeared (do you kiss me)? (Rdm.2 78). Friend, are you here for this purpose? FRehkopf, ZNW 52, ’61, 109–15. But s. βב and iβ below.β. But the two pronouns can also stand in different cases; in such instances the demonstr. pron. is nearly always in the nom. or acc.א. in the nom. οὗ one whose Ac 13:25. ὧν those whose Ro 4:7 (Ps 31:1). ᾧ the one to or for whom Lk 7:43; 2 Pt 1:9. οἷς those to whom Mt 19:11; Ro 15:21 (Is 52:15). ὅ that (nom.) which (acc.) Mt 13:12; 25:29; 26:13; Mk 11:23; Lk 12:3. Likew. ἅ Lk 12:20. ὅν he whom J 3:34; 4:18; Ac 10:21. ἐφʼ ὅν the one about whom Hb 7:13.ב. in the acc. ὧν the things of which J 13:29. ᾧ the one (in) whom 2 Ti 1:12. So also w. a prep.: ἐν ᾧ anything by which Ro 14:21. ἐν οἷς things in which 2 Pt 2:12. ἐφʼ ὅ that upon which Lk 5:25. περὶ ὧν the things of which Ac 24:13. ἐφʼ οἷς from the things of which Ro 6:21 (this passage perh. uses a commercial metaphor, for pap s. Mayser II/2, 434f §121). εἰς ὸ̔ν the one in whom Ro 10:14a.—So Mt 26:50 (s. bα above), if the words to be supplied are about as follows: friend, (do that) for which you have come! (so ESchwartz, ByzZ 25, 1925, 154f; EOwen, JTS 29, 1928, 384–86; WSpiegelberg, ZNW 28, 1929, 341–43; FZorell, VD 9, 1929, 112–16; sim. PMaas, Byz.-Neugriech. Jahrb. 8, ’31, 99; 9, ’32, 64; WEltester: OCullmann Festschr., ’62, 70–91; but s. iβ end.—S. Jos., Bell. 2, 615 at πάρειμι 1a).ג. Only in isolated instances does the demonstr. pron. to be supplied stand in another case: οὗ = τούτῳ, οὗ in him of whom Ro 10:14b. παρʼ ὧν = τούτοις, παρʼ ὧν Lk 6:34.ⓒ Constructions peculiar in some respectα. The pleonastic use of the pers. pron. after ὅς (Mlt. 94f; B-D-F §297) γυνὴ ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25 is found in older Gk. (Hyperid., Euxen. 3 ὧν … τούτων.—Kühner-G. II 433f), and is not unknown in later Gk. (POxy 117, 15), but above all is suggested by Semitic languages (LXX; GrBar 2:1; Thackeray 46; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f); the omission of αὐτῆς in the v.l. is in line w. Gk. usage. οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ 1 Pt 2:24 v.l. οὗ καὶ πολλὰ αὐτοῦ συγγράματα EpilMosq 2. In a quot. ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται … ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 = Am 9:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9. Esp. freq. in Rv 3:8; 7:2, 9; 9:11 v.l.; 13:8, 12; 20:8.β. constructions ‘ad sensum’א. a relative in the sing. refers to someth. in the pl. οὐρανοῖς … ἐξ οὗ (οὐρανοῦ) Phil 3:20.ב. a relative in the pl. refers to a sing. (Jdth 4:8 γερουσία, οἵ) πλῆθος πολύ …, οἳ ἦλθον Lk 6:17f. κατὰ πόλιν πᾶσαν, ἐν αἷς Ac 15:36. Cp. ἤδη δευτέραν ἐπιστολήν, ἐν αἷς (i.e. ἐν ταῖς δυσὶν ἐπιστ.) 2 Pt 3:1.ג. the relative conforms to the natural gender rather than the grammatical gender of its antecedent noun τέκνα μου, οὕς Gal 4:19; cp. 2 J 1; Phlm 10. ἔθνη, οἵ Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); cp. 26:17. παιδάριον, ὅς J 6:9. θηρίον, ὅς Rv 13:14. ὀνόματα, οἵ 3:4 v.l. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, ἐν οἷς Phil 2:15. W. ref. to Christ, τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ Col 2:19.ⓓ Attraction (or assimilation) of the relative. Just as in Hdt. and freq. Att., ins, pap, LXX, the simple relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ is somet. attracted to the case of its antecedent, even though the relationship of the relative within its own clause would demand a different case.α. In most instances it is the acc. of the rel. that is attracted to the gen. or dat. of the antecedent: περὶ πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται Mt 18:19. τῆς διαθήκης ἧς ὁ θεὸς διέθετο Ac 3:25. Cp. Mt 24:50b; Mk 7:13; Lk 2:20; 3:19; 5:9; 9:43; 15:16; J 4:14; 7:31; 15:20; 17:5; 21:10; Ac 1:1; 2:22; 22:10; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 1:6; 10:8, 13; Eph 2:10; 2 Th 1:4; Jd 15 al.—When the antecedent is an understood but unexpressed demonstr. pron. (s. b, beg.) that would stand in the gen. or dat., the acc. of a relative pron. can be attracted to this gen. or dat.: οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν is really οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ ἑώρακαν Lk 9:36 (Schwyzer II 641); ἅ takes on the case of τούτων which, in turn, is omitted (so already Soph., Pla., et al.).—23:14, 41; Ac 8:24; 21:19, 24; 22:15; 25:11; 26:16; Ro 15:18; 1 Cor 7:1; Eph 3:20; Hb 5:8. ὧν = τούτων, οὕς J 17:9; 2 Cor 12:17. οἷς = τούτοις, ἅ Lk 24:25.β. The dat. of the relative is less frequently attracted (B-D-F §294, 2; Rob. 717) ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς (=ᾗ) ἀνελήμφθη Ac 1:22 (cp. Lev 23:15; 25:50; Bar 1:19); Eph 1:6; 4:1; 1 Ti 4:6 v.l.; κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ = κατέν. τοῦ θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστ. Ro 4:17. διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα 2 Cor 1:4.γ. In relative clauses that consist of subject, predicate, and copula, the relative pron. somet. agrees in gender and number not w. the noun to which it refers, but w. the predicate if it is the subj. and, conversely, w. the subj. if it is the pred. of its own clause: πνεύματι …, ὅς ἐστιν ἀρραβών Eph 1:14 v.l. τῷ σπέρματί σου, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστός Gal 3:16. τὴν μάχαιραν τοῦ πνεύματος, ὅ ἐστιν ῥῆμα θεοῦ Eph 6:17.—Rv 4:5; 5:8.δ. Inverse attraction occurs when the relative pronoun attracts its antecedent to its own case (as early as Hom.; also Soph., Oed. Rex 449; s. Kühner-G. II 413; Schwyzer II 641; B-D-F §295; Rob. 717f); τὸν ἄρτον ὸ̔ν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία … ἐστιν; = ὁ ἄρτος ὅν … 1 Cor 10:16. λίθον, ὸ̔ν ἀπεδοκίμασαν … οὗτος ἐγενήθη (Ps 117:22) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; 1 Pt 2:7 v.l.—παντὶ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ Lk 12:48. ὅρκον, ὸ̔ν ὤμοσεν (=μνησθῆναι ὅρκου ὅν) 1:73 (s. W-S. §24, 7 note). τοὺς λίθους, οὓς εἶδες, ἀποβεβλημένους, οὗτοι … ἐφόρεσαν Hs 9, 13, 3. Cp. 1J 2:25.ε. Attraction can, as in earlier Gk. (Thu. 2, 70, 4), fail to take place when the relative clause is more distinctly separated fr. its antecedent by additional modifiers of the noun and by the importance attaching to the content of the relative clause itself (B-D-F §294, 1; Rob. 714f): τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος Hb 8:2. But s. also Mk 13:19; J 2:22; 4:5; Ac 8:32; 1 Ti 4:3; Tit 1:2; Phlm 10; Hb 9:7; Rv 1:20.ⓔ The noun which is the antecedent of a relative clause can be incorporated into the latterα. without abbreviating the constr. and without attraction of the case: ᾗ οὐ δοκεῖτε ὥρᾳ = τῇ ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ δοκ. Mt 24:44; cp. Lk 12:40; 17:29, 30. ἃ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα 24:1. ὸ̔ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον J 6:14. ὸ̔ θέλω ἀγαθόν Ro 7:19.β. w. abbreviation, in that a prep. normally used twice is used only once: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι κρίνετε κριθήσεσθε = ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε Mt 7:2a. Cp. vs. 2b; Mk 4:24. ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ = ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐν ᾧ ἦν J 11:6. καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον = κατὰ τὸν τρόπον, καθʼ ὅν Ac 15:11.γ. w. a change in case, due mostly to attractionא. of the relative pron. περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίησεν πονηρῶν = περὶ πάντων πονηρῶν, ἃ ἐπ. Lk 3:19. περὶ πασῶν ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων = περὶ πασῶν δυνάμεων, ἃς εἶδον 19:37. αἰτίαν … ὧν ἐγὼ ὑπενόουν πονηρῶν Ac 25:18.—The dat. of the relative is also attracted to other cases: ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας = ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, ᾖ Mt 24:38; Lk 1:20; 17:27; Ac 1:2. ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας Col 1:6, 9.ב. of the noun to which the rel. refers: ὸ̔ν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἰωάννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη = Ἰωάννης ὸ̔ν κτλ. Mk 6:16 εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς = τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε Ro 6:17.δ. The analysis is doubtful in passages like περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων = περὶ τῶν λόγων οὓς κατηχήθης or τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης Lk 1:4. ἄγοντες παρʼ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνι Ac 21:16 must acc. to the sense = ἄγοντες πρὸς Μνάσωνα, ἵνα ξενισθῶμεν παρʼ αὐτῷ. S. B-D-F §294, 5; Rob. 719.ⓕ The prep. can be omitted before the relative pron. if it has already been used before the antecedent noun: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ὧ.) Ac 1:21. εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὅ (=εἰς ὅ) 13:2. ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν (=ἀφʼ ὧν) vs. 38. Cp. 26:2. ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ᾧ) Rv 18:6.ⓖ The neut. is usedα. in explanations, esp. of foreign words and of allegories: ὅ ἐστιν which or that is, which means: βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης Hb 7:2; cp. Mt 27:33; Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; 15:42. Also ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον Mt 1:23; Mk 5:41; Ac 4:36; cp. J 1:38, 41f. ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενος κρανίου τόπος Mk 15:22 v.l. (for μεθερμηνευόμενον). τόπος, ὸ̔ λέγεται, Ἑβραϊστὶ Γολγοθά J 19:17.—S. also αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον Mk 15:16. λεπτὰ δὺο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 12:42. τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἡ ἐκκλησία Col 1:24. πλεονέκτης ὅ ἐστιν εἰδωλολάτρης Eph 5:5. τὴν ἀγάπην ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος Col 3:14.—B-D-F §132, 2.β. when the relative pron. looks back upon a whole clause: τοῦτον τ. Ἰησοῦν ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ πάντες ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν μάρτυρες Ac 2:32; cp. 3:15; 11:30; 26:9f; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29; 1 Pt 2:8; Rv 21:8.γ. ὅ is to be understood as an obj. acc. and gains its content fr. what immediately follows in these places (s. W-S. §24, 9; Rob. 715): ὸ̔ ἀπέθανεν, τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν ἐφάπαξ = τὸν θάνατον, ὸ̔ν ἀπέθανεν κτλ. what he died, i.e. the death he suffered, he suffered for sin Ro 6:10a; cp. vs. 10b. ὸ̔ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί the life that I now live in the flesh Gal 2:20.ⓗ The relative is used w. consecutive or final mng. (result or purpose): τίς ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου, ὸ̔ς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν; who has known the mind of the Lord, so that he could instruct him? 1 Cor 2:16 (cp. Is 40:13). ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ παρέξῃ τοῦτο he is worthy that you should grant him this Lk 7:4. ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου …, ὸ̔ς κατασκευάσει Mt 11:10. ἔπεμψα Τιμόθεον …, ὸ̔ς ὑμᾶς ἀναμνήσει 1 Cor 4:17. ἔχετε μεθʼ ἑαυτῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐργάσεσθε τὸ καλόν 21:2.ⓘ taking the place of the interrogative pron.α. in indirect questions (Soph., Oed. Rex 1068; Thu. 1, 136, 4; Attic ins of 411 B.C. in Meisterhans3-Schw.; pap [Witkowski 30, 7]; oft. Joseph. [Schmidt 369]; Just., D. 44, 4 διʼ ἧς ὁδοῦ). ὸ̔ ἐγὼ ποιῶ what I am doing J 13:7. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7 (Just., D. 9, 1 οὐ γὰρ οἶδας ὸ̔ λέγεις).—J 18:21.β. NT philology has generally dismissed the proposition that ὅς is used in direct questions (Mlt. 93; B-D-F §300, 2; Radermacher2 78; PMaas [see 1bβב above]). An unambiguous example of it is yet to be found. Even the ins on a goblet in Dssm., LO 100ff [LAE 125–31], ET 33, 1922, 491–93 leaves room for doubt. Therefore also the translation of ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 as ‘what are you here for?’ (so Goodsp., Probs. 41–43; similarly, as early as Luther, later Dssm.; JWilson, ET 41, 1930, 334) has been held suspect. S. ZNW 52, ’61, 109ff.—Rob. 725 doubts the interrogative here, but Mlt-Turner 50 inclines toward it. If further proof for interrogative use of ὅς can be found, lit.-crit. considerations (s. vv. 14–16) invite attention to the v.l. (s. Tdf. app.) ἐφʼ ᾦ, a combination used in commercial documents (PGrenf II, 17, 2; 5; Mayser II/1 p. 215); the colloquial use suggests the sense: What deal did you make?—See also 1bβב above.ⓙ combined w. particlesα. with ἄν (ἐάν), s. ἄν I. b.β. with γέ (s. γέ aβ and cp. PFlor 370, 9) Ro 8:32.γ. w. δήποτε whatever J 5:3(4) v.l. (the vv.ll. vary betw. οἵῳ and ᾧ, δηποτοῦν and δήποτε).δ. w. καί who also Mk 3:19; Lk 6:13f; 7:49 al.ε. with περ = ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ (TestSol, TestAbr; TestJob 7:13; JosAs 14:12; GrBar; ApcSed 2:1; Jos., Ant. 2, 277, Vi. 95; apolog. [exc. Mel.]) just the one who Mk 15:6 v.l. ὅπερ which indeed Ox 840, 35; ISm 4:1. πάντα ἅπερ whatever GPt 11:45.ⓚ used w. preposition (s. also above: 1bα; 1bβב; 1eβ,γ; 1f, and s. Johannessohn, Präp. 382f [ind.]), whereby a kind of conjunction is formed:β. w. εἰς: εἰς ὅ to this end 2 Th 1:11.γ. with ἐν: ἐν οἷς connects w. the situation described in what precedes under which circumstances = under these circumstances Lk 12:1; Ac 24:18 v.l.; 26:12. So also perh. ἐν ᾧ 1 Pt 1:6; 2:12; 3:16, 19; 4:4. S. also ἐν 7 and cp. 1bα above.δ. w. ἐπί: ἐφʼ ᾧ (normally, ‘for which’: Plut., Cimon 483 [8, 6] Cimon receives honors in requital for his generous deed [cp. the pl. ἐφʼ οἷς IPriene 114, 22 of honors heaped on a gymnasiarch for his numerous contributions]; cp. Plut., Mor. 522e and Diog. L. 7, 173. Conversely Plut., Aratus 1048 [44, 4]: A. suffers some dishonor ‘for what’ he did to one of his associates) has freq. been interpreted=ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that, because Ro 5:12 (lit. on ἁμαρτία 3a); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for 4:10. But a commercial metaphor may find expression in the first 3 passages cited here; s. ἐπί 6c. Difft. on Ro 5:12 JFitzmyer, NTS 39, ’93, 321–39; also comm. (Anchor), ad loc.: ‘with the result that, so that’ε. οὗ χάριν therefore Lk 7:47.ζ. in indications of time: ἀφʼ ἧς (s. ἀπό 2bγ and cp. BGU 252, 9 [98 A.D.]) from the time when; since Lk 7:45; Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4; Hs 8, 6, 6 v.l.; as soon as, after 8, 1, 4.—ἀφʼ οὗ (s. ἀπό 2bγ) when once, since Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18. ἄχρι οὗ (s. ἄχρι 1bα) until (the time when) Ac 7:18; Ro 11:25; 1 Cor 11:26; Gal 3:19. Also ἕως οὗ until Mt 1:25; 13:33; 14:22; 17:9; Lk 13:21; D 11:6 al. μέχρις οὗ until Mk 13:30; Gal 4:19.—On the gen. οὗ as an adv. of place s. it as a separate entry.② Demonstrative pron. this (one) (Hom.+; prose of Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. II 228f]; pap, LXX).ⓐ ὸ̔ς δέ but he (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 22; PRyl 144, 14 [38 A.D.]) Mk 15:23; J 5:11 v.l. Mostlyⓑ ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δέ the one … the other (Hippocr.+; very oft. in later wr.; POxy 1189, 7 [c. 117 A.D.]; SibOr 3, 654) the masc. in var. cases of sing. and pl. Mt 22:5; Lk 23:33; Ac 27:44; Ro 14:5; 1 Cor 11:21; 2 Cor 2:16; Jd 22f. ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δέ this … that Ro 9:21. ἃ μὲν … ἃ δέ (Lucian, Rhet. Praec. 15) some … others 2 Ti 2:20. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δὲ … ὸ̔ς δέ Mt 21:35; 25:15 (Lucian, Tim. 57 διδοὺς … ᾧ μὲν πέντε δραχμάς, ᾧ δέ μνᾶν, ᾧ δὲ ἡμιτάλαντον). ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δὲ … ὸ̔ δέ Mt 13:8b, 23. ᾧ μὲν … ἄλλῳ δὲ … ἑτέρῳ (ἄλλῳ δέ is then repeated five times, and before the last one there is a second ἑτέρῳ) 1 Cor 12:8–10. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἄλλο κτλ. Mk 4:4. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἕτερον (repeated several times) Lk 8:5. ἃ μὲν … ἄλλα δέ (repeated several times) Mt 13:4–8a. In anacoluthon οὓς μέν without οὓς δέ 1 Cor 12:28. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν Ro 14:2.—B-D-F §250. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 100f.—DELG 1 ὅς. M-M. -
17 retrasar
v.1 to postpone.retrasaron la fecha de la reunión the meeting was postponed, they put back the date of the meeting2 to delay, to hold up.María retrasó la fiesta Mary delayed the party.El chico retrasó al grupo The boy delayed the group.3 to slow down, to hold up.La lluvia retrasa el despegue The rain slows up the take-off.4 to set back.5 to put back (reloj).habrá que retrasar los relojes una hora the clocks will have to be put back an hour6 to pass back (sport) (balón).7 to be slow (reloj).* * *1 (atrasar) to delay, put off, postpone2 (reloj) to put back3 DEPORTE to pass back■ el público protestaba porque los jugadores retrasaban el balón the crowd protested because the players were passing the ball back1 (ir atrás) to fall behind2 (llegar tarde) to be late3 (reloj) to be slow1 (atrasarse) to be late, arrive late, be delayed2 (reloj) to be slow3 (trabajo, conocimientos, pagos) to fall behind* * *verb1) to delay2) postpone•* * *1. VT1) (=aplazar) [+ suceso, acción] to postpone, put off; [+ fecha] to put backretrasó en una hora su comparecencia ante la prensa — he postponed o put off his appearance before the press for an hour
el sorteo ha sido retrasado una semana — the draw has been postponed for a week o put back a week
2) (=retardar) to delay, hold upvarios problemas burocráticos retrasaron la salida del avión — a number of bureaucratic problems delayed o held up the departure of the plane
la nieve está retrasando el tráfico — the snow is holding up o delaying traffic
3) [+ reloj] to put back2.VI [reloj] to be slow3.See:* * *1.verbo transitivo1)a) < persona> to make... lateb) <producción/proceso> to delay, hold up2) <partida/fecha> to postpone3) < reloj> to put back2. 3.retrasarse v prona) ( llegar tarde) to be lateel tren se retrasó — the train was o arrived late
b) producción/trámite to be delayed, be held upc) (en trabajo, estudios, pagos) to fall behind* * *= delay, put back, set back, hold + Nombre + back, retard, hold up.Ex. It would be wise to delay reading these until you have had some experience in using the scheme.Ex. The spiral begins its downward swirl very early in life when a child has difficulty learning to read since this puts him back in his other school work.Ex. But if set-off did occur and threatened to set back and spoil subsequent impressions of the first forme, the tympan cloth could be rubbed over with lye to clean it.Ex. Despite the improvements in the 17th edition, the scheme has been held back for years by the old policy of 'integrity of numbers' referred to above, the effects of which are not likely to be quickly mitigated.Ex. Without the floppy disk, data processing on microcomputers would have been severely retarded.Ex. Unfortunately, goods of Community origin can also be held up by the surveillance system, often for several weeks.----* retrasar el avance = retard + progress.* retrasar el desarrollo de Algo = push back + development.* retrasar el envejecimiento = retard + aging.* retrasarse = run + late, be late (for).* * *1.verbo transitivo1)a) < persona> to make... lateb) <producción/proceso> to delay, hold up2) <partida/fecha> to postpone3) < reloj> to put back2. 3.retrasarse v prona) ( llegar tarde) to be lateel tren se retrasó — the train was o arrived late
b) producción/trámite to be delayed, be held upc) (en trabajo, estudios, pagos) to fall behind* * *= delay, put back, set back, hold + Nombre + back, retard, hold up.Ex: It would be wise to delay reading these until you have had some experience in using the scheme.
Ex: The spiral begins its downward swirl very early in life when a child has difficulty learning to read since this puts him back in his other school work.Ex: But if set-off did occur and threatened to set back and spoil subsequent impressions of the first forme, the tympan cloth could be rubbed over with lye to clean it.Ex: Despite the improvements in the 17th edition, the scheme has been held back for years by the old policy of 'integrity of numbers' referred to above, the effects of which are not likely to be quickly mitigated.Ex: Without the floppy disk, data processing on microcomputers would have been severely retarded.Ex: Unfortunately, goods of Community origin can also be held up by the surveillance system, often for several weeks.* retrasar el avance = retard + progress.* retrasar el desarrollo de Algo = push back + development.* retrasar el envejecimiento = retard + aging.* retrasarse = run + late, be late (for).* * *retrasar [A1 ]vtA1 ‹persona› to make … lateel tráfico nos retrasó the traffic made us late, we were delayed by the traffic, we got held up in the traffic2 ‹producción/proceso› to delay, hold upB «persona» ‹partida/fecha› to delay, put off, postponeC ‹reloj› to put back■ retrasarvi«reloj» to run slow1 (llegar tarde) to be latedate prisa, que estoy or voy retrasado hurry up, I'm lateel tren se retrasó the train was o arrived late2 «producción/trabajo/trámite» to be delayed, be held up3 (en el trabajo, los estudios) to fall behind; (en los pagos) to fall behind, get into arrearsse retrasó en presentar el informe she was late submitting the reportme he retrasado con esta traducción I'm behind with this translation* * *
retrasar ( conjugate retrasar) verbo transitivo
retrasarse verbo pronominal
retrasar
I verbo transitivo
1 (hacer que algo vaya más lento) to slow down: las obras retrasaron el tráfico, the road works held up the traffic
2 (posponer) to delay, postpone: tendremos que retrasar las vacaciones, we will have to put off our holidays ➣ Ver nota en delay 3 (un reloj) to put back: retrasé el reloj una hora al llegar a Dublín, I put my clock back one hour when I arrived in Dublin
' retrasar' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
dilatar
- entretener
- postergar
- retardar
- saber
- demorar
English:
defer
- delay
- hang up
- hold back
- hold up
- keep
- put back
- retard
- set back
- slow
- hold
- put
- set
* * *♦ vt1. [aplazar] to postpone;retrasaron la fecha de la reunión the meeting was postponed, they put back the date of the meeting2. [demorar] to delay, to hold up3. [hacer más lento] to slow down, to hold up;[pago, trabajo] to set back4. [reloj] to put back;habrá que retrasar los relojes una hora the clocks will have to be put back an hour♦ vi[reloj] to be slow* * *I v/t1 proceso, movimiento hold up, delay2 reloj put back3 reunión postpone, put back4 pelota pass backII v/i1 de reloj lose time* * *retrasar vt1) demorar, retardar: to delay, to hold up2) : to put off, to postpone* * *retrasar vb -
18 na
praep. 1. (wskazuje na kontakt z powierzchnią) [znajdować się] on- na stole/kanapie/krześle on the table/sofa/chair- na ścianie/drzwiach on the wall/door- na Ziemi/Księżycu on the Earth/Moon- na niebie in the sky- na jeziorze/rzece on the lake/river- na morzu at sea- na zdjęciu/obrazie (jako temat) in a photo/picture- na środku czegoś in the middle a. centre of sth- na początku/końcu czegoś at the beginning/end of sth- rana na nodze a wound on a a. in the leg- mieć na sobie marynarkę/płaszcz to be wearing a jacket/coat- nosiła pierścionek na małym palcu, a na szyi korale she had a ring on her little finger and beads (a)round her neck- włóż płaszcz na sweter put your coat on over your sweater2. (wskazuje na pomieszczenie, miejsce) at, in- na stadionie at the stadium- na korytarzu in the corridor- na ulicy in the street, outside- na ulicy Klonowej in a. on Klonowa Street- na dworcu/przystanku autobusowym at the station/bus stop- na staromiejskim rynku in the Old Town marketplace- na wschodzie/południu in the East/South- na Bliskim Wschodzie in the Middle East- na Ukrainie/Węgrzech in (the) Ukraine/in Hungary- na Śląsku/Mazowszu in Silesia/Mazovia- na wyspie/Borneo on an island/in Borneo- na wsi in the country- na uniwersytecie at (the) university/in the university- na wykładzie/przedstawieniu at a lecture/performance- na górze/dole (wysokość) at the top/bottom; (w budynku) upstairs/downstairs3. (wskazuje na kierunek) [pójść, prowadzić] to- na plażę/bagna to the beach/marshes- na stację/salę operacyjną to the station/the operating theatre- na Łotwę/Pomorze to Latvia/Pomerania- na Sycylię/Krym to Sicily/the Crimea- wyprawa na Mount Everest an expedition to Mount Everest- wspinać się na Giewont to climb Giewont- robotnicy wylegli na ulice workers took to the streets- dostał się na uniwersytet/prawo he entered university a. was admitted to university/he entered the law department- poszła na zebranie/koncert she went to a meeting/concert- iść/skręcać na północ/wschód to go/turn north/east- okna wychodzą na południe/na ogród the windows face south/look onto the garden- na północ/wschód od czegoś to the north/east of sth- na górę/dół (wyżej/niżej) up/down; (w budynku) upstairs/downstairs- patrzeć na kogoś to look at sb- postawić wazon na stół a. na stole to put a vase on the table- ładować meble na ciężarówkę to load furniture onto a lorry- przenosić się z miejsca na miejsce to move from place to place4. (wskazuje na odcinek czasu) for- wyjechać na tydzień/dwa dni to go away for a week/two days- na krótko for a bit a. a short while- na zawsze forever, for ever- muszę was na chwilę zostawić I’ll have to leave you for a moment- ptaki odleciały na zimę the birds have flown off for the winter- na pół godziny przed odlotem samolotu half an hour before the plane’s departure5. (wskazuje na termin) przygotuję ten referat na środę I’ll prepare the paper for Wednesday- miałeś zrobić tłumaczenie na wczoraj you were supposed to finish the translation by yesterday- przesuńmy zebranie na jutro let’s postpone the meeting till tomorrow- masz przyjść na drugą/lunch you must come at two/for lunch- jestem z nim umówiony na siedemnastą/na piątego stycznia I’m seeing him at 5 p.m./on January the fifth6. (wskazuje na okazję) for- na tę okazję for the occasion- sukienka na specjalne okazje a dress for special occasions- zjeść coś na śniadanie/lunch to have a. eat sth for breakfast/lunch- kupić komuś prezent na urodziny to buy sb a present for his/her birthday- zaprosić kogoś na imieniny/wigilię to invite sb to one’s name day party/for Christmas Eve- pójść na wesele/pogrzeb to go to a wedding/funeral- pocałować/pomachać komuś na pożegnanie to kiss/wave sb goodbye7. (z nazwami środków lokomocji) na nartach/rowerze on skis/on a bike- policjanci na koniach policemen on horseback- jechać na rowerze to cycle, to ride a bike- latać na lotni to go hang-gliding- jeździć na łyżwach/wrotkach to skate a. go skating/to (roller) skate a. go (roller) skating- chodzić/stać na rękach to walk/stand on one’s hands- skakać na jednej nodze to hop on one foot- zjechał na nartach ze zbocza he skied down the slope- dziecko poruszało się na pupie po całym pokoju the baby shuffled around the room on his/her bottom8. (wskazujące na podporę) on- stolik na kółkach a table on a. with wheels- pantofle na wysokim obcasie highheeled shoes- pantofle na płaskim obcasie low-heeled shoes, flats US- fotel/konik na biegunach a rocking chair/horse- spodnie na szelkach/pasku trousers with braces/with a belt- prowadzić psa na smyczy to lead a dog on a leash- leżeć na brzuchu/plecach to lie on one’s stomach/back- oprzeć się na łokciu/na lasce to lean on one’s elbow/a cane9. (z nazwami narzędzi, urządzeń, instrumentów) on- na komputerze/kalkulatorze on a computer/calculator- pisać na maszynie to type, to write on a typewriter- uszyć sukienkę na maszynie to machine(-sew) a dress- grać na skrzypcach/fortepianie to play (on) the violin/piano- zagrać jakąś melodię na skrzypcach/fortepianie to play a tune on the violin/piano- robić na drutach to knit10. (wskazuje na sposób) pranie na sucho dry-cleaning- jajka na twardo/miękko hard-boiled/soft-boiled eggs- usmażyć coś na maśle/oleju to fry sth in butter/oil- ten rosół jest na wołowinie, nie na kurczaku this is beef broth, not chicken broth- nalewka na wiśniach cherry brandy- sprzedawać coś na sztuki/tuziny to sell sth by the piece/dozen- kupić coś na raty to pay for sth by a. in instalments- pomalować coś na niebiesko/zielono to paint sth blue/green- ubierać się na biało/czarno to dress in white/black- „podawać na zimno/gorąco” ‘serve cold/hot’- (ona) uczy się na piątki she always gets top marks11. (wskazuje na przeznaczenie) for- mięso na befsztyki/zupę meat for steak/soup- butelka na mleko a milk bottle- materiał na sukienkę dress material- stojak na buty a shoe rack- syrop na kaszel cough syrup- koncert na skrzypce i fortepian a concerto for violin and piano- dom na sprzedaż a house for sale- sztućce/stół na cztery osoby cutlery/a table for four (people)- brała krople na serce she took drops for her heart- nie mam już miejsca na książki I don’t have any more room for books- na dokończenie tego mieliśmy tylko dwie godziny we only had two hours to finish it- nie trać czasu na głupstwa don’t waste time on trifles- brakuje pieniędzy na zasiłki there’s a shortage of money for benefits12. (wskazuje na cel) for- zabrali go do szpitala na operację they took him to hospital for an operation- poszedł na egzamin he went to take a. went off for his exam- idę do znajomych na brydża I’m going to my friends to play (some) bridge a. for a game of bridge- umówmy się na piwo let’s meet for a beer- muszę pójść na zakupy I have to do some a. go shopping- na co chcesz pójść (do kina)? what (film) would you like to see?- wybrać się na grzyby/ryby to go mushroom picking/fishing- skoczył do wody jemu/jej na ratunek he jumped into the water to save him/her13. (wskazuje na skutek) to, into- podarł spodnie na strzępy he tore his trousers to shreds- wazon rozbił się na kawałki the vase smashed to pieces- porąbał drewno na kawałki he chopped the wood into pieces- pokrój mięso na plastry/kawałki cut the meat into slices/chunks- gips strwardniał na kamień the plaster set as hard as rock- przerobiła sukienkę na spódnicę she turned the dress into a skirt- przebudowali piwnicę na sklep they converted the cellar into a shop- rodzice wychowali go na uczciwego człowieka his parents brought him up to be an honest man14. (wskazuje na przyczynę) at- na czyjąś prośbę/zaproszenie at sb’s request/invitation- na czyjś rozkaz at sb’s order- na widok kogoś/czegoś at the sight of sb/sth- na dźwięk dzwonka wyskoczył z wanny at the sound of the bell he jumped out of the bath- na myśl o tym zrobiło mu się słabo he felt faint at the (very) thought of it- śledztwo rozpoczęto na wniosek poszkodowanego the investigation was opened at the request of the injured party- na nasz apel zgłosiło się wielu ochotników many volunteers responded to our appeal- oskarżeni utrzymują, że strzelali na rozkaz the accused claim that they were ordered to shoot- chorować na grypę to be ill with flu- przystanek na żądanie a request stop GB, a flagstop US15. (w pomiarach, obliczeniach) 100 kilometrów na godzinę a hundred kilometres per a. an hour- dwa razy na tydzień/rok twice a week/year- jeden student na dziesięciu one student in ten a. out of ten- na jedno miejsce było sześciu kandydatów there were six candidates per place- bieg na 100 metrów the 100 metres sprint- głęboki/długi na sześć metrów six metres deep/long- drzwi były otwarte na całą szerokość the door was wide open- podszedłem do niego na odległość kilku kroków I came to within several steps of him- poziom wody podniósł się na wysokość pierwszego piętra the level of the water rose up to the first floor- jak na swoje lata, jest w doskonałej formie he’s in excellent form for his years- jak na emeryta, ma spore dochody for a pensioner he has quite a large income- pomidory, jak na krajowe, są znakomite for Polish tomatoes they’re delicious- suma, jak na owe czasy, ogromna a huge sum for a. in those days a. times- na ówczesne warunki (for) the way things were at the time; for the conditions prevailing at that time książk.- na co? what for?- na co ci ołówek? what do you need a pencil for?- i na co wam to było? what did you have to do that for?* * *prep(+acc) ( kierunek) tona plażę/wieś — to the beach/country
na Węgry/Kubę — to Hungary/Cuba
wchodzić (wejść perf) na drzewo — to climb a tree
na zachód/północ — west/north, westward(s)/northward(s)
wpadać (wpaść perf) na kogoś — to bump into sb ( okres)
na 5 minut przed na — +loc five minutes before... ( termin)
na czwartą — ( zrobić coś) by four (o'clock); ( przyjść) at four (o'clock) ( okazja)
na sztuki/tuziny — by the piece/the dozen
na raty — on hire purchase (BRIT) lub installments (US)
na czyjąś prośbę/zaproszenie — at sb's request/invitation
na czyjś sygnał/życzenie — on sb's signal/wish
chory na grypę — ill lub sick (US) with flu ( miara)
dwa razy na tydzień — twice a lub per week
jeden na dziesięć — one in ten, one out of ten
malować (pomalować perf) coś na biało — to paint sth white ( przeznaczenie)
kosz na śmieci — dustbin (BRIT), garbage can (US)
jechać na wakacje/wycieczkę — to go on holiday/a trip
iść na wykład/koncert — to go to a lecture/concert ( z przysłówkami)
* * *naprep.+ Loc.1. ( miejsce) on, at, in ( często nie tłumaczony jako przyimek); na stole on the table; na ścianie on the wall; na górze/na dole up/down; at the top/bottom ( czegoś of sth); (= na piętrze/na parterze) upstairs/downstairs; na ulicy on the street; Br. in the street; na Siódmej Ulicy on Seventh Street; Br. in Seventh Street; na Pennsylvania Avenue pod numerem 10 Br. at 10 Pennsylvania Avenue; na Alasce/Litwie in Alaska/Lithuania; na deszczu (out) in the rain; na dworze (= na zewnątrz) outside, outdoors; na koniu on a horse, on horseback; na korytarzu in the corridor; na palcu/głowie on one's finger/head; mieć mnóstwo spraw na głowie przen. have a lot on one's mind l. shoulders; na początku/końcu czegoś at the beginning/end of sth; na polu in the field; na uniwersytecie/poczcie at the university/post office; na zachodzie in the west.3. (= podczas) at, during, on; na zebraniu/koncercie at a meeting/concert; na wakacjach on vacation; Br. on holiday; na wycieczce on a trip l. excursion; spędzać czas na czytaniu spend one's time reading.4. ( środek lokomocji) on; jechać na koniu ride (on) a horse; jeździć na nartach ski, go skiing; jeździć na rowerze ride (on) a bicycle, ride a bike.5. ( ruch lub pozycja ciała) on; chodzić na rękach walk on one's hands; leżeć na boku lie on one's side; na nogach (t. przen. = w dobrej kondycji) on one's feet.6. ( instrument) on; grać na skrzypcach/fortepianie play the violin/piano; grać melodię na fortepianie play a tune on the piano.8. ( precyzowanie znaczenia rzeczownika) buty na wysokich obcasach high-heeled shoes; ciasto na drożdżach yeast dough; nalewka na wiśniach cherry liqueur; koń na biegunach rocking horse.9. (po czasownikach l. przymiotnikach) oszczędzać na czymś economize on sth; wprawiać się na czymś cut one's teeth on sth; wychowany na czymś brought up l. raised on sth.prep.+ Acc.1. (kierunek l. cel) to, toward(s), on, upon ( często nie tłumaczony jako przyimek); na Alaskę/Litwę to Alaska/Lithuania; na stolicę (o celu marszu, operacji wojskowej) toward l. on the capital; na górę/na dół up/down; ( po schodach) upstairs/downstairs; na pocztę/dworzec kolejowy to the post office/railroad station; na ulicę (out) into the street; na zachód west, westward(s); wyjść na ulicę (euf. = zacząć uprawiać prostytucję) go on the streets.2. (po czasownikach l. przymiotnikach) chory na głowę (pot. = szalony) sick in the head, brainsick; chorować l. cierpieć na coś suffer from sth; cieszyć się na coś look forward to sth; krzyczeć na kogoś shout at sb; patrzeć na kogoś/coś look at sb/sth; zanosi się na deszcz it's going to rain; zły na kogoś/coś angry at/with sb/sth.5. (termin, wyznaczony czas) (dokładnie) na czas (right) on time; obiad będzie na piątą dinner will be (ready) at five; umówić się na środę agree to meet on Wednesday, schedule an appointment for Wednesday; wracam na Wielkanoc I'll be back l. returning for Easter; zrobię to na jutro I'll do it for tomorrow.7. ( przeznaczenie) kosz na śmieci waste-paper basket; materiał na sukienkę dress material; koncert na fortepian muz. piano concerto; skrzynka na listy mailbox; Br. letter-box.8. ( sposób) with, by; walczyć na miecze fight with swords; kupować na raty buy on installments; kupować/sprzedawać na sztuki buy/sell by the piece.9. ( miara) 100 kilometrów na godzinę a hundred kilometers an hour/per hour; szeroki na dwa metry two meters wide; raz na rok once a year.10. (przyczyna, bodziec) on, upon, at, to; co ty na to? what do you say?, what would you say to that?; na żądanie on demand; na czyjąś prośbę/czyjś rozkaz on l. at sb's request/order; na widok kogoś/czegoś at the sight of sb/sth; na wieść o wypadku upon the news of the accident; odpowiedzieć na pytanie answer a question.11. ( podział) into, in; drzeć coś na kawałki tear sth into l. to pieces; dzielenie włosa na czworo przen. hair-splitting; dzielić/łamać/składać coś na pół divide/break/fold sth in half.14. ( cel) to, for, into; być przyjętym na (Uniwersytet) Yale be accepted at l. by Yale (University); dostać się na wydział chemii get into the chemistry department; iść na przyjęcie/zebranie go to a party/meeting; iść na ryby go fishing; iść na spacer go for a walk; jechać na wycieczkę go on an excursion; wyskoczyć na miasto go out, go into town.15. ( w utarych zwrotach) na dobitkę to crown it all, to top it (all) off, on top of all that; na domiar złego to make matters worse; na przykład for example, for instance; jak na złość ironically; na zakończenie finally; na złamanie karku at breakneck speed l. pace, helter-skelter.16. ( w równoważnikach zdań) na pomoc! help!; na koń! mount up!; na zdrowie! ( toast) cheers!; ( odpowiedź na kichnięcie) bless you!prep.z przysłówkami, przymiotnikami i wyrazami nieodmiennymi3. ( sposób) na czczo on an empty stomach; na leżąco lying (down), reclining, prone; jajko na twardo hard-boiled egg; na wznak on the back.4. ( relacje przestrzenne) na zewnątrz (czegoś) outside (sth); na wprost (straight) on l. ahead; (= naprzeciw) opposite; na zachód/lewo ( o położeniu) to the west/left ( od czegoś of sth).5. ( w utartych zwrotach) wszystko na nic/na próżno (it's) all for nothing/in vain.The New English-Polish, Polish-English Kościuszko foundation dictionary > na
-
19 mettre
mettre [mεtʀ]━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━➭ TABLE 561. <━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━► Lorsque mettre s'emploie dans des expressions telles que mettre qch en place, se mettre à table, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━a. ( = placer) to put• où mets-tu tes verres ? where do you keep your glasses?► mettre qch à (+ infinitif)• mettre du linge à sécher (à l'intérieur) to hang washing up to dry ; (à l'extérieur) to hang washing out to dryb. ( = revêtir) to put onc. ( = consacrer) to take• il y a mis le temps ! he's taken his time!• je suis prêt à mettre 500 € I'm willing to give 500 eurosd. ( = faire fonctionner) to put one. ( = installer) [+ eau] to lay on ; [+ placards] to put in ; [+ étagères, rideaux] to put up ; [+ moquette] to layf. ( = supposer) mettons que je me sois trompé let's say I've got it wrong• si un pays, mettons la Norvège, décide... if a country, Norway say, decides...• va te faire mettre ! (vulg!) fuck off! (vulg!)2. <a. ( = se placer) [objet] to go• il y a un bout de métal qui s'est mis dans l'engrenage a piece of metal has got caught in the worksb. ( = s'habiller) se mettre en short to put on a pair of shortsc. ( = s'ajouter) il s'est mis de l'encre sur les doigts he's got ink on his fingersd. ( = se grouper) ils se sont mis à plusieurs pour pousser la voiture several of them joined forces to push the car• se mettre avec qn ( = faire équipe) to team up with sb ; (en ménage) (inf) to move in with sb (inf)e. ( = commencer) to start• qu'est-ce que tu es énervant quand tu t'y mets ! (inf) you can be a real pain once you get started! (inf)► se mettre à + nom• il s'est bien mis à l'anglais he's really taken to English► se mettre à + infinitif• voilà qu'il se met à pleuvoir ! and now it's starting to rain!* * *mɛtʀ
1.
1) (placer dans un endroit, une position) to put2) ( projeter involontairement) to drop [confiture, beurre] ( sur on); to spill [liquide, poudre] ( sur on)3) ( placer sur le corps) to put on [écharpe, fard]4) ( placer dans le corps) to put in5) ( porter habituellement sur le corps) to wear6) (placer dans une situation, un état)7) ( classer)mettre quelque chose avant tout le reste or au-dessus de tout — to put something
8) ( disposer)9) ( faire fonctionner)mettre la radio/les nouvelles — to put the radio/the news on
mets plus/moins fort! — turn it up/down!
10) ( installer) to put in [chauffage, douche, téléphone, placard]; to put up [rideau, lustre, étagère]mettre du carrelage/de la moquette — to lay tiles/a carpet
faire mettre de la moquette — ( dans plusieurs pièces) to have carpets laid
11) ( écrire) to put up [inscription]il met que tout va bien — ( dans une lettre) he says ou writes that everything's fine
mettre au passif/en anglais — to put into the passive/into English
est-ce qu'on met un trait d'union à ‘multinational’? — is there a hyphen in ‘multinational’?
mettez le pronom qui convient — ( remplacez) replace with the appropriate pronoun; ( bouchez les trous) insert the appropriate pronom
13) ( consacrer)14) (investir, dépenser) to put [argent] (dans, sur into)combien pouvez-vous mettre? — ( pour acheter) how much can you afford?; ( pour contribuer) how much can you put in?
mettre un temps fou — (colloq) to take ages (colloq)
16) (colloq) ( vendre)17) ( attribuer) to give [note]18) (colloq) ( dire)mettons dix dollars/à dix heures — let's say ten dollars/at ten
19) (colloq) ( supposer)20) (sl) ( ficher)tu peux te le mettre où je pense or quelque part — you know where you can put it (colloq)
2.
verbe intransitifmettre bas — gén [vache] to calve; [brebis] to lamb; [jument] to foal
3.
se mettre verbe pronominal1) (se placer dans un endroit, une position)se mettre devant la fenêtre — ( debout) to stand in front of the window; ( assis) to sit down in front of the window
2) ( projeter involontairement sur soi) to spill [something] on oneself [liquide, poudre]3) ( placer sur son corps) to put on [veste, fard]4) ( placer dans son corps) to put in5) ( commencer)6) ( tourner)le temps s'est mis au froid/à la pluie — the weather has turned cold/to rain
7) (se placer dans une situation, un état)on va se mettre ensemble — (colloq) ( sous le même toit) we're going to live together
8) ( s'habiller)9) ( se grouper)* * *mɛtʀ vt1) (= placer) to putmettre en sac — to put in bags, to put in sacks
mettre qch à la poste — to post sth Grande-Bretagne to mail sth USA
mettre qn en examen pour qch — to charge Grande-Bretagne sb with sth, to indict USA sb for sth
2) [vêtements] (= revêtir) to put on, (= porter) to wearMets ton gilet. — Put your cardigan on.
Je mets mon manteau et j'arrive. — I'll put on my coat and then I'll be ready.
Je ne mets plus mon manteau. — I no longer wear my coat.
Elle ne met pas souvent de jupe. — She doesn't often wear a skirt.
3) (= faire fonctionner) [chauffage, électricité] to put on, [réveil, minuteur] to setIl fait froid, je vais mettre le chauffage. — It's cold, I'm going to put the heating on.
4) (= installer) [gaz, eau] to put in, to lay onfaire mettre le gaz — to have gas put in, to have gas installed
faire mettre l'électricité — to have electricity put in, to have electricity installed
5) (= consacrer)mettre du temps à faire qch — to take time to do sth, to take time over sth
mettre 2 heures à faire qch — to take 2 hours to do sth, to take 2 hours over sth
Elle met des heures à se préparer. — She takes hours to get ready.
6) (= noter, écrire) to putmettez les mots suivants au pluriel:... — put the following words into the plural:...
7) (= supposer)mettons que... — let's suppose that..., let's say that...
* * *mettre verb table: mettreA vtr1 (placer dans un endroit, une position) to put [chose, partie du corps, personne]; mettre un vase sur la table/des bûches dans la cheminée/le vin au frais to put a vase on the table/logs on the fire/the wine in a cool place; j'ai mis ta voiture au garage I've put your car in the garage for you; mettre les pieds sur la table/les mains sur la tête to put one's feet on the table/one's hands on one's head; mettre les mains en l'air/un timbre à l'envers to put one's hands up/a stamp on upside down; on m'a mis devant/tout au fond they put me at the front/right at the back; je l'ai mise sur ses pieds I put her on her feet; je mets les enfants à la crèche I send the children to a creche; il m'a mis en bas de chez moi he dropped me off outside my door; on m'a mis debout they stood me up; nous l'avons mise à l'hôtel we put her up at the hotel;2 ( projeter involontairement) to drop [solide]; to spill [liquide, poudre]; mettre de la confiture sur le tapis to drop jam on the carpet; mettre de la colle/farine partout to spill glue/flour all over the place;3 ( placer sur le corps) to put on [vêtement, bijou, maquillage, lunettes, préservatif, serviette]; mets ton écharpe put your scarf on; je vais mettre du mascara I'll put some mascara on;4 ( placer dans le corps) to put in [tampon, suppositoire, plombage]; on m'a mis un plombage I had a filling;5 ( porter habituellement sur le corps) to wear [lunettes, type de vêtement, parfum]; dans mon école les garçons mettent des cravates in my school boys wear ties; je ne mets jamais de chapeau I never wear a hat;6 (placer dans une situation, un état) mettre qn dans une situation embarrassante to put sb in an embarrassing situation; mettre qn en colère/en joie to make sb angry/happy; mettre qn en fureur to enrage sb; mettre qn au désespoir to drive sb to despair; mettre qn de bonne/mauvaise humeur to put sb in a good/bad mood; tu me mets hors de moi you infuriate me; mettre qn à la chaîne/à la reliure to put sb on the assembly line/on binding; mettre qn au travail to put sb to work; mettre qn au piano/au latin to start sb on the piano/on Latin; mettre les enfants à regarder la télévision to put the children in front of the television; si vous nous quittez, on mettra quelqu'un d'autre if you leave us, we'll find somebody else; mettre le riz à cuire to put the rice on; mettre le linge à sécher to put the washing out to dry;7 ( classer) mettre la famille avant tout le reste to put one's family first; mettre ses études au-dessus de tout to put one's studies first; je le mets au premier rang de tous les écrivains I rank him the best writer of all;8 ( disposer) mettre les assiettes to put the plates on the table; mettre les verres/la moutarde/un cendrier to put out the glasses/the mustard/an ashtray; mettre les chaises/une autre chaise to bring chairs/another chair; mettre une nappe to put on a tablecloth; je t'ai mis des draps propres I've put clean sheets on for you;9 ( faire fonctionner) mettre la radio/la télévision/le chauffage to put the radio/the television/the heating on; mettre les nouvelles/la deuxième chaîne to put the news/channel 2 on; mettre plus fort to turn up [appareil]; mettre moins fort to turn down [appareil]; mets plus/moins fort! turn it up/down!; mettre les essuie-glaces/les phares to switch on ou put on the windscreen GB ou windshield US wipers/the headlights; mettre le réveil to set the alarm; mettre le verrou to bolt the door; mettre le loquet to latch the door;10 ( installer) to put in [chauffage, douche, téléphone, placard]; to put up [rideau, lustre, étagère]; faire mettre le téléphone to have a telephone put in; je t'ai mis une prise I've put in a socket for you; mettre de la moquette to lay a carpet; faire mettre de la moquette ( dans une pièce) to have a carpet laid; ( dans plusieurs pièces) to have carpets laid; mettre du carrelage to lay tiles;11 ( écrire) to put up [inscription]; ils ont mis des graffiti partout/sur la colonne they've put graffiti everywhere/on the column; il met que tout va bien ( dans une lettre) he says ou writes that everything's fine; qu'est-ce que je dois mettre? what shall I put?; mettre au passif/au singulier to put into the passive/into the singular; mettre en vers to put into verse; je t'ai mis un mot I've left you a note; est-ce qu'on met un trait d'union à ‘multinational’? is there a hyphen in ‘multinational’?; il faut mettre un trait d'union you must put a hyphen in; mettre sa signature sur un document to put one's signature to a document; mettez votre signature ici sign here; mettez le pronom qui convient ( remplacez) replace with the appropriate pronoun; ( bouchez les trous) insert the appropriate pronom; mettre en musique to set to music; mettre en anglais to put into English; mettre son brouillon au propre or au net to write out ou up one 's notes;12 ( ajouter) to add [ingrédient] (dans to); to put [accessoire, élément décoratif]; mettre du sel dans la soupe to put some salt in the soup; mettre un peu de piment dans un récit to add a little spice to a story; mettre une sonnette à son vélo/des pompons à ses pantoufles to put a bell on one's bicycle/pompoms on one's slippers; mettre une radio à sa voiture/une doublure à sa veste to put a radio in one's car/a lining in one's jacket;13 ( consacrer) mettre tout son cœur dans son travail to put one's heart into one's work; y mettre du sien to put oneself into it; mettre toute son énergie à essayer de comprendre to put all one's energy into trying to understand; mettre des moyens importants au service d'une cause to use all possible means to further a cause; mettre de la rigueur dans sa démarche to become more thorough in one's approach;14 (investir, dépenser) to put [argent] (dans, sur into); mettre tout son argent dans son commerce to put all one's money into one's business; j'ai tout mis sur le pétrole I've put everything into oil; il a tout mis sur un cheval/une équipe he's put everything on a horse/a team; combien pouvez-vous mettre? ( pour acheter) how much can you afford?; ( pour contribuer) how much can you put in?;15 ( prendre) [activité] to take [heures, jours, années] (pour faire to do); elle a bien mis une heure it took her easily an hour; mettre un temps fou○ to take ages○;16 ○( vendre) je vous mets des tomates? would you like some tomatoes?; je vous en mets combien? deux, trois? how many would you like? two, three?;17 ○( attribuer) je vous ai mis trois sur vingt I've given you three out of twenty;18 ○( battre) ils nous ont mis trois à zéro they beat us three nil GB ou three to nothing US; je lui ai mis une gifle I gave him/her a slap (across the face); tu veux que je te mette mon poing sur la figure? do you want my fist in your face○?; qu'est-ce qu'il m'a mis! what a thrashing○ he gave me!;20 ○( dire) mettons dix dollars/à dix heures let's say ten dollars/at ten;21 ○( supposer) mettons qu'il vienne, qu'est-ce que vous ferez? supposing ou say he comes, what will you do?;22 ◑( ficher) tu peux te le mettre où je pense or quelque part you know where you can put○ it ou stick◑ it; va te faire mettre get stuffed◑!B vi Vét, Zool mettre bas gén to give birth, to drop; [vache] to calve; [brebis] to lamb; [jument] to foal.C se mettre vpr1 (se placer dans un endroit, une position) se mettre devant la fenêtre ( debout) to stand in front of the window; ( assis) to sit down in front of the window; ( couché) to lie (down) in front of the window; se mettre sur les mains to stand on one's hands; se mettre sur le dos to lie on one's back; se mettre au lit to go to bed; se mettre debout to stand up; se mettre sur ses jambes to get to one's feet; ne plus savoir où se mettre not to know where to put oneself; se mettre les mains sur la tête to put one's hands on one's head; se mettre les doigts dans le nez to pick one's nose; où est-ce que ça se met? where does this go?;2 ( projeter involontairement sur soi) to spill [sth] on oneself [liquide, poudre]; se mettre de la confiture to get jam on oneself; se mettre de la boue sur ses chaussures/de l'encre sur le nez/une poussière dans l'œil to get mud on one's shoes/ink on one's nose/some grit in one's eye; s'en mettre partout to get it all over oneself;3 ( placer sur son corps) to put on [vêtement, bijou, maquillage]; se mettre un foulard/un collier/du rouge à lèvres to put on a scarf/a necklace/lipstick; se mettre de la poudre sur le visage to put some powder on one's face, to powder one's face; je ne sais pas quoi me mettre I don't know what to put on;4 ( placer dans son corps) to put in [suppositoire, tampon];5 ( commencer) se mettre à l'anglais/au tennis to take up English/tennis; se mettre à prendre des somnifères to start taking sleeping pills; ma voiture se met à avoir des problèmes my car is starting to go wrong; il va se mettre à pleuvoir it's going to start raining; il se met à faire froid/du vent it's starting to get cold/windy;6 ( tourner) le temps s'est mis au froid/au beau/à la pluie the weather has turned cold/fine/to rain;7 ( se lancer) elle s'est mise à leur recherche she started looking for them; je me suis mis sur l'affaire I started looking into the case;8 (se placer dans une situation, un état) se mettre en tort to put oneself in the wrong; se mettre dans une situation impossible to get (oneself) into an impossible situation; se mettre dans une sale affaire to get involved in some shady business; je me mets de ton côté I'm on your side; je préfère me mettre bien avec lui I prefer to get on the right side of him; se mettre à l'aise to make oneself comfortable; se mettre en colère to get angry; se mettre nu to take off one's clothes; on va se mettre ensemble○ ( sous le même toit) we're going to live together; il s'est mis avec elle○ ( de son côté) he's on her side; ( sous le même toit) he's moved in with her;9 ( s'habiller) se mettre en tenue d'été to put on summer clothes; se mettre en arlequin to dress up as Harlequin; se mettre en jaune to wear yellow;10 ( se grouper) ce n'est pas la peine de vous (y) mettre à dix there's no need for ten of you; ils s'y sont mis à au moins trente there were at least thirty of them;11 ○( manger) je m'en suis mis un maximum I really stuffed○ myself; s'en mettre plein la panse○ or lampe○ or gueule● to stuff○ oneself; qu'est-ce qu'on s'est mis! we really stuffed○ ourselves!;12 ( se battre) qu'est-ce qu'on s'est mis! we really laid○ into each other![mɛtr] verbe transitif1. [placer] to putmettre sa confiance/tout son espoir en to put one's trust/all one's hopes inmettre quelqu'un dans: mettre quelqu'un dans l'avion/le train to put somebody on the plane/the trainmettre quelqu'un en: mettre un enfant en pension to put a child in a ou to send a child to boarding schoolmettre de l'argent sur son compte to put ou to pay some money into one's accountmettre la main sur le bras de quelqu'un to lay ou to put one's hand on somebody's arm3. [disposer]4. [ajuster] to setmets la sonnerie à 20 h 30 set the alarm for 8:30 p.m5. [établir - dans un état, une situation]mettre quelqu'un au travail to set somebody to work, to get somebody workinga. [perplexité] to put somebody in a predicamentb. [pauvreté] to put somebody in financial difficultymettre du vin en bouteilles to put wine into bottles, to bottle winemettre du linge à sécher to put ou to hang clothes up to drymettre quelque chose à tremper to put something to soak, to soak something6. [fixer] to putmettre une pièce à un pantalon to put a patch on ou to patch a pair of trousers[ajouter] to put7. [se vêtir, se coiffer, se chausser de] to put on (separable)[porter régulièrement] to wearje lui ai mis son manteau/ses gants I put his coat/his gloves on (for him)8. [faire fonctionner - appareil] to turn ou to put ou to switch on (separable)mets de la musique put some music on, play some musicmettre du papier peint/de la moquette dans une pièce to wallpaper/to carpet a room10. [consacrer - temps] to takeelle a mis trois mois à me répondre she took three months ou it took her three months to answer menous y mettrons le temps/le prix qu'il faudra we'll spend as much time/money as we have tomettre de l'argent dans une voiture to put money in ou into a car11. [écrire] to puton met un accent sur le "e" "e" takes an accenton met deux m à "pomme" "pomme" has two m's12. [supposer]et mettons que tu gagnes? suppose ou let's say you win?il faut, mettons, 2 mètres de tissu we need, (let's) say ou shall we say, 2 metres of materialmettons que j'ai mal compris! [acceptation] let's just say I got it wrong!13. [donner] to givele prof m'a mis 18 ≃ the teacher gave me an A14. (familier) [infliger]qu'est-ce qu'il m'a mis au ping-pong! he really hammered me ou he didn't half thrash me at table tennis!je lui ai mis une bonne claque I gave ou landed him a good clout15. (locution)————————se mettre verbe pronominal (emploi passif)1. [dans une position, un endroit - chose] to goles pieds, ça ne se met pas sur la table! tables aren't made to put your feet on!2. [aller - vêtement] to go————————se mettre verbe pronominal intransitif1. [s'installer, s'établir - dans une position]a. [debout] stand near the windowb. [assis] sit near the windowmettez-vous en cercle arrange yourselves into ou form a circle2. [entrer - dans un état, une situation]il s'est mis dans une position difficile he's got ou put himself in a difficult situation3. [s'habiller]4. [s'unir]a. [pour un jeu] to team up with somebodyb. [pour vivre] to move in with somebodyc. [dans une discussion] to side with somebodyon s'est mis par équipes de 6 we split up into ou we formed teams of 6 (people)5. (locution)a. (très familier) [dans un combat, un débat] they're really having a go at each other!b. [en mangeant] they're really getting stuck in!————————se mettre verbe pronominal transitifto put on (separable)se mettre une belle robe/du parfum to put on a nice dress/some perfume————————se mettre à verbe pronominal plus préposition1. [passer à]le temps se met au froid it's getting ou turning cold2. [commencer]se mettre à l'ouvrage to set to work, to get down to worka. [au travail] to get down to itb. [à une activité nouvelle] to have a trysi tu t'y mets aussi, je renonce! if you join in as well, I give up! -
20 thème
thème [tεm]masculine nouna. ( = sujet) themeb. ( = traduction) translation (into a foreign language)* * *tɛmnom masculin1) (de débat, d'émission) topic, subject; (de discours, film) theme2) ( traduction) prose3) Musique theme•Phrasal Verbs:* * *tɛm nm1) (= sujet) theme2) ÉDUCATION (= traduction) prose (composition)* * *thème nm1 ( sujet) (de débat, d'émission) topic, subject; (de discours, film) theme; thème de réflexion topic for thought; le débat aura pour thème principal… the main topic for discussion will be…;2 ( traduction) prose, translation (into the foreign language); faire un thème latin to do a Latin prose;3 Mus theme;thème astral Astrol birth chart.[tɛm] nom masculin2. [traduction] translation into a foreign languagethème astral nom masculin
См. также в других словарях:
Translation — For other uses, see Translation (disambiguation). Translator redirects here. For other uses, see Translator (disambiguation). Contents 1 Etymology 2 Theory … Wikipedia
One Piece — redirects here. For the clothing, see One piece swimsuit. One Piece First volume of One Piece, released in Japan by Shueisha on December 24, 1997 ONE PIEC … Wikipedia
One-shot learning — is an object categorization problem of current research interest in computer vision. Whereas most machine learning based object categorization algorithms require training on hundreds or thousands of images and very large datasets, one shot… … Wikipedia
One of Them — Lost episode Sayid and Locke talk to Henry Gale Episode no … Wikipedia
One If By Land (Jericho episode) — One If By Land Jericho episode Episode no. Season 1 Episode 20 Directed by Seith Mann Written by … Wikipedia
One Man's Terrorist — Jericho episode Episode no. Season 1 Episode 17 Directed by Christine Moore Written by … Wikipedia
One Thousand and One Nights — Arabian Nights redirects here. For other uses, see Arabian Nights (disambiguation). For other uses, see One Thousand and One Nights (disambiguation). Arab World … Wikipedia
TRANSLATION AND TRANSLATORS — The earliest Jewish translations, apart from possible examples in the Bible, are the Greek version of the Pentateuch and, later, other books of the Bible, which were made to fill a need in the Greek speaking Jewish community of Alexandria and… … Encyclopedia of Judaism
Translation memory — A translation memory, or TM, is a type of database that stores segments that have been previously translated. A translation memory system stores the words, phrases and paragraphs that have already been translated and aid human translators. The… … Wikipedia
For loop — In computer science a for loop is a programming language statement which allows code to be repeatedly executed. A for loop is classified as an iteration statement.Unlike many other kinds of loops, such as the while loop, the for loop is often… … Wikipedia
One Ring — The One Ring is a fictional artifact that appears as the central plot element in J. R. R. Tolkien s Middle earth fantasy novels. It is described in an earlier story, The Hobbit (1937), as a magic ring of invisibility. The sequel The Lord of the… … Wikipedia